Home

Product Reference Guide

1. Figure 5 16 Mobile Companion WLAN Profiles Select a profile from the list box and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile The active profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left Once selected the terminal is using the ESSID encryption and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile Editing a Profile Select a profile from the list box and tap Edit to display the Mode tab where the ESSID and operating mode can be changed for the profile Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as necessary to edit the profile power consumption and security parameters Creating a New Profile Tap New to display the Mode tab wherein the profile name and ESSID can be set Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security network address information and power consumption level for the new profile Deleting a Profile Select a profile to delete from the list box and tap Delete to remove the selected profile Ordering Profiles select a profile from the list box and tap Move Up or Move Down to order the profile If the current profile association is lost Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list and then the next until a new association is achieved 5 21 C PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radi
2. 10 26 Pocket Excel iiakas kbhes beens 10 24 Pocket Word bcevevesevesesdees 10 20 contacting Symbol XX contacts application secs ee WA 10 6 summary screen 10 8 county COGS oiccasdad redd o dard 5 8 6 8 cradle inserting terminal 4 13 performing ActiveSync 4 9 4 11 4 14 cradles serial cradle 1 6 1 7 creating messages 10 18 creating splash screen 12 21 D DNE PS E PE EE 3 35 default gateway 5 11 6 14 deleting bluetooth bond 8 12 demo program eee B 1 LU 24305 23 mosdd ete da SERES B 16 audio settings B 11 CE applications B 16 file explorer oiscnsebsadecesau beens B 4 SCANNE 62254444245 PAC B 3 scanner settings B 12 B 13 Index Device Configuration Package 1 7 11 3 device NaMe AA es 3 27 ji PANA 4 32 5 11 6 14 discoverable mode 8 6 8 15 Fili PEREATE dees ad ess 5 11 5 12 6 14 6 15 drawing onscreen 2 31 E EP 2343 da aaa ies Ede ES 6 9 6 12 e mail connection creating messages 10 18 jor PENE TEA PPO PO 10 14 encryption 4 31 5 5 5 8 6 5 6 12 open system waaa PEG WG drei a 6 13 TI PAD usas aco dor Ban Fe 6 13 LP kaaa EE E E T eas 6 13 entering characters 2 25 2 26 entering information 2 23 drawing on scr
3. 9 9 ITE PB PA AA so AA AA AG aa ea a 3 10 Synchronizing with Te AA AASA Qa E REOR dra 9 10 Manual Synchronization 2 2 9 11 Automatic Synchronization eeu pee AG WAG NGREAD GRE ERE X chews Ree ERES 9 11 AirBEAM Staging9 12 9 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 9 2 AirBEAM Smart Introduction The AirBEAM Smart product allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between a host server and Symbol wireless handheld devices Before transfer Air BEAM Smart checks and compares package version so that only updated packages are loaded AirBEAM Smart resides on radio equipped client devices and allows them to request download and install software as well as to upload files and status data Both download and upload of files can be accomplished in a single communications session The ability to transfer software over a radio network can greatly reduce the logistical efforts of client software management In an AirBEAM Smart system a network accessible host server acts as the storage point for the software transfer The AirBEAM Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file transfer protocols to check the host system for updates and if necessary to transfer updated software AirBEAM Package Builder In a typical distributed AirBEAM system software to be transferred is organized into packages In general an Air BEAM package
4. Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 Package 1 Package name of the first of eight packages This is an optional field Package 2 Package name of the second of eight packages This is an optional field Package 3 Package name of the third of eight packages This is an optional field Package 4 Package name of the fourth of eight packages This is an optional field Packages 2 Tab This tab is used to specify the package name of the last four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server Packages 2 Server MiL4 Package 5 Package 6 Package 7 Package 8 Upload Pkg Package 5 Package name of the fifth of eight packages This is an optional field Package 6 Package name of the sixth of eight packages This is an optional field Package 7 Package name of the seventh of eight packages This is an optional field Package 8 Package name of the eighth of eight packages This is an optional field Upload Pkg Package name of a package that is to be processed for upload files during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server This is an optional field 9 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide
5. Signal Info IP Status Ping APs Software Version 3 9 1 Driver Version 3 3 1 Firmware Version 3 90 00 Hardware Version 3 0 Country USA Profile Name 123456 E55 ID 123456 Encryption Made 128 bit Shared Kev PerFarmance Excellent Figure 5 9 Mobile Companion Info Tab Version Information Current Status Displays the terminal s software driver firmware and hardware versions as well as country information This data is consistent for the terminal regardless of which terminal profile is the current profile Displays the terminal s current Profile Name ESSID and Encryption mode Terminal performance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength Terminal operating information differs depending on which profile has been enabled as the current profile PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Select the IP Status tab to view the terminal s network address information Unlike the IP Config tab in Finding WLANs the P Status tab is view only with no user configurable data fields Mobile Companion Signal Info IP Status Ping APs IP Type DHCP IP Address hea 254 154 66 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Gateway DMS WIKIS MAC Address DO AD FB 3D 17 DB Host Mame Pocket PC4 Figure 5 10 Mobile Companion IP Status Tab IP Type If DHCP was selected from the P Config tab leased IP address and network addre
6. 10 39 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide View Pictures Using Pictures you can view thumbnails of jog pictures stored in your My Pictures folder and select a picture that you want to see in full screen view 1 In Pictures tap the thumbnail of the picture you want to view 2 Tap H to view pictures stored on a storage card 3 Tap H to view pictures stored in your My Pictures folder View Slideshow of Pictures You can view your jpg pictures as a slideshow Pictures displays slides of the pictures shown in thumbnail view with 5 second intervals between slides 1 In Pictures tap a to view pictures as a slideshow 2 Tap anywhere on the screen to display the Slideshow toolbar which you can use to pause the slideshow rotate the view and more 3 Press the left right controls to move forward or backward through the slides 10 40 Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC Chapter Contents DU 2 aaa NAKAKA NAKA MAKAKA KAKA ree SENS ce RE ER ROUGE RO E Ed PR RR 11 3 Installing Other Development Software eee eee ees 11 6 11 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Software Installation on Development PC Introduction To develop applications to run on the terminal the following are required e Symbol Mobility Developer s Kit SMDK for Embedded Visual C 4 0 eVC4 e Symbol Mobility Developer s Kit
7. PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 A notification window appears Prosessor Setting Change the working speed of the processor When this is processed screen disappears for about three seconds and the setting changes Do vau proceed Figure 3 53 Processor Setting Notification Window 5 Tap Yes to change the processor speed or No to keep the current processor speed 6 The terminal performs a soft reset 7 Tap ok Change Speed Registry Settings Note f the terminal displays the older Processor tab screen see Figure 3 53 the processor speed cannot be set using registry settings The processor speed can be changed using the terminal s registry settings in registry file ChangeSpeed reg III OI NI NG NG NG NI NI NI NG NG NG NG NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NI NG NG NG NG NG NS HKEY LOCAL MACHINENXSOFTWAREYOSTSysDrvr CpuSpeed dword 00000190 PxBusSpeed dword 00000064 ChangeSpeed dword 00000000 NoCsMsgWindow dword 00000000 NNN NNN NNN PSI PSI PI NNN NNN PSU PS NNN NINI NI PSQ NG NG NG NS Note Do not change the registry key order and format Table 3 9 Registry Key Definitions Low D a as CPU Speed 400MHz dword 00000190 Default 300MHz dword 0000012C 3 58 Settings Table 3 9 Registry Key Definitions NE Cl Mapag PxBusSpeed 100MHz dword 00000064 Default 200MHz dword 000000C8 Note If CPU Speed is set to 300MHz PxBu
8. Server Tab This tab is used to specify the configurations of the server to which the Packages 2 Server mLa L client connects during the package synchronization process PANES User Directory CR IP Address The IP Address of the server It may be a host name or a dot notation format Directory The directory on the server that contains the AirBEAM package definition files All AirBEAM package definition files are retrieved from this directory during the package synchronization process User The FTP user name that is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process Password The FTP password that corresponds to the FTP user specified in the User field The specified password is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process 9 6 AirBEAM Smart Misc 1 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Server Misc 1 Misc 4 4 gt RAM Management Suppress Separator C TFTP C WNMS a eee Auto load This drop down list is used to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client is to be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted The selections are Disable the AirBEAM Smart Client is not invoked automatically during the boot sequence Interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The Synchronization Dialog box appears and the user
9. Ta Inbox Microsoft Outlook e Packet Access Microsoft Databases VS Tasks Mot Installed To find aut more about and to customize what gets synchronized click on that information type in the list and then click Settings Back Cancel Help Figure 4 4 Select Synchronization Settings Window ETHER 4 6 Communication 7 To synchronize a particular type of information select its check box To stop synchronization of that information clear its check box 8 Select Next New Partnership Setup Complete You are now ready to start exchanging information between your mobile device and this computer Upon exiting this wizard Microsoft ActiveSync will open and IF Your device is a guest click Explore on the toolbar and start exploring your device IF pour device has a partnership synchronization starts Please wait until synchronization i amp complete before using pour device Click Finish to exit this wizard Figure 4 5 Setup Complete Window 9 Select Finish The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears H Microsoft ActiveSync 0 xl File View Tools Help 6 Sync Stop Pocket PC2003 Connected Synchronized Information Type Status G Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 6 ActiveSync Connected Window 4 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide During the first synchronization information stored on your hos
10. aes 10 6 Using The Surpinal SOE Ls dra aor QUEE cose AA HEC REGIOS RR HURTS EORR 10 8 PE Los h nC REPTTPITESPEREPESMEFIF SERI AP PA bed qq qu 10 9 Using the Summary Screen ellen 10 11 LIA PAA AA AAP AA AA ee ewe ees 10 12 NG ARINA BEKE ADA KANA eae AG Han Pak eA he a ee ee ee Ee BAKUNA NABANG 10 14 Synchronizing E mail Messages Lui asks PAA ROXOR AER deen eke ee LAND AWAL 10 14 Connecting Directly to an E mail Server 0 0 ees 10 14 Setting Up an E mail Service 1 0 eens 10 15 Ueno TO a a oe AA KA ed dog ER RA AG PARE bees geen AB WK AS 10 16 Creating E mail Messages a a KA ota dd ek ke es EROR GO OE RE GC de eieGe devas 10 18 Managing E mail Messages and Folders cece eee eens 10 19 Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server 10 19 Era o TN MEE 10 20 bcc es a E EE EE ee 34 X ES ER ER E HESEPT EUER ee I KERN 10 21 iTO Ae M 10 22 DEN NGO AD KAG dnd sok BG KAB PK RTT 10 22 ao be allpan AA PAP AA 10 23 Ee AA AA ee eee see 10 24 Tips Tor Working IN POONG ENGE ausaunceqewestektkedhkk 4 REY REGES ER SE EUR 10 25 MSNO Messeng ciiacexex me exeE amu adrari rA RN deci 45d ot Abad auis 10 26 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Setting Ub Your ACCOUNL sea aciem acria m AA KG ek Re KA KA RR BEKE A ROE 10 26 KA AA MP AA 10 27 Chatting with ContacisS
11. Games Calculator File Explorer m Microsoft MSM Reader Messenger Pictures E w w Pocket Excel Pocket MSN Pocket Terminal Services Client New Tools Fal Fy EH E Figure 2 16 Start Menu Note Some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop down list To see the full label hold the stylus on the label Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out 2 21 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using Pop up Menus With pop up menus you can quickly choose an action for an item For example use the pop up menu in the contact list to delete a contact make a copy of a contact or send an e mail message to a contact The actions in the pop up menus vary from program to program To access a pop up menu hold the stylus on the item you want to perform the action on When the menu appears lift the stylus and tap the action to perform or tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action All Tasks Priority Type minutes Buy birthday gift C Call Maria Proof new proposal Tap and hold to display Grchedule meptj Create Copy a the pop up menu Delete Task Lift the stylus and tap the action you want Beam Task Tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action New Tools Figure 2 17 Pop up Menu 2 22 Operating the PPT 8800 Notifications Your terminal notifies you when you ha
12. Press down on the two locking tabs Pull on the cable cup to ensure that it is securely seated on the terminal O oe E 4 26 Communication 7 Open the rubber cap eovenng the serial UPON Connector Screws Figure 4 4 Connecting the Communication Cable 8 Connect the cable connector to the serial port 9 Secure the connector to the cable cup by tightening the two connector screws 10 Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB port on your host computer nee USB Cable Figure 4 5 Connecting the Cable Cup to Host Computer 11 Turn on the terminal 12 Upon connection synchronization occurs automatically 4 27 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Serial Communication The UCC 8800 Universal Cable Cup provides the ability to connect the terminal to printers and vending machines Ensure that locking tabs are in the open position up Insert the terminal into the cable cup Press down on the two locking tabs Pull on the cable cup to ensure that it is securely seated on the terminal Open the rubber cap covering the serial port E EN A da Connector Screws 6 Connect the cable connector to the serial port 7 Secure the connector to the cable cup by tightening the two connector screws 8 Connect the other end of the serial cable to the appropriate device 4 28 Communication Connecting to the Internet on a Wire
13. Volume tab Ey settings Pd 42412 Sounds amp Notifications System volume Silent Loud I l 1 1 1 I Enable sounds for Events warnings system events Pragrams Notifications alarms reminders Screen taps O Sart a Laud C Hardware buttons 3 Saft O Loud volume Notifications Aa Eaj Figure 3 16 Sounds amp Notifications Window Volume Tab 2 Use the slide bar to change the system volume 3 Select the desired Enable Sound options Note Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life 4 Tapok 3 22 Settings Notifications On the Notifications tab you can customize how you are notified about different events 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Sounds amp Notifications icon Notifications tab E settings et d an2 ok Sounds amp Notifications C Pay sound Figure 3 17 Sounds amp Notifications Window Notifications Tab Select the event name from the Select an event list drop down list Select the Play sound check box to enable the sound notification Select a sound from the drop down list Tap ok oF oo I 3 23 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Today Use the Today window to customize the Today screen Appearance To change the appearance of the Today screen 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Today icon Appearance tab Ei settings e 4 402 ok To customize the Today scr
14. 01 00 30670 IPL Version 03 501 ok v s Cancel File Help E Figure B 7 System Versions Screen On the System Versions window e Platform indicates the operating system running on the terminal Pocket PC e OS Version specifies the version of the operating system e OEM Name is the OEM name of the terminal e OEM Version indicates the build version of the operating system e IPL Version identifies the build version of the system loader B 6 Demo Program Unique Unit ID Tap Unique Unit ID on the Control Panel to view the terminal s unique unit ID a 16 byte hex number identifier and the version numbers for RCM Resource Coordinator Manager API Rescoord Resource Coordinator DLL UUID DLL and Temperature DLL ES CtlPanel Example 4 7 2 3 22 e RCM DLL Name i RcmAPI32 dll 01 01 01 04 01 07 00 00 1700DADO O63EAFC1 98000050 BF AGUE2 Figure B 8 Unique Unit ID Screen Note PDT 8800 terminals do not support the Temperature DLL Persist Persist allows changes made by the Control Panel to remain in effect after a hard reset When enabled Persist creates reg files which save specific settings that are made and restore the settings to the registry after a hard reset B 7 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Toggle Persist to Yes to retain these changes made after a hard reset ES CtPanel Example 4 i 3 23 e Control Panel
15. 30 feet 10 meters In this mode the terminal can detect other devices without allowing other devices to detect the terminal e n Discoverable mode the terminal can be seen and connected to by other devices allowing all Bluetooth devices within range 30 feet 10 meters to detect the terminal and attempt to beam information to it and or establish a bond In this mode other Bluetooth devices can detect the terminal whether or not a bond was created however in order to receive a beam form another device it must be accepted on the terminal PPT 8866 Bluetooth or 6 Tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the Connectivity dialog box TER pa Fridaw Tulwir2 7 Connectivity a i Turn off flight mode 44 Tap to turn Bluetooth on The Internet PC connection Settings Figure 8 3 Connectivity Dialog Box 7 Tap Turn off flight mode to turn on the Bluetooth radio mode Discovering Bluetooth Device s Follow the steps below to discover and create bonds with other Bluetooth devices The terminal can receive information from discovered devices without creating a bond However once bonded an exchange of information between the terminal and a bonded device occurs automatically when the Bluetooth radio in turned on Bonding with Discovered Device s A bond is a relationship created between the terminal and another Bluetooth device in order to exchange information in a secure manner Creating a bond
16. Abnut System Versions Unique Unit ID Date and Time Touch Calibrate Comm Settings Audio Settings Scanner Settings 524 Settings E Figure B 9 Persist Note Not all options support Permanent Persistence Date and Time Tap Date and Time on the Control Panel to change the date and time The Date and Time window appears ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 10 01 e Date Friday July 11 2003 Time IT 01 35 PM E MENOS Figure B 10 Date and Time Window B 8 Demo Program To change the time tap the Time field and up the up and down arrows to change the value To change the date tap the down arrow in the Date field A calendar box appears Select the month and then select the day ES CtiPanel Example 7 m2 10 00 Xx Friday July 11 2003 EB July 2003 5 MT WT F 5 293 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Jiz 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 1 now See mcg Today 7 11 03 Figure B 11 Date Selection Touch Calibrate Select Touch Calibrate to re align the screen align screen Tap the target firmly and accurately at each location on the screen The target will continue to move Until the screen is aligned L Figure B 12 Align Screen B 9 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Communication Settings Select Comm Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use when communicat
17. Existing certificates Root Class 2 Public Primar Root Class 3 Public Primar Root Entrust net Certifica ySRoot Entrust net Secure S Install View Certificates Details Delete Tap and Hold Install new certificate 2 User client y3 Root server Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col gt TLS only TLS and PEAP Ej PEAP Authentication Install View Certificates Figure 6 7 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab PEAP Table 6 2 Authentication Options None None is the default setting when authentication is not required on the network The client adapter does not use any authentication scheme when Open System is selected on the Encryption tab 6 10 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Table 6 2 Authentication Options Continued Kerberos Kerberos is a different form of 128 bit data security An adapter is required see Figure 6 4 to have its request for AP resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the AP to transmit and receive data with the associated adapter When Kerberos is selected the KDC and REALM entry fields appear The KDC field should remain with the default KDC name krbtgt unless it is changed in the server Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the Realm field The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the APs and users it supports The KDC also permits the transmission an
18. Figure D 2 15 Key Keypad Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality oo at tr m mom s Default Alpha CAPS VK Code Value State State State Decimal Decimal Bo 1o Ca e oF LP Je fa lss m m F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are e opp Ho MF when no function is defined on each e opp Ho MF at Control Panel EN NEN EM a SS NEN n D 4 Keypad Maps Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality Continued m E Default Alpha CAPS State State State E lol fp F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are aaa en when no function is defined on each aaa en at Control Panel ASCII VK Code Value Decimal Decimal e ce oF n5 D 5 A PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality Continued Alpha ASCII Default Alpha CAPS VK Code Value State State State Decimal Decimal F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are Mun CIR lamellae when no function is defined on each Mun CIR lamellae at Control Panel cm a mE D 6 Keypad Maps Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality Continued Alpha Default Alpha CAPS State State State ASCII VK Code Value Decimal Decimal i CO EN m um E mm 7 CI i ES E um E mmi F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are E AGAHAN CUN INN when no function is defined on each E AGAHAN CUN INN at Control Panel calibrate Darken screen S
19. IPL Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting provides information to help you take proper care of your terminal and solve problems that may come up Appendix A Block Recognizer Characters describes how to using the Block Recognizer to write characters About This Guide Appendix B Demo Program provides an overview of the terminal demo program applications such as scanning setup diagnostic utilities and file management Appendix C Technical Specifications includes a table listing the technical specifications for the terminal Appendix D Keypad Maps includes tables listing key functionality for the keypad Appendix E Bluetooth Regulatory Information includes Bluetooth regulatory information XIX a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Notational Conventions This document uses these conventions e terminal or PPT 8800 refers to any model of the terminal e User refers to anyone using an application on the terminal e You refers to the End User System Administrator or Technical Support person using this manual as a reference to install configure operate maintain and troubleshoot the terminal e Italics are used to highlight specific items in the general text and to identify chapters and sections in this and related documents It also identifies names of windows menus menu items and fields within windows e Bold identifies buttons to be tappe
20. LOGAN WHINING O FOND cxa kak dtc ok reach Eds icd Seda LEG dennis qb das 2 28 ON VIC on arate eer PALA DAA hi BALAAN eee GENE sores ebaseas 2 29 si TENTI 2o Fees vire ba AW E AA 2 30 selechng VAN oaa dex doch 458 E RUDI eara E Re ao E RR OR 2 30 Dranio oniho SOE APAPAP 2 31 Selecting a Drawing anaana aeaa 2 31 MOCOITINO d DIOSES Lau du vba da bored bu ode Cana 6602 4464450805 ed bow ve Ra 2 32 LUE TIEN oco oe eee need bese bee REESE SA RUE MEE dd IET 2 33 Entering Information Using 15 Key Keypad cc eee eens 2 33 mo tl Io ETT TT TTL eee ee LI E AAP AN eee 2 34 DONI ee AAP AA PAA 2 35 DEN NOON La eau ABE KG AMA KG BKA MARA aed ded ae eee kA KAP dioe dedo 2 35 a ng iNe Tamina ARA ERDAS KRESS ER EEO OE CR EERE 2 36 Penn OOIEHOSBL esu we pad wu wpebRCPREP E ER ERR AA 2 36 Performing a Hard Reset ua a A EUER ABA Dd XE opp RUP RE oe Re d 2 36 2 2 Operating the PPT 8800 Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for using and navigating the terminal Using the Power Button Press the button to turn the terminal on and off See Starting the Terminal on page 1 21 Adjusting the Backlight Standard 6 Key Configuration Use the key combinations listed in Table 2 1 to control the display and keypad backlight Table 2 1 Standard 6 Key Keypad Backlight Controls Press and hold Turns the display backlight and keypad backlight on and off When both backlights are off the backlights turn on in the
21. NAPT mode is 0 and Static mode is 1 A Terminal 1 IP Address 0 0 0 0 B Terminal 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 C Terminal 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 D Terminal 4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 E Expansion Port IP Address 0 0 0 0 3 From the Public network settings menu a Set Static Mode to 1 see page 4 18 b Set NAPT Mode to O see page 4 18 c Select 3 to access the set cradle IP address prompt Enter the new cradle IP Address at the prompt d Select 4 to access the set Router IP address prompt a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Enter the new internet gateway IP address at the prompt e Select 5 to access the first set the DNS IP addresses prompt Enter the first new DNS IP address at the prompt f Select 6 to access the second set the DNS IP addresses prompt Enter the second new DNS IP address at the prompt g Select 7 to access the set the first WINS IP addresses prompt This is required for ActiveSync to function properly Enter the first new WINS IP address at the prompt h Select 8 to access the set the second WINS IP addresses prompt Enter the second new WINS IP address at the prompt i Select 9 to access the set the correct subnet mask IP addresses prompt Enter the new subnet mask IP address at the prompt j Select A to access the Terminal 1 IP addresses prompt Enter the new Terminal 1 IP address at the prompt k Select B to access the Terminal 2 IP addresses p
22. PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile symbol 2003 Software for Pocket PCs The Enterprise Mobility Company Ml Pm BE G 3 mhal jj Product Reference Guide Ss EM ICI eae PA a ete Na Ft KARA GA ID PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 72E 63154 05 Revision A February 2005 symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company 2003 2005 by Symbol Technologies Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Symbol This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Symbol grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program mate
23. SMDK for NET e Symbol Device Configuration Package DCP for PPT 8800 The SMDK for eVC4 is a development tool used to create native C and C applications for all Symbol terminals running the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system It includes documentation header files H and library files LIB for native code application development that targets Symbol value add APIs The SMDK for NET provides all of the tools necessary to develop C and VB NET managed applications for Symbol terminals These tools include class libraries sample applications and associated documentation SMDK for NET allows Microsoft NET Compact Framework developers to programmatically access the Symbol value add features of the terminal The DCP provides the Product Reference Guide PRG flash partitions Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and the associated TCM scripts With this package hex images that represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the terminal The minimum system configuration required to install the SMDK and DCP is e IBM compatible host computer with Pentium 450 MHz processor or higher e Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system e 128 MB RAM e 100 MB available hard disk space e CD ROM drive e One available serial port e Mouse e ActiveSync software available at http www microsoft com In order to install the SMDK for eVCA the following components must first be i
24. Select the Play sound check box to enable a sound when the alarm starts From the drop down list select the sound that plays when the alarm goes off Select Repeat sound check box to repeat the sound notification Select Display message checkbox to enable a message to appear on the screen when the alarm goes off Tap ok Tap the time field to set the alarm time The clock window appears Figure 3 33 Alarm Clock Setting Window Use the time field and arrow buttons to set the time Tap ok Set up to three more alarms Tap ok To change the way the date or time is displayed on the terminal see Regional Settings on page 3 47 Settings IrDA Use the IrDA Settings window to enable or disable the IrDA 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel 2 Double tap the rDA icon The rDA Settings window appears EJ Settings Disabling IrDA gives Socket Bluetooth two additional COM ports to use This applet allows you to enable or disable IrDA parts IrDA is now ENABLED Enable IrDA ports 2 Disable IDA ports socket o Figure 3 34 IrDA Settings Window 3 Select either Enable IrDA ports or Disable IrDA ports radio button 4 Tap OK A confirmation box appears requesting to reset the terminal Tap OK IrDA ok Please reset your PDA for this change to take effect Figure 3 35 Reset Confirmation Box 5 Perform a soft reset See Resetting the Terminal on page 2 36 3 39 PPT 8800 with W
25. Spare Battery Charging Well Figure 1 20 Connecting Power to the CRD8800B Cradle 2 Insert the battery into the spare battery charging well on the back of the cradle Insert the contact end first and then press the back end into the well Standard Battery Larger Capacity Battery Figure 1 21 Inserting the Spare Battery into the Battery Well The spare battery charging LED turns red to indicate that the spare battery is charging The standard battery usually fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours and the optional larger PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide capacity battery usually fully charges in approximately five hours See Charge LED Indicator on page 1 21 for spare battery charging indications Using the UBC Battery Adapter 1 Insert the appropriate battery adapter up to four into the UBC 2000 charger base 2 Insert the battery into its appropriate adapter Ensure the polarity markings on the battery match with those of the adapter Battery Adapter Battery status display Charger base Figure 1 22 Inserting the Spare Battery When the battery is inserted the charging system begins the rapid charge cycle When this cycle is completed the READY indicator on the battery status display turns solid green and the battery is charged to approximately 95 of its rated capacity To attain 100 of its capacity the battery should remain in the charger for
26. WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Mobile Companion Options icon Figure 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu 5 4 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 When the menu opens select Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs or Options from menu Table 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions re ne Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection Signal tab view displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter using its current profile to the associated AP Info tab view displays software driver firmware hardware and country information and the current profile name ESSID and encryption mode IP Status tab view displays network address information Ping tab view displays signal strength data data rate and conduct data transmission tests between the terminal and associated AP or client Status Cont d APs tab view displays APs with the same ESSID within the current WLAN profile The terminal s roaming capabilities can be set from this tab When not in Ad Hoc operating mode the APs tab displays instead of the Peers tab Peers tab view displays the BSSIDs power modes transmit rates and data rates of other networked clients within the Ad Hoc peer to peer network When in Ad Hoc operating mode the Peers tab view displays instead of the APs tab WLAN Profiles Displays the current profiles and allows the user to add edit and delete profiles Find WLANs Displays a list of Soectr
27. attempt communication again inches Obstruction interfered Check the path to ensure no objects were in with communication the way Application is not Printer support must be included with the enabled to run IrDA application to run IrDA printing on the printing terminal See your System Administrator 13 10 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting Your Terminal continued DO Problem cam soo During data Terminal removed from Replace the terminal in the cradle or communication no data cradle or unplugged replace the Synchronization cable and re was transmitted or from host PC during transmit transmitted data was communication incomplete ini incomplete Incorrect cable See your System Administrator configuration Communication Perform setup See Chapter 4 software was incorrectly Communication for details installed or configured No sound is audible Volume setting is low or Check the volume slider in the Volume 4 turned off Sound properties dialog box in the Control Panel to ensure the volume is not turned down Terminal turns itself off Terminal is inactive Your terminal turns off after a period of inactivity If the terminal is running on battery power this period can be set from 1 to 5 minutes in one minute intervals If the terminal is running on external power this period can be set to 1 2 5 10 15 and 30 minutes Check the Power dialog box in the Contro
28. is the 24 LSB s of the 48 BD ADDRESS The BD ADDRESS is an unambiguous number of every Bluetooth unit The UAP upper address part are the 24 MSB s of the 48 BD ADDRESS The internal clock of a Bluetooth unit is derived from a free running clock which is never adjusted and is never turned off For synchronization with other units only the offsets are used It has no relation to the time of the day Its resolution is at least half the RX TX slot length of 312 5lJs The clock has a cycle of about one day 23h30 In most case it is implemented as a 28 bit counter For the deriving of the hopping sequence the entire LAP 24 bits 4 LSB s 4 bits Input 1 and the 27 MSB s of the clock Input 2 are used With this input values different mathematical procedures permutations additions XOR operations are performed to generate the sequence This will be done at the beginning of every new transmission Regarding short transmissions the Bluetooth system has the following behavior The first connection between the two devices is established a hopping sequence is generated For transmitting the wanted data the complete hopping sequence is not used and the connection ends The second connection will be established A new hopping sequence is generated Due to the fact that the Bluetooth clock has a different value because the period between the two transmission is longer and it cannot be shorter than the minimum resolution of the clock 312 5 ms The
29. iussa d d Wade ALA SEGUE REPRE A nr EYD RSEN FIBI ESOS AA AA APAPAP AP PA E 13 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 13 2 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Introduction This chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing your terminal and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during terminal operating Safely Maintaining the PPT 8800 For trouble free service observe the following tips when using your terminal Take care not to scratch the screen of your terminal When working with your terminal use the supplied stylus or plastic tipped pens intended for use with a touch sensitive screen Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the terminal screen Although your terminal is water and dust resistant do not expose it to rain or moisture for an extended period of time In general treat your terminal as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument The touch sensitive screen of your terminal contains glass Take care not to drop your terminal or subject it to strong impact Protect your terminal from temperature extremes Do not leave it on the dashboard of acar on a hot day and keep it away from heat sources Do not store or use your terminal in any location that is extremely dusty damp or wet Use a soft lens cloth to clean your terminal If the surface of the terminal screen becomes soiled cl
30. password may be required before the phone starts to dial 3 If the dial up password was not saved the Network Log On screen may appear Enter the Password and tap ok 4 When the terminal starts calling the call status can be seen on both the terminal and phone display After the terminal connects it receives transmits the information as requested e g Pocket Internet Explorer displays the requested web site 8 31 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Bluetooth LAN Access This section explains how to use dial up networking to access a Bluetooth enabled LAN access point AP for a network connection To use this method for LAN access ensure the Bluetooth AP supports communication as a Bluetooth dial up modem With this method of communication the Internet Explorer can be used to connect to the server The steps required to create a Bluetooth enabled LAN connection via APs are similar to creating a new dial up A valid telephone number and other advanced settings for the office network or ISP are not required Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon The Connections window appears 8 32 Ta 3 fj settings Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPN server connection Se
31. user s manual supplied with the computer 4 Upon connection synchronization occurs automatically 4 10 Communication Using the Single Slot Serial Cradles 1 Ensure that ActiveSync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created See Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 2 Start ActiveSync on the host computer if it is not running To start select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears 44 Microsoft ActiveSync E D x File view Tools Help oss5E Sync Stop Details Explore Options Pocket PC2003 Not connected Information Type Status ica Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 9 ActiveSync Not Connected Note Every terminal should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same name See Device ID on page 3 27 for instructions on changing the device name PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Connect your CRD8800 1000S or CRD8800B 1000S cradle to your host computer as shown in Figure 4 10 Serial device cable Figure 4 10 Connecting the Cradle to the Host Note The cradle requires a dedicated port It cannot share a port with an internal modem or other device If you are unsure about the location of the serial port on your host computer refer to the user s manual supplied with the compute
32. 0 B Terminal 2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 C Terminal 3 IP Address 0 0 0 0 D Terminal 4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 E Expansion Port IP Address 0 0 0 0 3 From the Public network settings menu a Press 1 to set the Static Mode The Static Mode selection appears Enter 1 to enable Static mode Enter O to disable Static mode Enter new value a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide b f Press 1 to enable or O to disable Static mode The Public network settings menu re appears with the new Static Mode value Press 2 to set the NAPT Mode The NAPT Mode selection appears Enter 1 to enable NAPT mode Enter O to disable NAPT mode Enter new value Press 1 to enable NAPT or 0 to disable NAPT mode The Public network settings menu re appears with the new NAPT Mode value oet the DHCP Address Mode as follows For the 6 DHCP Address Mode Set NAPT Mode to 0 see step c When Static Mode and NAPT Mode are both set to O the cradle acquires 6 IP addresses from the DHCP server For the 1 DHCP Address NAPT Mode Set NAPT Mode to 1 see step c When NAPT Mode is set to 1 the cradle uses 5 private NAPT addresses 192 168 1 1 through 192 168 1 5 by default the network does not see these addresses Press Q to return to the main Cradle Utilities menu g Press F to write these values to flash memory and reset the cradle Configuring the Cradle for Static Mode jp 4 1
33. 10 37 DS E vbi S2 METTE 344 10 36 Pocket Word 002000 eee 10 20 DOD UD MENUS 62 paa ee ew sens vow d a 2 22 Index power button 00 000 2 3 power management 3 43 Power Saving Modes 5 12 6 16 processor changing speed 3 57 profile create new 5 21 6 26 delete 2c bens y ee Ghat eee ens 5 21 6 26 OO pani abasb ad tama dankake 5 21 6 25 profiles a AG add AA DAA AN anes 9 5 6 5 programs a ad e coepi EC ens es 12 25 button assignment 12 25 flash file system 12 22 removing 2 cee eee 3 50 PIES MERE RTT hk TI DIT 3 42 SelIBOIID siuis asaszak d x akon 2 21 stop running programs 3 42 H radio signal transmission strength 5 5 6 5 radio transmission power 5 12 6 16 Reader NEHA aaa ierg deed dA e ds 10 30 receiving a contact 7 59 receiving a file iocoessxscecets etus es 7 59 ON nakaka ibas E ER 2 32 3 13 recording settings ssa ww ANG e own 3 13 regional settings 3 47 cinis Mer 3 48 date HET HORN 3 49 DEM Lus Rr eC NAGO cs 3 48 jr RM NUR ER 3 49 related material XX removing programs 3 6 renaming bluetooth bond 8 11 repeal AAP ee a ee 3 9 reset il EEE E oes iaeese ess 8 4 AA ees 8 4 SGC POP E AA 2 36 i POP AA PP 8 4 Index 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Softwa
34. 28 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network llle 4 29 UP PEG piede SIE ERE TT OTI TIL T TIT OR TRITT TETTE 4 34 cend MOMA AA AA AA 4 34 Receive WN APA E Wadi E Ried ea 4 36 4 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 2 Communication Introduction Your terminal is capable of communicating with a number of hosts including development PCs serial devices printers etc The available accessories serve as essential data communication devices enabling you to synchronize the information on your terminal with the information on your host device using ActiveSync With the appropriate accessory and software the terminal can establish a number of connection types such as a serial or ethernet connection This chapter provides information on installing the appropriate communication software and setting up the appropriate accessory to enable communication between the terminal and the host device Installing Communication Software Below is a list of software applications you need to successfully communicate with the various host devices e Microsoft ActiveSync 3 7 or higher e eConnect Installing ActiveSync Using ActiveSync you can synchronize the information on your terminal with the information on your host computer Changes you make on your terminal or host computer appear in both places after you synchronize With ActiveSync software you can e Work with
35. Baud Rate Enter to Continue Figure 12 7 Baud Rate Screen 10 Use the up and down keys to select the appropriate baud rate then press the Enter key or wait 10 seconds for the 115 200 default baud rate 12 11 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 11 The IPL Main Menu screen lists the partitions and or applications that can be 12 12 downloaded IPL VER X XX IPL Key Sequence Windows CE Platform Application Splash Screen IPL Partition Table Auto Select Press Up Down to select partition Press Enter to begin download Figure 12 8 IPL Main Menu Screen Configuring the Terminal e Use the up and down keys to select Auto Select then press the Enter key Auto Select is the default and is selected if no other selection is made within three seconds IPE VER XXX Auto Select Waiting for Data at Baud Rate 115 200 Press Enter to return to Main Menu Figure 12 9 Waiting for Data When downloading more than one hex file if is recommended that they be downloaded in the following order Partition Table e Splash Screen e Application partition e Platform partition Operating system e IPL 12 On the development PC 12 13 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 13 Open the ActiveSync Connection Settings window and ensure that the Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port chec
36. Chapter 7 PPT 8860 Bluetooth IWR es a eae AA AA AA b qui EJ 7 3 TUN Bluetooth On and CT auae doe Iber RIO teens ER HER CT a 7 3 pee oa AnG a AA 1 isset YeTES TERR YCPSE AA 7 5 Ericsson Nokia 6210 NTT DoCoMo Sony Phones 0 0000 cee eee eee eee 7 5 Motorola Timeport 270C Nokia 3650 6310 7650 8910 8910i 7 8 Bluetooth Configuration 0 0 rrr 7 11 Configuring be ee PA AA AA 7 11 ASsonna CON GG pE RT es ed eo eee qb qt PE AG 7 12 eee lec aues ooo nese ose aed eh AA Y 7 13 Discovering Bluetooth Device s AA APA 4060406464 S KOK SLEDS EROS 7 15 Bonding with Discovered Device S 0 0 eee eee eee eens 7 18 Wie SIGS Pelee 12 ua ceed PR Ae che as Re RAE ERR Rand Fa E AREAS 7 22 Setting Up A Favorite Device llle rr 7 24 dtp m4 AA AA AA 7 24 Deleting a DEVICE ABAKA or DAG eRe eee oo PLA THA en 44 bees eas 7 26 Rel DUN ie oes d uc wa dnd nae ke eee Pap cede bn Cede edo AKA doesn 7 27 Dial up to Your Network 0 ccc eee eee eee tenes 7 27 Dial Automatically from the Application llle 7 34 Saw Baa ouais EE qr ete Rd dani xd xam yx dE EE REP ERA EK SS 7 35 ActiveSync with a Favorite Computer 0 0 0 0c ee 7 37 ActiveSync with a Discovered Computer 0 0 00 cece eee eens 7 38 ActiveSync with Undiscovered Computer 0 00 ccc eee eee 7 39 PNG LA dee edo e es here Chere eedeas cee BAGA ADALA NAHAWAAN 7 41 Connecting to a Favorite Access
37. Connecting to a Bluetooth Phone Note Multiple connections may be listed Tap on the phone number of the connection you want to dial If the connection you want is not listed tap on Settings Tap Manage Existing Connections and select the connection you want to use Tap ok 25 Depending on your phone and connection settings you may need to enter a passkey and or a password before the phone starts to dial 26 If you have a Nokia 3650 6310 7650 8910 8910i or Motorola Timeport 270C you must complete the bonding process 32 a The first time you try to connect the phone asks if you want to bond On the Motorola phone enter GRANT on the Nokia phone enter ACCEPT b Enter a 4 16 digit passkey on the phone then enter it on the terminal c After successfully bonding with the phone you may want to set up your phone for automatic connections See Automatic Connection on page 7 44 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 27 lf you did not save the dial up password the Network Log On screen appears 9 Logon to Server am m2 1 49 Network Log On Resource My Connection C Save password 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w ejr t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj V te Figure 7 45 Network Log On Window 28 Enter the Password and tap ok 29 The device begins dialing er a0 Prang 4 Connecting to ISP via Bluetooth Using Bluetooth Phone Dialing 555 17
38. Connecting to a Remote Device 3 Select the device to connect to Tap Select The terminal attempts to connect to the selected device To disconnect from the remote device 1 Select Device Disconnect or tap the Disconnect icon Ga Bluetooth Shared Fal Bf ScreenShot 10 bmp File Device Help Fa x E Figure 7 84 Disconnecting from a Remote Device 2 The terminal disconnects from the remote device No contents is listed in the remote device area 7 58 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Exit Bluetooth File Explorer To exit the Bluetooth File Explorer select File Exit Receive Contact or File To receive a file or contact from another Bluetooth device 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Transfer via Bluetooth Receive Contact or File 2 The Receive Contact or File status screen appears Your mobile computer will wait two minutes for the contact or file 3 After successfully connecting to the remote device the screen indicates that it is connected then disappear after the file is transferred The new contact or file is now on the terminal 4 If two minutes passes before you receive the item tap Wait Again Enable File Sharing To enable file sharing 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Transfer via Bluetooth Enable File Sharing The Enable File Sharing status screen appears Enable File Sharing File Sharing enabled Waiting for connection 1 42 Figure 7 85 Enable File Sharing Window The terminal wait
39. DHCP from the IP Type drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server DHCP is the default setting for the terminal profile When DHCP is selected the IP address fields are read only Select Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS and WINS addresses used by the terminal profile Mobile Companion Made Encryption IP Config power Padres Gateway Figure 5 6 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab Static IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Internet Protocol address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 The default gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to
40. E eee Ge eee ee ETTA EEEE T EA ee ee SEE RR E CRAS EN Ed ES 10 14 Synchronizing E mail Messages 0 eee ee eens 10 14 Connecting Directly to an E mail Server 0 0 0 0 ee eee 10 14 Setting Up an E mail Service ee eens 10 15 Bp 371 75 25 PRRTETRTTIETTILOTTO T ee bake wire wees i 10 16 Creating E mail Messages 1 0 0c ee eee eee ees 10 18 Managing E mail Messages and Folders 0000 cc eee ees 10 19 Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server 10 19 PO NL e PERATA ETNAS ee eee ee ee ee ee eee ee a eee ee RO 10 20 We OS APAPAP AA AA 10 21 IA APA EREETERTETA ERA IN GA ARAL EM EQ RR aes DD AERE E 10 22 Be be AA AA AA 10 22 Recording Mode 2240 dh020 0086 kh ABAD KA RA CRRAR RARE ERE ad a RR E Leer RR Rd Rd 10 23 gir cl c E NG ed 10 24 Tips for Working in Pocket Excel llle 10 25 IS MESSEN ae eee ee eee eee ere 10 26 Seting Up Your AOOOUE sau ace GAB CRURA dS KE ee ee e SEE Kai 10 26 Pkg AAP 10 27 Suc og gE ETT KAANAK AN GANG yond PRA AG PANG TT TTE TES 10 28 CA pa AA ANA AG iiitr KNA be oe ee LG MAL AMA ee 10 30 PRGS A a as ah he TOI TT ek a ees ed 10 30 Getting Books on Your Device Losses cube xaO I GR ARR RURE ence dour dO des 10 31 LET ek od PP C 10 31 xii Contents Reading BOG a KG KG BA ALE BAD ABA AMAG ee Oe one des ehbe banaiakakaak NG Using Reader Features AA AA MM ME Removing a B
41. EeereE a 10 28 Windows Media PIRE GA KW KA WAR eh KG 4548404 BB hw Oh Noe a EERS EEr anrr 10 30 nA AA AA AP AA wes 10 30 anna Books ON TO DEV CE a i KAKA KABAN KA KA MAGA h KPA BAKE LARA KAKA 10 31 LEE EE TTL TESTI 10 31 Pernt Ae e stad crete AA AA APA PAA 10 32 LENG neadsr PEN e FDA d REP SUE eer PE eed eee se esie ove ba oe dkeeuss 10 32 PEDE A BUDE PA dator mper er PA ee oe eee 10 33 PORO Monel Exp ossi cede Cho he E aA dowd AB MGB WG OR IR NAKABABA A GA 10 34 Mobile PANCIT Lu ai uide ode dp EO KG BKA SEU ER KABA OR AC ROR eo d EEO ESE 10 34 PO EN aa add abeciaLERCaP EROR ERA d ERARqURASQESETASRQIE RES AA anes 10 34 Creating Mobile Favorites lr 10 34 Saving Memory on your Terminal cece ee eee eee eee eens 10 35 Using Ausni gU AA AA AA PAA 10 35 Using Packet Interea EXDIDIBF 122a RG KR BABKA ee POSER iisti ERE RR UKG PAGA 10 36 Seco E OB eundo 9 o6 ee ee ee ee eee Rae dod i bea ee ee KOKAK NA 10 38 a0 AA ee er ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee eee Se eee ee ee ee 10 39 Baeda e e TO VOUF DINI o a spo not Pedo ooo eE Rep ux dx p A a uar tees or XP S 4 10 39 solid e AA APA AA AA ITE CI Pb R PES 10 39 sil ee ARA AA AE 10 39 Set Picture as Background ccc ee eee eee eens 10 39 AA oe ee I E AA AS 10 40 View Slideshow of Pictures eee n 10 40 10 2 Applications Introduction Your terminal includes Calendar Contacts Tasks Inbox and Notes applications You can use these programs indiv
42. Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images Drag in a list to select multiple items 2 4 Operating the PPT 8800 Using a Headset You can use a stereo headset to listen to audio playback To use a headset plug the headset jack into the audio connector on the top of the terminal Ensure that the terminal s volume is set appropriately before putting the headset on When a headset is plugged into the jack the speaker is muted Note The audio connector does not support headsets with a microphone Figure 2 1 Using a Headset Using the Keypad The terminal has two backlit keypad configurations a standard 6 key configuration and a 15 key configuration 2 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Standard 6 Key Configuration The standard 6 key keypad contains a power button application keys scroll keys an Enter key and a function key See Table 2 3 for descriptions of the keypad buttons and keys App 2 Key Scroll Up Down Keys App 3 Key App 4 Key Function Key Power Button Enter Key Figure 2 2 Standard 6 Key Configuration Table 2 3 6 Key Keypad Actions App 1 App 4 These keys can be assigned to an application See Buttons on 3 8 for default settings Qoaeo Scroll Up Moves up from one item to another A Increases the brightness of the backlight when simultaneously pressed with the Function key Scroll Down
43. Moves down from one item to another w Decreases the brightness of the backlight when simultaneously pressed with the Function key Function Executes an operation when it s pressed with another key keys simultaneously such as one of the Scroll keys Power Powers the terminal on and off and turns the backlight on and off when held ec Executes a selected item or function 2 6 Operating the PPT 8800 15 Key Configuration The 15 key keypad uses an alphanumeric keypad that produces the 26 character alphabet A Z both lowercase and uppercase numbers 0 9 function keys F1 F10 and assorted characters The keypad is color coded to indicate which modifier key ALPHA or FUNC to press to produce a particular character or action The keypad default is numeric producing numbers Scroll Keys Enter Key Power Button tnc 7 Function Key Alpha Key Alphanumberic Keys Figure 2 3 15 Key Configuration Table 2 4 15 Key Keypad Actions a aaa Press the ALPHA key to cycle through the input modes Alpha Lowercase Alpha Uppercase Numeric The default is numeric mode In both alpha modes pressing a key produces the yellow letter on that key in numeric mode pressing a key produces the white number on that key See Table 2 5 Scroll U In the numeric mode moves the cursor up on the window In the function mode moves the cursor to the right In the aloha mode is a space key Scroll Down In the numeric mo
44. Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the terminal to form its own local network where terminals communicate peer to peer without APs using a shared ESSID Select the Long preamble check box if the terminal and its profile are using a long preamble when transmitting data A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission Devices in Ad Hoc mode are required to use the same preamble length to interoperate The terminal Initiating the Ad Hoc network sets the channel using the Channel drop down list used by each peer in the Ad Hoc network Note For terminals with a Bluetooth radio the Bluetooth radio must be turned off when using 802 11b Ad Hoc mode If the Bluetooth radio is not turned off the Ad Hoc connection fails while using Bluetooth See Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth for more information about Bluetooth 5 Select the country of operation for the terminal from the Country drop down list 5 8 This ensures the terminal is using country code information compatible with the country code data used by the associated AP Select the Encryption tab to set the terminal profile security level Mobile Companion Mode Encryption 1P config Power ngorthm 260K ShoredKey DD wi Oz Ds Qs Adapter will use this key Figure 5 4 Encryption Tab The terminal supports Open System no encryption 40 bit Shared Key 128 bit Sha
45. Requests You can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket Outlook The meeting notice is created automatically and sent either when you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to your e mail server Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools Options If you send and receive e mail messages through ActiveSync select ActiveSync To schedule a meeting 1 Create an appointment 2 Inthe appointment details hide the input panel then tap Attendees 10 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 From the list of e mail addresses you ve entered in Contacts select the meeting attendees The meeting notice is created and placed in the Outbox folder For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests see Calendar Help and Inbox Help on your terminal Contacts Contacts maintains a list of associates and friends so you can easily locate information at home or on the road Using the infrared IR port you can share Contacts information with other users Select the category of contacts you want displayed in the list Tap and enter part of a name to quickly find it in the list Tap to see additional phone Barr Adam 205 555 1212 w numbers and e mail addresses Bready Rich rich proseware e i Tap to display or edit Create Copy the contact details Delete Contact Tap and hold to display a Send E mail to Contact pop up menu of
46. Settings Storage Card The Storage Card tab displays how much memory is available in the terminal s partitions 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Storage Card tab Ei settings ef 4 a17 Total storage card memory 15 16 MB Inuse 0 00 MB Free 15 15 MB eq C6 E Platform id Storage Card Running Programs Ez Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large Files using storage memory Figure 3 37 Memory Window Storage Card Tab 2 Tap the drop down list and then the name of the partition whose information you want to View 3 Tap ok 3 41 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Running Programs The Running Programs tab displays the list of currently active programs 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Running Programs tab Ei settings e 4 ais 5 Running Program List Storage Card Running Programs Ka Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large Files using storage memory E Figure 3 38 Memory Window Running Programs Tab The Running Program List lists all running active programs 2 To stop an active program select the program from the Running Program List list and tap Stop 3 To display an active program select the program from the Running Program List list box and tap Activate 4 To stop all active programs tap Stop All 5 Tapok 3 42 Settings Power Use the Powe
47. TCM options Build and Send Build the current script into a set of hex images and send the hex t images to the terminal Defining Script Properties Before a script is created the script properties must be defined The properties include the terminal type the flash type the number of disks being created and the memory configuration of each disk partition To define the script properties 1 With TCM open click on the Script Window to make it the active window 2 Select Script Properties or click the Properties button The SCHIPT PROPERTIES window displays 12 5 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide SCRIPT PROPERTIES 8B X Terminal Flash Tupe Disks Script File Path Partition Table Properties Volume Label ACCESS Disk 1 Platform 15384 Read Write Disk 2 Application 16384 Fead wiite DK Cancel 9 OL SS coo M 10 12 6 Figure 12 2 Script Properties Window select FF2 64M from the Terminal drop down list Use the default flash type select the number of disk partitions to create from the Disks drop down list Select the memory size for each partition from the Size list boxes Note that added space on one disk partition subtracts it from the other partition Each each partition select read write access from the Access drop down lists The file path displays in the Script File Path field Select a cushion percentage
48. Using the MSR In order to use the MSR your terminal must have an application installed which accepts magnetic stripe data Your terminal has a terminal emulator installed which can be used to access data acquired by the MSR To use the terminal emulator you must create a new session or connect using an existing one Depending on your terminal s operating system use the appropriate set of steps below to create a new terminal session QE ge Ne I po KO 1 28 Select Start Settings and tap the Connections tab Tap the Connections icon Select Add a new modem connection In the Session Name box enter a name for the session In the Select a Modem list select the name of your modem or Hayes Compatible on Com1 Tap Next and enter any number It does not need to be a valid number Tap Next Tap Advanced From the Baud Rate drop down list select 9600 Tap the Port Settings tab and check all three boxes Tap Ok and then Finish Hide the soft keyboard 11 12 13 14 15 16 Select Manage existing connections Tap and hold on the new connection name Select Connect from the pop up menu In the Network Log On window tap Ok In the Connecting dialog box tap Hide Hide the soft keyboard The Manual Dial Terminal window is now visible Getting Started Swipe the magnetic stripe card through the reader ensuring the magnetic stripe on the card is positioned as shown Data encoded on the magnetic stripe displays
49. WLAN Networks PB 123456 Connect Figure 5 2 Available WLAN Networks 1 Select an available WLAN network from the list box 5 6 2 Tap Comnect The Mode tab appears Mobile Companion Mode Encryption IP Config Power Profile Name 123456 802 11 ESSID 123456 Operating Mode Infrastructure w Mobile Companion Mode Encryption IP Config Power Profile Name 802 11 ESSID Operating Made Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 Country USA ho Country Channel Long preamble Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 5 3 Mode Tab 3 he Profile Name and 802 11 ESSID fields are populated with the name and WLAN identifier of the network connection You can change the Profile Name if desired Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the terminal profile used to transmit with either an AP or another networked computer The ESSID is the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is 32 character maximum string identifying the WLAN The ESSID assigned to the terminal is required to match the AP ESSID for the terminal to communicate with the AP 4 Select the operating mode from the Operating Mode drop down list Infrastructure Select nfrastructure to enable the terminal to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the terminal default mode when Mobile Companion initially displays 5 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for
50. Zone Note These initial setup screens appear each time you perform a hard reset Setting Time and Date The Time and Date window does not appear after setting the time zone Tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon to use the clock control panel applet to set the time and date after a hard reset e 46416 ok MT 5 Eastern US 4 16 22 PM B 5 16 2003 10 16 22 PM 5 16 2003 mms E Figure 1 26 Setting Time and Date 1 23 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Checking Battery Status To check whether the main battery or backup battery in the terminal is charged tap Start Settings System tab Power icon to display the Battery Status window E settings e 4 435 D Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining Backup battery Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 1 27 Battery Status Screen To save battery power set your terminal to turn off after a specified number of minutes See Power on page 3 43 to set power management options 1 24 Getting Started Replacing the Handstrap The terminal has a factory installed handstrap which increases comfort when holding the terminal for extended periods of time The handstrap may be removed or replaced if damaged To replace the handstrap 1 Unhook the bottom of the handstrap from the handstrap connector on the ba
51. a guest so that can copy or move Information between my device and this computer Figure 4 2 New Partnership Window 4 5 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 5 Click the Yes radio button and then select Next The New Partnership Select Number of Partnerships window appears New Partnership X Select Number of Partnerships Select whether you want to synchronize with just this computer l Your device can have up to two partnerships or a partnership with only this computer Do you want your device to have a partnership and synchronize with only this computer Remove any existing partnerships on my device and set up a new partnership with just this computer C No want to synchronize with two computers Set up a partnership with this computer but do not remove any existing partnerships on my device Back Cancel Help Figure 4 3 Select Number of Partnerships 6 Select Next The New Partnership Select Synchronization Settings window appears New Partnership x Select Synchronization Settings Select the type of information you want to synchronize l To synchronize a particular type of information select its check box To stop gunehronization of that information clear its check bas Mobile Device Desktop Computer Calendar Mat Installed E Channels Channel Synchronization Contacts Mot Installed Oe Files Synchronized Files
52. aaa KABA PAR 60d o KG LG AG RR ee EAA DE RE AS Pac XR RS Ro UR aet We ee og ooo eae cee ees ee AA PAA Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar 0 00 ce eee ee eee sii ku AA AA eee eee oe ee ber er oe oe be eee ITA AA PESE IESU EN ook oie ee oaks ene edad eee ad EZ ead d qe uq ease AA d dre PEPE Lau 22x 19349 8 ee A oen de BG NANA KAKA RO Re RR Re d Soe go ee ee ee ee eee ee eee eee TT TTPTITTT CO OD arse oe eee seed AP AA A AA eee see see eo eee st Tid 3d 2583 v es seer E se ae 8 Seo Instant Message GON nde he RR de ROI LA BAY ees ee A o RR ean p sees PR v n T Mw Multiple Notification ICOM a a aa hh RRERERR RR RR REIR ERE BABET La cu 253 912 253 2 8 q 3 4 ween Ed doe E TE TTE LETEN wig a ied aru B ele RE LI MR ET TTE TT TT TETTE TUTTI TIER HORA oar cere IEPETVEFETURTERIERERSTKFETSSMMEETLSPERWERRUPSRESSET STESRES EUROS RENDERE AA REG IEEE EE OU DUE de oes Eco Boe Rp Res 2 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Entering Information Using the Input Panel 00 0 cece eee eee 2 23 LENG OU PO eb ey heroes oh AER I E RESO REN oe hoes teens 2 24 Using the Block PeCOUT TIERE susce cake OO NOR adeeb Soe RCR Owe eee ewes 2 25 Using the Letter Recognizer ccc eee nn 2 26 Usno Te Th i oa d ke nek KAKA ddr Ea Eee ees NGARAN ees WA 2 26 apie Belem ic AN Ce ee casi doe ee NP Kha BAKAL LO Baa KG eee eee eee 2 26
53. actions Beam Contact New View Tools Tap to create a new contact Figure 10 4 Contact Application Note To change the way information is listed tap Tools Options To create a contact 1 Tap Start Contacts to open the application 10 6 Applications 2 Tap New Tap to return to the contact list the contact is saved automatically E Contacts Mame Job title Department Company work bel Work Fax Work addr E mail Mobile tel Details Notes Scroll to see more fields Notes is a good place for maps and directions Figure 10 5 Creating a Contact 3 Using the input panel enter a name and other contact information Scroll down to see all fields 4 To assign the contact to a category scroll to and tap Categories Select a category from the drop down list In the contact list you can display contacts by category 5 To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes on page 10 12 6 When finished tap OK to return to the contact list 10 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide You may find a contact in one of four ways e In the contact list enter a contact name in the box under the navigation bar To show all contacts again clear text from the box or tap the button to the right of the box e Inthe contact list tap the category
54. and Next Appointment dialog box Battery Status Icon t Current Date and Time Upcoming Appointments Figure 2 12 Time and Next Appointment Dialog Box 2 18 Operating the PPT 8800 2 The dialog box displays the current date and time the battery status and any upcoming appointments in the Calendar Instant Message Icon The Instant Message icon notifies you when MSN Messenger has received a new incoming message See MSN Messenger on page 10 26 for more information 8 gt d2 17 17 m S bi LIL SM Messenger New message E johndoe 3456 hotmail com says hello i E erat rore Ci KA bag pa 4 Figure 2 13 MSN Messenger Dialog Box 2 19 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide E Mail Icon The E Mail icon notifies you when you have received incoming e mails See Inbox on page 10 14 for more information E You have 4 unread e mail messages Figure 2 14 New E mail Messages Dialog Box Multiple Notification Icon The Multiple Notification icon appears when two or more message notifications occur Tap the icon to display the multiple notification icons Figure 2 15 Multiple Notifications Icon 2 20 Operating the PPT 8800 Selecting Programs To select a program tap Start Programs then the program name To select which programs appear on the Program menu see Chapter 3 Settings Ei start 21134 amp EP SO
55. computer Creating Mobile Favorites If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 or later on your host computer you can download mobile favorites Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to your terminal so you can view Web pages while disconnected from your ISP and host computer Use the Internet Explorer plug in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites In Internet Explorer on your host computer click Tools Create Mobile Favorite To change the link name enter a new name in the Name field If desired select a desired update schedule in Update Click OK Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the Web page to your host computer p Ie oL 10 34 Applications 5 To download the pages linked to the mobile favorite you just created in Internet Explorer on the host computer right click the mobile favorite then click Properties On the Download tab specify the number of links deep you want to download To conserve terminal memory only go one level deep Synchronize your terminal and host computer Mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Explorer are downloaded to your terminal If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3 you must manually download content to keep the information updated on your host computer and terminal Before synchronizing in Internet Explorer on your host computer click Tools Synchronize Note the last time content was downloa
56. computer to be transferred Connecting Directly to an E mail Server You can set up a connection to an e mail server to send and receive e mail messages using a network connection and Inbox on your terminal Note The ISP or network must use a POP3 e mail server and an SMTP gateway When you connect to the e mail server new messages are downloaded to the terminal Inbox folder messages in the terminal Outbox folder are sent and messages that were deleted on the e mail server are removed from the terminal Inbox 10 14 Applications Messages that you receive directly from an e mail server are linked to your e mail server rather than your host computer When you delete a message on your terminal it s also deleted from the e mail server the next time you connect You can work online or offline When working online you read and respond to messages while connected to the e mail server Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send which saves space on your terminal When working offline once you ve downloaded new message headers or partial messages you can disconnect from the e mail server then decide which messages to download completely The next time you connect Inbox downloads the complete messages you ve marked for retrieval and sends the messages you ve created You can use multiple e mail services to receive your messages For each e mail service you intend to use first set up and name the e mail service If you use the same servi
57. devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer ko PIN requests Pee 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h J k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj IN te Figure 8 44 Enter Bluetooth Device PIN Window Note The Device Pin can only be numeric characters 8 Inthe Device PIN text box enter the PIN between 1 and 16 characters the AP is set to and tap Next The terminal sends the PIN request to the AP 8 34 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 9 Inthe Name text box edit the name of the AP if desired 10 Tap Finish 11 In the My Connections list tap the phone and then Next er aff 12 33 AP via BLuetooth amp Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card Po IF vou travel ar change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj i te Figure 8 45 Enter Dial Up Number 12 Enter any string of numbers Note An actual telephone number is not required however the Bluetooth AP must support connections as Bluetooth modem 13 Tap Next EJ settings et d 4 46 My Connection User name John Doe Password kk po E SE SE SE SE SE kok Domain domain name If provided by ISP or network administrator Advanced Cance
58. different type of computer Move this file to your terminal If you cannot find installation instructions for the program in the Read Me file or documentation use ActiveSync Explore to copy the program file to the Program Files folder on your terminal For more information on copying files using ActiveSync see ActiveSync Help When installation is complete tap Start Programs on the terminal then tap the program icon 12 25 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Adding a Program from the Internet ip 12 26 Select Start Settings About icon Version tab Note the information in Processor field Download the program to your terminal from the Internet using Pocket Internet Explorer You may see a single xip exe zip file or a Setup exe file Read any installation instructions Read Me files or documentation that comes with the program Many programs provide special installation instructions Tap the file such as a xip or exe file to launch the installation wizard Follow the directions on the window Configuring the Terminal Update the ROM Image Using IPL To update the ROM Image on the terminal using IPL 1 Connect the Serial Charging Cable or the CRD8800 Single Slot Cradle to the host computer Serial device cable 2 Connect the power supply to the Serial Charging Cable or the cradle and the AC line cord to the powe
59. digital audio and video files that are stored on your terminal To switch to Windows Media Player tap Start Windows Media 73 Windows Media er xz G eS f c I ma o Windows Media 64 kbps we La f Windows Media Player Indicates the progress of the current track Slide to adjust volume Tap to turn volume on off Tap to skip to the next song Tap to play a previous song Tap to stop Tap to play or pause Figure 10 23 Using Windows Media Player Use your host computer to copy digital audio and video files to your terminal Your terminal can play Windows Media and MP3 files For more information on using Windows Media Player tap Start Help Microsoft Reader Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on your terminal Download books to your host computer from your favorite eBook Web site Then use ActiveSync to copy the book files to your terminal The books appear in the Reader Library where you can tap them in the list to open them 10 30 Applications Each book consists of a cover page an optional table of contents and the pages of the book You can e Page through the book by using the Up Down control on your device or by tapping the page number on each page e Annotate the book with highlighting bookmarks notes and drawings e Search for text and look up definitions for words To switch to Microsoft Reader tap Start Programs Microsoft Reader Getting Books on Your Device You c
60. ensure It is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 8 18 PPT 8866 Bluetooth feet 10 meters of the terminal In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on 6 On the Calendar or Tasks window tap Tap to send to the Bluetooth device receiving the appointment or task Tap Pending to cancel 7 The terminal processes and sends the file s Sending a Contact 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a contact 2 Tap Start Contacts The Contacts window appears 3 Tap and hold the contact s to send In the pop up menu select Beam Contact ES Contacts an aff 3 22 K3 M Contacts v sab cde foh ik imn ona rst wa Q 070015555 1379 wu WX lp Beam Contact Delete Contact New View Tools Figure 8 21 Contact Window 8 19 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 The terminal begins to search for Bluetooth devices within range ES Contacts e zb ok BElDae John To beam select a device Infrared 3 Dnnn2czicgedc amp Searching Align ports Tap to send Figure 8 22 Contacts Window Beam Note f the terminal is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the terminal In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on On the Contacts window tap Tap to send to the Blu
61. following order Platform Application Regmerge continues to look for reg files in these folders until all folders are checked This allows folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list This way it is possible to override Registry changes made by the Platforms partitions folders Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry changes The SMDK contains examples of reg files Note Regmerge only merges the reg files on hard resets The merge process is skipped during a soft reset Typically you should not need to make modifications to registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge However sometimes during software development you may need to modify these values Since these early loading drivers read these keys before RegMerge gets a chance to change them you must soft reset the terminal after a hard reset The soft reset does not re initialize the registry and the early loading driver reads the new registry values Do not use Regmerge to modify built in driver registry values or merge the same Registry value to two files in the same folder as the results are undefined CopyFile CopyFile copies files from one folder to another on a hard reset Files can be copied from a non volatile partition Application or Platform to the Windows or other volatile partition 12 23 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide during a hard reset During a hard reset CopyFi
62. from the Cushion drop down list to specify the percent of flash reserved for cushion Choosing a higher number reduces disk storage space but also increases write performance on fragmented disks or disks becoming full To speed the writing process select as high a number as storage needs permit up to 25 Click OK to complete the settings Configuring the Terminal Creating a Hex Image Script TCM operations are controlled by script files Script files are created using the following steps 1 Open a new or existing script file 2 Copy components to the script window 3 Save the script file Open a New or Existing Script File A script file can be created from scratch or based on an existing script file Click the New button to create a new script or click the Open button to open an existing script for example a script provided in the DCP If an existing script is opened and changes are made saving the changes overwrites the original script To use an original or Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function which allows saving to a different filename Copy Components to the Script Window Script contents are managed using standard file operations such as New Folder Delete and Rename Items can be added to the script by selecting files and folders in the File Explorer window and dragging them to the Script window The File Explorer window supports standard windows multi
63. hopping sequence will always differ from the first one 6 Receiver Input Bandwidth Synchronization and Repeated Single or Multiple Packets The input bandwidth of the receiver is 1 MHz In every connection one Bluetooth device is the master and the other one is the slave The master determines the hopping sequence see section 5 The slave follows this sequence Both devices shift between RX and TX E 2 Bluetooth Regulatory Information time slot according to the clock of the master Additionally the type of connection e g single or multi slot packet is set up at the beginning of the connection The master adapts its hopping frequency and its TX RX timing is according to the packet type of the connection Also the slave of the connection uses these settings Repeating of a packet has no influence on the hopping sequence The hopping sequence generated by the master of the connection will be followed in any case That means a repeated packet will not be send on the same frequency it is send on the next frequency of the hopping sequence 7 Dwell Time in Data Mode The dwell time of 0 3797s within a 30 seconds period in data mode is independent from the packet type packet length The calculation for a 30 seconds period is as follows Dwell time time slot length hop rate number of hopping channels 30s Example for a DH1 packet with a maximum length of one time slot Dwell time 625 IJs 1600 1 s 79 30s 0 3797s in
64. icon Mode tab E settings ef 6155 5 Bluetooth C on Bluetooth will locate and connect En bonded devices ap orf Bluetooth will not search For bonded devices and no device can connect to your device O Discoverable All devices can Find and connect to vour device to create a bond Mode Bonded Devices Devices E Figure 8 1 Bluetooth Window Mode Tab 2 Select the Off radio button to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter off 3 Tab ok to return to the Connections tab or 8 5 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the Connectivity D dialog box Ef Start pa Fridaw Tulw i 7 a Connectivity Turn on Flight mode Tap to turn Bluetooth off 1 The Internet PC connection Settings Figure 8 2 Connectivity Dialog Box Tap Turn on flight mode to turn off the Bluetooth radio mode Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On 1 oa Ty 8 6 Tap Start Settings Settings tab Wireless Adapter Control icon Tap the Radio Off button to turn the wireless radio off Tap ok to close the window Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Mode tab Select the On radio button or the Discoverable radio button to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter on n On mode the terminal is connectable allowing it to locate and connect to bonded Bluetooth devices within range
65. involves entering the same PIN on the two devices to bond Once a bond is created and the Bluetooth radios are turned on the devices recognize the bond and are able to exchange information without re entering a PIN To bond with a discovered Bluetooth device 1 Ensure that the Bluetooth device being looked for is in discoverable mode 8 7 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Ensure that the two devices are within 30 feet 10 meters of one another 3 Tap Start Settings Connections tab E settings et 4279 56 3 9 of Beam Bluetooth Connections Br Wireless Ethernet Personal System Connections Eaj Figure 8 4 Settings Window Connections Tab 4 Tap Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab Ey settings e 46156 Q5 Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options New Mode Bonded Devices E Figure 8 5 Bluetooth Window Bonded Devices Tab 8 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 5 Tap New The terminal searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them 6 in the list Select a Bluetooth device amp Searching complete VERE Figure 8 6 Select a Bluetooth Device Window In the list tap the device with which to create a bond and then tap Next PET PEUT Enter Device Bluetooth PIN amp Enter 4 Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with 000 07109edc The same PIN
66. is simply a set of files that are assigned attributes both as an entire package and as individual component files The package is assigned a version number and the transfer occurs when an updated version is available An AirBEAM package can optionally contain developer specified logic to be used to install the package Installation logic is typically used to update client device flash images or radio firmware Examples of common AirBEAM packages would include packages for custom client application software radio firmware and AirBEAM Smart Client software Once these packages are built they are installed on the host server for retrieval by the handheld device The AirBEAM Package Builder is a utility used to define generate and install Air BEAM packages to a server The packages are then loaded from the server onto a client device equipped with an AirBEAM Smart Client executable For detailed instructions on how to define generate and install AirBEAM packages to the server refer to the AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide p n 72 55769 xx 9 3 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide AirBEAM Smart Client The AirBEAM Smart Client is installed on your handheld terminal It is configured with the server access information the names of the packages to be downloaded and other controlling parameters When the AirBEAM Smart Client is launched the device connects to the specified FTP serv
67. keys Performing a Hard Reset A hard reset also restarts the terminal but erases all stored records and entries Therefore never perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve the problem Note You can restore any data previously synchronized with a computer during the next ActiveSync operation See Chapter 4 Communication for detailed ActiveSync instructions 2 36 Operating the PPT 8800 To perform a hard reset Qu Xr O Caution With a hard reset formats preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default settings Remove the battery cover While holding down the Function key use the stylus to gently press the reset button Figure 2 32 Reset Button Release the Function key Replace the battery cover Press the Power button As the terminal initializes its Flash File system the Symbol splash screen displays for about a minute Calibrate the screen See Calibrating the Screen on page 1 21 to perform an initial setup of the terminal 2 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 38 Chapter 3 Settings Chapter Contents Gee ee ee eae eee a ee eee ee ee eee ee KNA LANG ee ee ee Pd d MITING SENMOS ont ene diets d ur ed cub oe KAPE Min GANA a E a ke ease oe S oe NG ee KA BAK oT fae ee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee ee eee ee eee gee TU codec edid ERR S PR FPE pelos eed e Sad qe Pd eA ee Aqu heed RF Rd E NER PIN
68. le BOG ia de eee Sew ied ened Kk TRA GA MANG ceded netede chew eines 1 17 Using the CRD8800 Single Slot Cradle eens 1 17 Using the CRD8800B Single Slot Cradle 1 0 ee eee 1 18 Using the UBC Battery Adapter eee eee eens 1 19 GIOS LED MOON MEME 1 20 Sarima Tie TOWING AA RA AA 1 20 Rea UNG NE SCION 6 05 os sace na eee s rtsp Pr AA ENESA RC i es 1 20 Setting Time and Date ee eee eens 1 22 LUGON KA DUBIE lt ctceesdceusnswcoueecad cone E xdIS d E R ca Eddda tid taedia 1 23 Replacing the Handstrap AAP AA 1 24 Magnetic Strip Reader nanana aana aana 1 26 Metalno te MSR seriestart ttai AO AA dd ea 1 26 1 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Removing the MSR sa ABG BAD KA BKA KAKA KK ce ARA BP URCRROR RR ORA RERO AKA n KANG 1 27 HEIDE TRU AA AA AA AA AA AA AA 1 27 Charging the Terminal s Battery rn 1 29 Configuring the Terminal a acu eaa eo e ORC PRECOR REOR EORR RODA R DO RR SACR HR EY Os 1 30 1 2 Getting Started Introduction This chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on your terminal how to install and charge the batteries replace the handstrap and start your terminal for the first time Unpacking the Terminal Carefully remove all protective material from around the terminal and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping Verify that you received all equipment listed below terminal
69. link E Figure 10 25 Mobile Favorites You ll see the page that was downloaded the last time you synchronized with your host computer If the page is not on your terminal the favorite is dimmed Synchronize with your host computer again to download the page to your terminal or connect to the Internet to view the page 10 37 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Browsing the Web 1 Connect to your ISP or network using a Spectrum24 connection see Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 29 2 Once connected go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways e Tap Favorites then tap the favorite you want to view e Inthe address bar at the top of the screen enter the Web address and tap the go button or tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses Note f you select Pocket Internet Explorer before setting up the network connections a screen may appear allowing you to proceed to the connection settings screen After you select your settings you return to Pocket Internet Explorer To add a favorite link while using the terminal go to the Web page you want to add tap and hold on the page and tap Add to Favorites 10 38 Applications Pictures Use Pictures to view jpg format pictures stored on the terminal send pictures to others view a slideshow of your pictures or set a picture as the background on the Today screen Copy
70. lt 0 c gt 16 PPT 8866 Bluetooth return FALSE pba pba 16 C for i 0 1 lt 8 i pp if liswxdigit pp return FALSE int c pp if C gt a C C a 0xa else if c gt A C C A Oxa elsec c 0 if c lt 0 c gt 16 return FALSE pba pba 16 C If pp 7 amp amp pp E 0 return FALSE else return T RUE Bluetooth Printing The terminal supports Bluetooth printers that support a serial port profile Printing to a Bluetooth printer requires a print enabled application to be installed on the terminal Refer to the DCP for the PPT 8800 for more information 8 41 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 8 42 Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart Chapter Contents erie 4 AATE PERETI ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee pA KAG ee d dd 9 3 PIBESRM Package DUEL Lead eas Haas BLG KA de BLAKE AK KAPAL CC UR RA RR a 9 3 PAGE GS Oman a ir dod o fria dep dol o KAKA KKK AD EK BANG KABA PK ROCA USC CAO ELI 9 4 PDE O LE coos KKK RM doi Sob JURA AKA eh GAAN N ANNA ANNA MARA 9 4 Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client a 9 4 moto 4E AA AA APA AA AA 9 5 nel AY AA AA AAP PA T 9 5 Server Tab 9 6 Misc 1 Tab 9 7 Misc 2 Tab
71. minutes or less 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Power icon Advanced tab E settings et o4 436 D n battery power Turn off device if not used Far 3 minutes n external power Turn off device if not qur 5 minutes Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 3 41 Power Window Advanced Tab Select On battery power Turn off device if not used for check box Select time value from the drop down list Select On external power Turn off device if not used for check box Select time value from the drop down list Tap ok 9 Qr S O IM Optimizing Battery Life You want your batteries to last as long as possible especially when you re on the road Under normal conditions you can get many hours of use from a single charge Here are a few tips to help you get the most of the battery Use external power whenever possible especially when Using the backlight e Connecting to a host computer Using accessories 3 45 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 46 Set the terminal to turn off when idle While on battery power the terminal automatically turns off or suspends operation if you don t touched the keyboard or used the stylus for three minutes Maximize battery life by shortening this time Turn off sounds you don t need By default the terminal produces sounds in response to a num
72. new VPN server connection Set Up my proxy server E Figure 7 36 Connection Window 1 21 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 Tap the Advanced tab Connections Networks are groups of settings used by programs to automatically connect to an ISP or private network Select Networks Dialing rules determine how a number is dialed From a specific location Select Location Select what your network card connects to Network Card Advanced Figure 7 37 Connections Advanced Tab 3 Tap Select Networks The Network Management window appears Programs that automatically connect to the Internet should connect using Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using My Work Network hd Exceptions are needed if aur company uses periods in intranet addresses Figure 7 38 Network Management Window Tap ok Tap Task tab Pag p Uh um 28 In the top drop down list select My ISP In the bottom drop down list select My Work Network PPT 8860 Bluetooth 8 Tap Add a new modem connection under My ISP The Make New Connection window appears h m2 10 27 Make New Connection Enter a name For Ehe connection ISP via Bluetooth Select a modem Bluetooth Phone fr tly uj caPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F ruj jV te Figure 7 39 Make New Connection Window 9 Inthe Enter a name for the
73. particular time zone often set it as your Visiting time zone so that you can quickly see the correct date and time A clock displays on the Navigation bar To view the current date and time tap the Time icon to see today s date See Time Icon on page 2 18 for more information LI LEG i L arire eriz UE i Time and Next Appointment al wednesday June 11 2003 r i m 721 PM L No upcoming appointments ki r 4 4 Figure 3 30 Time and Next Appointment Message To switch from analog to digital clock display tap and hold the Time icon Select Analog or Digital 3 36 Settings Alarms You can use your terminal as a travel alarm clock by setting a wake up alarm 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon Alarms tab Te E ij settings v wake Up eg T y T FE Call Supervisor s MrT wir s z Description gt smr wrrs C lt Description gt smr wrrs E Figure 3 31 Clock Window Alarms Tab 2 Inthe Description field enter a name for the alarm 3 Tap the letter s representing the day s of the week that the alarm be enabled 4 Tap the bell icon to set alarm features The alarm settings window appears AF settings e 461233 D Play sound Repeat sound Display message Flash light Figure 3 32 Alarm Settings Window 3 37 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide O ow Ec 11 12 13 14 15 3 38
74. peer adapter networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab These are peers available to the terminal profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the Ad Hoc networks available to the terminal Select the Disable Profile Roaming checkbox to configure the adapter WLAN profile to not roam to the next available WLAN profile when the terminal moves out of range of the current WLAN profile Select the Enable Sounds check box to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test and associating with an AP The tones are important to notify users if the pinging is received or if the terminal has roamed to another AP select Rogue AP Detection to inform the system of unauthorized APs on the network Note Mobile Companion has a password protection feature When Mobile Companion initially displays the password is off by default To create a password tap Change Password Pai Bg Options e PAL ok Current Password New Password Confirm New Password E Figure 6 19 Mobile Companion Change Password Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 7 Enter a case sensitive password 10 characters maximum in the Current Password field and tap OK To change the current password enter the current password in the Current Password field and enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields and tap OK Changi
75. power level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity Additionally select minimum power in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is anticipated The Automatic Power Saving Mode switches to Best Network Performance when an AC power supply is detected If a battery is used an appropriate setting between Best Network Performance and Acceptable Network Performance is automatically chosen based on a real time analysis of network usage The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting and extends the operating time before the battery is recharged The Manual Power Saving Mode allows you to select a performance level suited to intended operation There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance using the most battery power to Acceptable Network Performance using the least battery power A network performance description is displayed for each power range 11 Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the terminal profile Status To view the status of the wireless network connection select Status from the Mobile Companion menu 1 Select the Signaltab to display a real time graph of the signal quality of the terminal to the associated AP Infrastructure Mode only The number of times the terminal has roamed to and from APs the current data rate and the network status are 6 17 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference G
76. progress status for the download Note The host computer progress status screen may be completed but the terminal might still be updating 19 TCM also displays a status update for the download Caution Do not remove the terminal from the cradle until the TCM progress dialog box has disappeared and the terminal indicates it has downloaded suc cessfully 12 31 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 20 When completed the Download Complete screen appears IPL VER X XX Partition Name Download Complete Press bnter to return to Main Menu Cold Boot Exits IPL Figure 12 19 Download Complete Screen 21 Perform a hard reset see Performing a Hard Reset on page 2 36 22 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon System tab to view the new system information ES Symbol Settings 4 m2 4 40 ok LILITD Park 1 0000000000000000 LILITD Park z 001700055606457F Build ID 0 03 030502 Beta Figure 12 20 Symbol Settings Window System Tab 12 32 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Iroubleshooting Chapter Contents Supe lt a oe REIR NAKA ee ete ESENE ENEE ENSSAT RAD d Rd ee dd Safely Maintaining the PPT 8800 0 60005 00 00 cee eee eee cee Rs Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines 0 0 cee eee ee scope o ac TETTE Cleaning the Terminal OMe cess da ec KAKA EORR A eee REOR OR CALOR CR ao eben Keone ING Cradle CNO
77. server 10 14 vehicle cradle 0 1 7 creating messages 10 18 ActiveSync managing 10 19 PA AR TETTE KAKA anG a RT 2 14 message gt ARR PA 10 16 using ethernet cradle 4 14 synchronizing e mail 10 14 using serial cable 4 9 notes less 10 12 using serial cradle 4 11 tasks eee eee eee eee 10 9 ad NOG k aab04 5 5 5 8 5 12 6 5 6 8 6 16 Summary screen 10 11 adding programs isses rna 12 25 appointments Lsessee 10 4 AQIUSING MEON inceeceteecav ee ced 3 40 attaching handstrap 1 25 adjusting terminal settings 3 3 audio settings B 11 adjusting the backlight 2 3 authentication seeded cuveesevoeou wees 6 8 AirBEAM 000 c eee eee 9 1 EAP TES 0 hn ba x Rin Xu 6 12 S o 9 4 kerberos essen 6 11 Index 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide LEAP T 6 11 LALA MT T 6 10 PES aaa pp Aa iris 6 12 AvantGo channels 10 35 B backlight 062440 de Ea ERR 604045 3 29 3 60 GOIN TR ET T TO TT E TTE 2 3 backup battery 3 43 PIO amd GRAN AB BAGA GALA 1 11 batteries ED kaka KKK R EBA BAKA AKABA 1 11 battery check status 1 24 NGALAN e E eu KAR oe 1 8 installing larger capacity 1 10 inst
78. tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles EB Network ar aft 3 43 IP Configuration Authentication Encryption IP Config Pq 4 gt E Figure 6 9 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP e Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP from the IP Type drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server DHCP is the default setting for the terminal profile When DHCP is selected the IP address fields are read only e Select Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS and WINS addresses used by the terminal profile 6 14 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 ES Network er aff 3 59 e IP Configuration Gateway DNS Authentication Encryption IF Config Pq 4 gt E Figure 6 10 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab Static IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DNS WINS The Internetis a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Internet Protocol address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter
79. the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 The default gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet email delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located and or email delivery fails WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations 6 15 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 10 Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving Modes for the terminal profile st MZa03 amp ES st M4Za03 amp Radio Transmission Power Radio Transmission Power Automatic Power Saving Mode Automatic Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Excellent Network Performance Excellent Network Performance Uses
80. the table of contents if there is one Subsequently whenever you open the book you ll be automatically taken to the last page read In addition to the text each book page includes a page number and book title Tap to select a navigation option The Call of the Wild were booming the find thousands Northland Tht Add Bookmark Drag to select text and dogs and the amp 43 riae M nu d then tap an option muscles by whig coats to prote Add Drawing frost Find Buck lived Copy Text the sun kissed Sama crara vaney Judge Miller s place it was called It stood back from the road half hidden among the trees through which glimpses could be caught of the wide cool veranda that ran Tap arrows to turn the 45h page or tap and hold page to bring up page riffle You can also page through a book using the Up Down arrow keys on the keypad of your terminal Using Reader Features Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books These options are available from any book page e Select text by dragging across the text on the page Then tap an option on the pop up menu as described here e Search for Text Find text in a book by tapping Find on the pop up menu Enter the word you want to search for and tap the desired Find option Reader highlights found text on the page To close Find tap outside the box To return to your original page tap the
81. the terminal is powered on Owner Information my info John Doe Symbol One Symbol Plaza Haltsville New York 11742 531 738 2400 Figure 3 12 Welcome Screen 3 18 Settings Passwords Use the Password window to set a password to disable unauthorized access to the terminal Password If your device is configured to connect to a network use a strong difficult to figure out password to help protect network security Password cracking tools continue to improve and the computers used to crack passwords are more powerful than ever Caution If you forget your password or if your terminal has become corrupted and soft resetting doesn t work you must perform a hard reset Performing a hard reset erases all files and data that you have created and programs you have installed 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Password icon Password tab AF Settings Pap PRES 0D if Password Prompt if device unused For a Simple 4 digit password CG Strong alphanumeric password Password Password Figure 3 13 Password Window Password Tab 2 Select Prompt if device unused for check box to enable password protection 3 From the drop down list select a time value for the protection to take affect after non use 3 19 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Select either Simple 4 digit password or Strong alohanumeric password radio button to set a p
82. the terminal to an autocharge adapter and various cables MAC eo o 2 2 2 Q2 201 DEX Cable Connects the terminal to a vending machine Autocharger Connects to the cigarette lighter in a vehicle to charge the terminal Printer Cables Adds printing capabilities to the terminal USB Cable Allows USB connection from the Cable Cup to a host computer Attachable power supply Allows charging of the terminal through the Universal Cable Cup and line cord Serial Charging Cable Allows serial connection of the terminal to a host computer Single Slot Serial Cradle Charges the terminal and spare standard battery and synchronizes the terminal with a host computer through a serial connection Single Slot Serial Cradle B Charges the terminal with standard or larger capacity battery and with Larger Capacity Battery spare standard and larger capacity battery and synchronizes the Support terminal with a host computer through a serial connection 1 6 Getting Started Table 1 1 Accessories Four Slot Serial Cradle Charges up to four terminals with standard or larger capacity battery and synchronizes the terminals with a host computer through a serial connection Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Charges the terminals with standard or larger capacity battery and synchronizes the terminal with a host computer through an ethernet connection Holster s 0 Stores the terminal when notin use the terminal when not in use ma Handle a MENU g
83. title and then tap Return on the pop up menu Copy Text You can copy text from books that support this feature into any 10 32 Applications program that accepts text On a book page select the text you want to copy Then tap Copy Text on the pop up menu The text can be pasted into the program of your choice e Bookmarks When you add a bookmark to a book a color coded bookmark icon appears in the right margin You can add multiple bookmarks to a book Then from anywhere in the book tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page Highlights When you highlight text it appears with a colored background Notes When you attach a note to text you enter the text in a note pad that appears on top of the book page A Note icon displays in the left margin To show or hide the note tap the icon e Drawings When you add a drawing a Drawing icon appears in the bottom left corner of the page and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page Draw by dragging your stylus e To see a list of a book s annotations including bookmarks highlights text notes and drawings tap Annotations Index on the book s cover page You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page Removing a Book When you finish reading a book you can delete it to conserve space on your terminal If a copy of the book is stored on your host computer you can download it again at any time To remove a book from your device tap and hold t
84. transmitted between the AP and terminal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal 2 Select the Info tab to view the terminal s current software and driver revision data as well as the operating parameters of the current profile Version Information Current Status version Information Software Version 3 9 2 40 Driver Version 39 655 172 Firmware Version 3 91 65 Hardware Version 3 Country Current Status Profile Marne ABCTO7 ESS ID Sacto Encryption Mode WEP Authentication None Performance Best Signal Info 1P status Ping ars Status Ping APs E Figure 6 13 Mobile Companion Info Tab Displays the terminal s software driver firmware and hardware versions as well as country information This data is consistent for the terminal regardless of which terminal profile is the current profile Displays the terminal s current Profile Name ESSID and Encryption mode Terminal performance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength Terminal operating information differs depending on which profile has been enabled as the current profile 6 19 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Select the IP Status tab to view the terminal s network address information Unlike the IP Config tab in Findi
85. version 4 20 1081 Build 13100 1996 2003 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Processor ARM XScale Memory 51 50 MB Expansion slot In use Owner Figure 3 20 About Window Version Tab 2 Tap ok 3 26 Settings Device ID The Device ID tab allows you to customize the name and description of the terminal 1 Tap Start Settings System tab About icon Device ID tab a e 46414 Your device uses this information to identify itself to other computers Enter a name that starts with a letter and contains the characters 4 2 or 0 9 Device name Pocket PC4 Figure 3 21 About Window Device ID Tab 2 Inthe Device name field enter a name for the terminal Ensure that you do not use spaces 3 In the Description field enter a description for the terminal 4 Tap ok 3 27 Copyrights PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide The Copyrights tab allows you to view any relevant copyright information 1 2 Tap ok 3 28 Tap Start Settings System tab About icon Copyrights tab Portions of this software are based on MESA Mosaic NCSA Mosaic TM was developed by the National Center For Supercomputing Applications at the University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Distributed under a licensing agreement with Spyglass Inc Contains security software lic
86. window above the input panel 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Word Completion tab E settings et 4 409 5 Suggested wards pop up in a window above the input panel Tap to accept Suggest wards when entering text Suggest after entering letters Suggest word s Add a space after suggested word Replace text as you type Input Method word Completion Options _ IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen E Figure 3 6 Input Window Word Completion Tab 2 Make the desired changes to the settings 3 Tap ok 3 12 Settings Options To adjust the options for writing and recording 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Options tab Ei settings et 42409 5 These optians applv when writing or recording is supported Voice recording Format Default zoom level For writing Default zoom level For typing Capitalize First letter of sentence Scroll upon reaching the last line Input Method Word Completion Option IF stylus Eaps become inaccurate align the touch screen E Figure 3 7 Input Window Options tab 2 Make the desired changes to the settings 3 Tap ok 3 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Menus Use Menus window to change the items that appear in the Start menu Start Menu To change the items that appear in the Start menu 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Menu
87. with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Chatting with Contacts Tap a contact name to open a chat window Enter your message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen or tap My Text to enter a preset message and tap Send To invite another contact to a multi user chat tap Tools Invite and tap the contact you want to invite EJ MSN Messenger m 1 56 tok You are chatting with Adam Enter a message 7 Hi Can you 8 at 00 Tap to send a message rfjg n j bn 7 x c v 5 n m 17 eaa Xt gt Tools Chats My Text 4 Ej Figure 10 21 Sending a Message To switch back to the main window without closing a chat tap Contacts To revert back to your chat window tap Chats and select the person you were chatting with 10 28 Applications To know if the contact you are chatting with is responding look for the message under the text entry area Ey MSN Messenger m 1 57 tok You are chatting with Adam Kim Akers says View full chat Hi Can you meek at 2 00 View the status of the chat carla saltan TETE shift z x2 C v b n m cuj i 4 t e Tools Chats My Text PE E Figure 10 22 Receiving a Message For more information on using MSN Messenger tap Start Help 10 29 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Windows Media Player With Windows Media Player on your terminal you can play
88. www symbol com Revision Changes t 01 02 03 04 05 History o the original manual are listed below Deo Description rt Initial release 10 2003 Add Bluetooth functionality Add MSR operation instructions 1 2004 Add Mobile Companion V3 9 2 information 7 1 2004 Add PPT 8866 configuration 2 2005 Update battery charging temperature add mobile computer and cradle connection cleaning procedures Contents About This Guide al AT PP AA NAT xvii Chapter Descriptions Rh xviii Related Material lc RR RR Rr Xx SA MOMA uui auae X ues prO Rc CRX e C ri Rd RR RR CR ae Do RC ae de Re xxi EU GG M TE xxii Chapter 1 Getting Started FEBRE AA AA AA AA AA FERRE Rd os be eee er qp d Rs 1 3 WD ACK NG ON eo ceed eee eect whee peed ok OUR CORSO ES se ese eee eee rir EE 1 3 Parts of ie PENNE 624 wa wh KA KA KAG DALA RONA BERNAL chee LANG Ro RR ar de 1 4 urt c AA 1 6 Gening a aadd Pad oe Se ee dd deas x o rene e KAGAD d RR Rod Rode KGG La PANA KI 1 8 sr Te SE AA 1 8 Installing the Standard Battery 0 0 eee en 1 8 Installing the Optional Larger Capacity Battery 0 0 ccc cee eee 1 10 CAO iho Terminal Bate care MABABAW Rr bePE ARA AR RR ERERRE EE URRE d PAGA E CAP oes 1 11 Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery llllllllllllsn 1 11 Using the Serial Charging Cable 0 0 ene 1 12 Using
89. you have a Hotmail or MSN account you already have a Passport Once you have either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account you can set up your account To switch to MSN Messenger tap Start Programs MSN Messenger icon Setting Up Your Account Before you can connect set up the Passport or Exchange account and sign in 1 Tap Tools Options 2 Enter your e mail address and password 3 Tap Sign In If you use MSN Messenger on your host computer your contacts automatically appear on your terminal 10 26 Applications Working with Contacts The MSN Messenger window is divided into Online and Not Online categories From this view while connected you can chat send e mail block the contact from chatting with you or delete contacts from your list using the pop up menu y MSN Messenger a 5 09 e Kim Akers Online gt Online A Adam Barr T Jo S Tap a contact to start a chat Randall Away Mot Online A Richard Bready A David Hodgson Send m Instant Message Send Mail Tim woodgroyebank c Block Delete Contact Tap and hold to display a pop up menu of actions Properties Tools Chats Figure 10 20 MSN Messenger Contacts Note Jo see others online without being seen tap Tools My Status Appear Offline You appear offline but remain on the blocked contact s list To unblock a contact tap and hold the contact then tap Unblock on the pop up menu 10 27 PPT 8800
90. you wish to delete You can only delete item s from one device at a time 7 55 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 Select File Remote device or Local device wherever the item s are located then select Delete remote item s or Delete local item s as applicable cy New Folder c Bluetooth Shared Fal Bf ScreenShot 10 bmp Send to remote Get from remote E Inm Delete remote item s Local devic Create remote folder Figure 7 80 Delete a File or Folder 3 Inthe Confirm dialog tap Yes Delete the selected remote items ye c Application Data cy ConnMgr cy My Documents Figure 7 81 Confirm File or Folder Deletion 56 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Refresh Remote View 1 Select the Device Refresh remote view ES Bluetooth File Explo 4 x 8 52 ex c Bluetooth Shared Fal Bf ScreenShot 10 bmp a Disconnect Con Refresh remote view File Device Help Fs X NA NA E Figure 7 82 Refresh Remote View 2 Your local device reads the contents of the remote device 3 After a few seconds the view of the contents of the remote device refreshes Connecting or Disconnecting to a Remote Device To connect to the remote device 1 Ensure the remote device has file sharing enabled 1 57 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 Select Device Connect or tap the Connect icon File Device Help a NA E Figure 7 83
91. 0 00 a 7 42 Connecting to an Undiscovered Access Point c eee eee eens 7 43 7 1 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Automatic Connection eere 7 44 Zew Ge APR eek ae a ee ene eee eee ee se AA 7 46 Exchange Business CAIs ccc eax dee une Oe ERE CERO LAG bebe bee kek ew ks 7 46 Send a Contact gs oe 5 045 eb eee eh aeRO 3 REOR ek eee 6 9460 855585458 Se eres 7 49 CN NG i ATTERT TOET eens Ge whe base keene Ed NE AREE NLANG 7 50 Browse Remote NG a ee PP AA PAA eer ee eee ee 7 51 Prepare Tor File NN 64 44 4644 db eed BAGA TITTEN 7 52 Send or Receive a File or Folder 0 0 ccc ee ee eee 7 53 Pi 7 54 Delete a File or Folder aaa 7 55 Refresh Remote View uad oae dde 3 UHAW HG RC WK 3 LA Ke ee TES eee LA 7 57 Connecting or Disconnecting to a Remote Device 7 57 Ext SI ea File EXDIDIOE AA AA 7 59 Receive Contact or aa s dra ey AG dee EROR ene Ahh ADD KG NG EROR oe 7 59 Enable File Ni GA APANG PAD NAGWAGING PAL CFTE E XS CRAYSERaU CPP TG 7 59 BUNAK OL AAP dta Rod Go abad eee ee PEG AA 7 60 1 2 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Introduction The PPT 8860 terminal provides Bluetooth communication with Bluetooth enabled devices such as phones printers access points APs and other terminals Turning Bluetooth On and Off Turn off the Bluetooth radio to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions e g an airplane 1 Tap the B
92. 1 or Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 To achieve the best battery life in terminals with multiple radios turn off the radios that are not being used Turn off the Spectrum24 radio via the Wireless Adapter Control applet in the Settings window see Wireless Adapter Control on page 3 61 Turn off the Bluetooth radio see Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Off on page 8 5 8 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Power States Cold Boot When a cold boot is performed on the terminal Bluetooth turns off after initialization which takes a few moments It is normal to see the Bluetooth icon appear and disappear as well as a wait cursor when initialization proceeds in all modes Warm Boot When a warm boot is performed on the terminal Bluetooth returns to the last state after initialization Suspend When the terminal suspends Bluetooth turns off Note When the terminal is placed in suspend mode the Bluetooth radio mode powers off and the piconet Bluetooth connection is dropped see Table 13 2 on page 13 13 for more information When the terminal resumes it take approximately 10 seconds for the Bluetooth radio driver to re initialize the radio Resume When the terminal resumes Bluetooth turns on if it was on prior to suspend 8 4 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Off 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth
93. 17 Figure 7 46 Dialing the Bluetooth Phone 7 33 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 30 Note To use a different Bluetooth enabled phone for dial up networking you can use the same connection setup but you must make the new phone your favorite Run the Get Connected Wizard again select the new phone and make it your new Favorite when prompted Alternatively you can use the Bluetooth Devices folder to change your favorite phone see Setting Up A Favorite Device on page 7 24 Dial Automatically from the Application 7 34 Note After you have set up a dial up connection the Connection Manager automatically tries to connect whenever you try to use Pocket Internet Explorer Pocket Inbox or any other program that uses a dial up connection Start the program that uses a dial up connection Enter a request for receiving and or transmitting information e g in Pocket Internet Explorer enter a new URL and tap Go The terminal automatically tries to connect Note f the phone number of dialing location is wrong tap Settings Tap Manage Connections and Edit the properties of your connection Depending on your phone and connection settings you may need to enter a passkey and or a password before the phone will start to dial If you have a Nokia 3650 6310 7650 8910 8910i or Motorola Timeport 270C you must complete the bonding process a The first time you try to connect the phon
94. 2 10 40 ok E3 My Bluetooth Device Friendly Mame Bluetooth Address O0 07 c 1c 9e 4c Discoverable Use Authentication Connectable Use Encryption Firmware 4 43 General COM Ports Object Sharing mM Figure 7 12 Device Manager General Tab In the Friendly Name field enter a name for the terminal Note n normal phone connect operation Discoverable mode is not needed and should be disabled If you do enable Discoverable mode e g for ActiveSync note that it does not shut off by itself To save power disable it when not needed Select the Discoverable checkbox to make the terminal discoverable by other Bluetooth devices Note Connectable Use Authentication and Use Encryption are also not required for printing or dial up networking applications 7 11 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 4 Select the Connectable checkbox to enable other Bluetooth device to connect to the terminal 5 Select the Use Authentication checkbox to enable other Bluetooth device to connect to the terminal Note Check Use Authentication to enable the Use Encryption option 6 Select the Use Encryption checkbox to enable other Bluetooth device to connect to the terminal 7 Tapok Assigning COM Ports To communicate with Bluetooth phones printers APs computers and FAXs the appropriate COM ports must be enabled 1 Tap Bluetooth icon Advanced Features My Bluetooth Device The
95. 2 3 adusmu Aa ausa he AA AA AA AA 2 3 Standard 6 Key Confguralloft uasa RAW EEqGaG REESE ADD PLA GAGANA GNG 2 3 ION O AWRA NG Ba ee OHH KELAN AA eee ede eed 2 4 CG CES AA APA PA 2 4 o Ha da LAAN EE EEEE 2 5 Usma GP oe cece tebe DA serene NAAALALA qa ben FOU TERI RT UTERE a aS 2 5 STO GREY COMU o ado epar toe G4 abe hb SEC Ou Hees BHAI RICE des 2 6 TON Ka il eo v9 Ie OE e eO ee be APA PA 2 7 ERN Oe Sink denen kendo eee be PA V d AERA 2 9 Today SOs bb achat de bere dab du PP AA 2 11 Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar 0 aaaea aaaeeeaa 2 12 CBS TIE oa a oe ose ee ee a ee ee dude ee ee ee xd 2 13 TON Pic a esl eee ee eee eee E Nu e ee oe es ce A PAA 2 14 APA AA ee ee eee 2 15 Seg sa ee eee TOIT OTT ere ee eee ee ee eee ee ee ee MAKA 2 16 Re E rons oot ERREUR EHE QUIERO OR 09 8 HERI dco fUr o E EENS 2 17 libag AP PP TETE O REI EU ERRARE 2 18 le ndin a aua op 3E dE E AA E 2 19 Aa ae haere ee VESSTIESHERTA HERR AU RUE Dha NUR ERRORI OH E EE RA 2 20 KUNO TI NA auia d HET TR ER EE dH YI V RETEERE1 QP E PTS E SE XV E E 2 20 Selecting FrograMS a KAKA esu lasrRheRRRAa4 hd RA GA RRG A CARRRANRR EAR Rd Lad 2 21 LUMA o n 2 22 NODE 22 2 2 gee eat fedi bored Pott 2344 53 tod duties EE 2 23 EBD It ES kode eb obs TERRE EFIE NU HRUSGSTNSEEIEXT S AA a 2 23 Entering Information Using the Input Panel llle 2 23 Using the Soft Keyboard uu ui x PAA AAP 2 24 Using th Block PT SEPT TC 2 25 Using t
96. 3 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol 4 Scrub the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator along the pins as shown in Figure 13 5 slowly moving back and forth from one side of the connector to the other Figure 13 5 Cleaning the Cradle Connector Pins 13 7 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 5 All sides of the connector should also be scrubbed with the cotton tipped applicator illustrated by the arrows in Figure 13 6 a saw MAMANS AYN non Oy um Agaanh M Figure 13 6 Cleaning the Cradle Connector 6 Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube nozzle approximately 1 2 inch away from the surface Figure 13 7 Air Spray Cradle Connector WARNING Do not point the tube nozzle at yourself and others Ensure the tube or nozzle is away from your face 7 Ensure there is no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator 8 Remove lint if found Maintenance and Troubleshooting 9 If grease and other dirt is found on other areas of the cradle use a lint free cloth and alcohol to remove 10 Allow at least 10 30 minutes depending on ambient temperature humidity for the alcohol to air dry before apply power to cradle Note f temperature is low and humidity is high longer drying time is needed Warm and dry requires less drying time DO NOT PLACE PRODUCTS IN AN OVEN OR UNDER HEAT LAMPS W
97. 3 40 si m 3 40 iii bake ok 4 wid sedo E de db 3 14 Microsoft Reader 10 30 Mj APP NANA oan 5 14 6 18 missed AP beacons 5 14 6 18 mobile channels 10 35 mobile companion 5 3 6 3 isi AA AA 2 14 MENU PEPE PACE EE 4 29 mobile favorites 10 34 10 37 creallg aa Rr hr ds 10 34 MSN Messenger 10 26 ua C ees 3 18 N navigation DaF sacs AA 2 12 notational conventions XX notes application 10 12 HOMICAUONS ANG MG TAE Rd Ede 3 4 O object sharing si A p cc 7 13 open system 0 9 8 13 operating environment C 1 optimizing battery life 3 45 PEN Lis sic kA AMA BANA 5 5 6 5 owner information 3 16 GADOTTIDIBE auae ddr osdode e Du P partitions dg ad quce apos Pd SO dca 12 22 tilted 42 22238448 fld pisii 12 24 ig Ga LAGA ERE ED BKA 12 24 splash screen 12 24 parts of the terminal 1 4 DONI ea eee beaka iex Fa dd xs 3 4 password DIE PAA 3 21 passwords aaa 3 4 3 19 PED L2 49623 4976 99 EX T 6 10 6 12 TG NTC TIR T TIR 5 5 5 17 6 5 6 21 3 gn AAP E TIT C 4 FOCKE EXCO Laus ek pEE ERRARE Ee x 10 24 Pocket Internet Explorer browsing web 10 38 ej 45 he pe dee FERRERS 10 35 favorite NAKS isses rr res 10 34 mobile favorites 10 34
98. 3 hours A charged battery may be stored in the charger indefinitely Upon completion of the charging cycle the charger switches to Maintenance Mode where it maintains the battery at 10096 of its rated capacity Caution Do not charge a battery that is below 0 C 32 F or above 45 C 113 F Allow the battery to warm up to room temperature before charging 1 20 Getting Started Charge LED Indicator Table 1 2 Charge LED Indicator m Battery Charging Cradle LED No spare battery in slot spare battery not placed correctly cradle is not powered Solid red Spare battery is charging Flashing red Error in charging check placement of spare battery Solid green Charging is complete Starting the Terminal Press the Power button to turn on the terminal If the terminal does not power on perform a hard reset See Resetting the Terminal on page 2 36 When turning the terminal on for the first time the terminal initializes its Flash File system the Symbol splash screen displays for about a minute followed by the calibration window Note that these windows also appear every time you perform a hard reset Calibrating the Screen To calibrate the screen so the cursor on the touch screen aligns with the tip of your stylus 1 Remove the stylus from its storage silo on the back of the terminal t2 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Carefully press and briefly hold t
99. 35 Advanced Window General Tab 23 Tap the General tab 24 In the Baud Hate drop down list select 115200 8 28 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 25 Un check the Wait for dial tone before dialing check box 26 If the network uses DHCP tap ok 27 If IP addresses are required tap the TCP IP and Servers tabs to enter the necessary settings Tap ok en LET ok AF a ME 4 44 ok Advanced Advanced Use server assigned addresses Use server assigned IP address O Use specific server address O Use specific IP address at aeons 5 Use software compression WINS m EC RA Use IP header compression Alt WINS kae rr vene ses ses ET 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tabu w e r t v uji jo D 1 Tabu w e r t v ujijo D LAP a sjd f g h T K T LAP a sjd f g h T k T Shift z x cj v b n m Z shift z x cj v b n m Cuj j i te gt Cuj i te gt EL Figure 8 36 Advanced Window TCP IP and Servers Tabs 28 Tap Finish 29 Tap the Connection icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen An X indicates that the terminal is not connected 30 The Connectivity dialog box appears with the dial up connection just created Verify the phone number then tap the phone number a Connecti i Figure 8 37 Connecting to a Bluetooth Phone 8 29 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Pr
100. 4 managing 22 4 mm 10 19 message list 10 16 synchronizing e mail 10 14 infrared IR infrared communication 4 35 KAG DON 13 12 infrared receive 4 35 infrastructure 5 7 5 12 6 7 6 16 Initial Program Loader 12 24 IUE TERDIOR uasa sdb bg pr red ded 3 11 input panel uudaiaa deseo dro ce bones 2 23 block recognizer 2 25 letter recognizer 2 26 GG a AA 2 26 installing development tools 11 6 internet wireless connection 4 29 Index 4 IP address 4 32 5 11 6 15 YA RE 12 10 12 24 error messages 12 18 K C10 5 8 5 10 6 8 6 11 key mode icon aaa 2 9 keyboard cuu va 55 R3 YAERYYPRERTES US 2 5 TOKEY PA AE 2 5 standard 6 key 2 5 keypad IX EB 546445468005 4400 ade 2 7 Ca c ANY PAPA 2 6 L LEAP auos RIWERESRU AS 5 10 6 9 6 11 letter recognizer 2 26 Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol 5 10 lithium ion battery 1 3 loading splash screen 12 21 locating WLANS 5 5 6 5 M magnetic stripe reader 1 27 main battery kaaa e400 RR 3 43 sili PAA 1 8 1 11 PAIR Lo eco nese eee EROR Rh 1 8 Aipha 13 3 Media Player 10 30 MOMON naka a dodo dox qoid Ro eee woes 3 40 PAGANO dde uA pleasent edes
101. 7 8 9 0 4 z 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T MP Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T taPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F saute tel aim td ETE ji eltel cut Ae OE Mew Edit View Tools t La CB Mew Edit View Tools t LE Ee Lowercase Alpha Key Uppercase Alpha Key Function Key Figure 2 4 Alpha Key Icon When a program such as Pocket Word is open the icon appears in the command bar You can move the icon anywhere on the screen by dragging it to a new location Double tap the icon to return it to it s default location in the command bar To hide the icon tap the icon and then tap Hide To un hide the icon tap Start Today Tap the icon and then tap Show 2 9 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide In either alpha mode when a key is pressed a list of characters assigned to that key appears in the command bar with the selected key highlighted Repeated pressing of the key highlights the next key in the display AG Pocket Word e aff 3 35 ok Today s meeting Pih i riew Tools a E Figure 2 5 Key Icon Selection 2 10 Operating the PPT 8800 Today Screen When you turn on your terminal for the first time each day or after 4 hours of inactivity the Today screen appears You can also display it by tapping Start Today On the Today screen you can see important information for the
102. 8 Start a cradle terminal emulation session a Connect the modular end of the cable p n 170013 000 and a null modem adapter between the expansion port of the cradle and a COM port on a host computer See Figure 4 13 on page 4 16 Start a terminal emulation session on the host computer Use standard terminal emulator software such as Pro Comm or Hyperterminal Use the following terminal emulation settings 115200 bps 8N1 XON XOFF flow control ASCII file transfer protocol Power on the cradle Before the power up LED sequence begins on the host computer press a from the terminal program to load the Cradle Utilities Communication configuration interface The Cradle Utilities Version screen appears on the host computer Cradle Utilities Version x xx Firmware Datecode xxxxxxxx 1 Public network settings 2 Advanced settings 3 PPP settings 4 Private network settings 5 Firmware Download Select a submenu OR Q Discard changes and restart F Save changes and restart 2 Press 1 to display the Public Network Settings menu Public Network Settings 1 Static Mode 0 2 NAPT Mode 1 The following settings are only used when Static mode is 1 3 Cradle IP Address 0 0 0 0 Router Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 1st DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 2nd DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 1st WINS IP Address 0 0 0 0 2nd WINS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 The following settings are only used when
103. 8 Connecting to Power Source The standard battery usually fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours and the optional larger capacity battery usually fully charges in approximately five hours a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Charging Spare Batteries A spare battery can be charged using the single slot cradle s Note You can also use a UBC adapter to charge spare batteries Refer to the UBC 2000 Universal Battery Charge Product Guide for more information Using the CRD amp 800 Single Slot Cradle The CRD8800 Single Slot Serial Cradle charges only the standard battery 1 Connect the cradle to a power source opare Battery AC Line Charging Slot Power Supply Figure 1 19 Connecting Power to the CRD8800 Cradle 2 Insert the battery into the spare battery charging slot on the back of the cradle Position it with the charging contacts facing down over charging pins and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact The spare battery charging LED turns red to indicate that the spare battery is charging The battery fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours See Charge LED Indicator on page 1 21 for spare battery charging indications Getting Started Using the CRD8800B Single Slot Cradle The CRD8800B Single Slot Serial Cradle charges either the standard and larger capacity battery in the spare battery well 1 Connect the cradle to a power source
104. A 3 40 LET p CPC E 3 41 giri FPO c REQETTICITOOTTTCO DOT TU T ETT TEILT 3 42 Po oe E E E EE A E EN dau POUR RAS AS EM Nd Ee ees cas TS 3 43 EUM AA AA AA AA AA SERA 3 43 a 6bbss oe se DAA kk base PAGAN PLUS LE KAG h PBA BEDA GLANG E EqESJ EP 34b 3 44 E rco Mr 3 45 Ca ete Ae LO sio id boca ges Rep RS d RR Rl den RD C Ec eee Roe rir Mrd oed 3 45 Regional Settings llle hrs 3 47 PAA PEDES aca oua FOE ORAE AERE E 3E 3309089992979 9 ee 3 50 hs ee ee PAA RE MIS eas oe ee oe AO 3 51 ee ee ET ao ote ws och AA AA 3 52 i0 CAP PP APA AA AA YA S 52 NG BB AAP LAER KA AABI GA AE Ek TT S TIT 3 53 PAP AA 3 54 Mio AA AAP AP PP 3 57 Change Speed Registry Settings 0 a 3 58 rb AAP AA PA AP AA AA 3 60 Wireless Adamier PG PA AA AA AA 3 61 3 2 Settings Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for customizing your terminal by adjusting settings Adjusting Settings To view available options for your terminal settings tap Start Settings You can adjust settings in either the Personal tab or the System tab Personal Tab E settings e 46357 XO d T Buttons Input Menus ow Qr Owner Password Sounds amp Information Notifications Personal System Connections Ss Figure 3 1 Settings Personal Tab Table 3 1 lists the applications available in the Personal tab Table 3 1 Personal Tab Applications Ce ae Assign programs to the application hardw
105. AG PK KR KB KG KABANG Baws 8 7 Bonding with Discovered Device s eee eee eens 8 7 Renaming a Bonded AN AA PAA 8 11 Deleting a Bonded Device a 8 12 riecenina incoming BEANS s 2 204 FG cech ERR ee 5 0645 504 ee 08 SSeS 6 ERS ORR EEO ees 8 14 Ph ie ce beaded can eted youd AA PAPA EE 8 15 si Pegi i ee TROIS TIL ee eee re er ee ee ee eee ae AA 8 17 Sending an Appointment or TaSk 1 ee eee eens 8 17 mo pa Se i ea 9r ops 55466498 AA Chad bees RO ARA 8 19 SSE hg ad oe 3 5 89 055 5 oa gee es 4 ees Ee oS Ped sk Se GSS oH ee ees eee es 8 21 Bluetooth Communications DALAG seas BALANG bus PORE EROR ar DIE ORAE HR 8 23 DAPIT TOT NODUDIK occ oe KG KG BAG eek eed SEE ESOS SHEE DE b Screed eee ee bowen 8 23 Dial Automatically from an Application 0 0c eee 8 31 BUIGIOON LAN PCG S aoe vider evsdctetehebbecevabisiabidacwebiswadiciedands 8 32 Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point 0 0 eee eee 8 32 Automatic Connection ccs xc csc eee peewee ne eee FOB oe ee sewed ewe es ewe ees 8 37 Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port dab weed eden LARAWANG LENA RE RR s 8 39 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide UU circ aa PP PP AA PEPE PAPET 8 41 8 2 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Introduction Bluetooth equipped devices can communicate without wires using frequency hopping spread spectrum FHSS RF to transmit and receive data in the 2 4 GHz Industry Scientific and Med
106. AKA AKA AA es ee ee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee ee se Nak AGA ANAN PIP WN PT CP Bajte Bono T C EINE a a a a a EEEE aua da dena ER RM Ee BIST RISE LL ob oee CER Each de drach AA NAA New Menu AA AA AA APA KU daa SRSA Au cdit t EECOTTOTETTTETILTTTO TT PO op oe oie 4 TOT oe ew ke kA NG KWAN ANA KAWAN AE NA ee KE Wak Pa ALAB AA a PAKA ee ee eee eee ee ea as OSS BEAN oe HANG career eee or NLANG RE RE AER RS ha dier bee a ddd ees PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide PO AKA NG MAM Od ex PR PS MERE MESE ER RS RE ERE NEG AA EE 3 26 UBI ouna AA AA ERN S PAQE ESAGHRERSSG RES ee 3 26 bl 3 27 LEONIS ge eee oes oe peewee ee eR Shere ae ab eee eo bese SERENA PETS SEE 3 28 PE ede BAKA AKA BANA eee ewe Gee eee dea pesi d eA d 84s 4b ees SERE 3 29 cour piat a ee ee ee ee re ee eee TOIT PP 3 29 Baa 622d noe denne bone 6 ae eet phate te teehee eee eee eee eee wees 3 31 LI NG oo oh eee tan ee Hoe ea AE TT TITO GAAN GE KEAN Chee baat PAKANA AA 3 32 Bo ee why ed be oh E EEE eed ee E EEE EE E E E 3 33 igi SEEE EE SEE CAP PAP AA AA E E 3 33 75 PE E E E BG E A E E E E E EE PP 3 34 LAB EINEN ASNE TETTA ESETRE EALES NEA OA HERES ELA rrr 3 35 LINE AOE RT Ere 3 35 l Aa EE EE EEE EEA EE AA PA ee ees 3 3 BLA AA AA AA AA AA AP 3 39 LEA AAP AA AA AA AA PA eee 3 40 ARA PA AA A
107. AORE EEE AAEE E ee ee eee ee E TTE EAE 3 11 Word Completo aa MAKAKA irii RE med de E ao OE we d EROR bones aa E d r j Cee ee ee Tee eee TIT TOTO TTE 3 13 To AA Sa e a ee oa cee Be oe ae ee QUITTER 3 14 New MOni uuu aci acd dcr EUER CREE AA HES e E bE ORS EE DOES DOS HSER AE NO Owner iama e cs oo a oe a a PERO ER OE oe oad be RE eee EHE RESP RO 94 3 16 PO apad adam bak ears vere ES ed CE o3 ek GN ER es PA gue ee 3 16 i5 0 a ee a ee ee ee ee ae ee ee eee ee Rs ee ee ee eee ee 3 17 MODI D nb ET cowed oe ce ee be ALDUB ee KAN BEE WA ae nee Oe wees eens 3 19 mco 1 ge ev be he be Bid ba APAT EES eee AA 3 19 Pi gece ees os ee eas ee ee ee AE 3 21 Sounds BO Oe oo sacs ade hor DOR ee EC Eh OE Sc d enn O22 BONG x ta owe PAGG Bae FS SW SETS PS 0 PSE HOMO dO OF STOO LE EC ORE WEE ENE KEAN 3 22 Notifications o oo eee cece cece cece bebe bbb bbb bbb 3 23 Pio ae ae ee ee ee PAPUA 3 24 aka ot OS KAKANAN GO KAKA eed eee eee eed ee ee ao eke oe oe a ERG ER ROSES eS Soh ee ae eee ew he eeu E 3 25 PE och ee oe os hey he wed A E ee ee dE E Ced ee qtu eu E dd RO awe 3 26 vii Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide pa e a ERO WEB DAKO GB KAPA DA LAB OR NONE ANNONE ENESES ATST bA KABAN ANG 3 26 Bito YBR AA PA AP AA eee ees 3 27 se APA PN 3 28 BUONA CA AA AA AA MAA HA AA PAA AETA 3 29 Tag PP PA TA 3 29 EO ee KAB ee eer Dt ttt OR IL LG NA KG eee ee ee 3 31 BE AA TTC TT TOTO UT QT TT TTE 3 32 ee
108. ARNING Avoid exposing this product to contact with hot oil or other flammable liquids If such exposure occurs unplug the unit and clean the product immediately in accordance with these guidelines 13 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting Your Terminal Problem cause Ses Terminal does not turn on Lithium ion battery not Charge or replace the lithium ion battery in charged the terminal Lithium ion battery not Ensure battery is installed properly See installed properly Installing the Battery on page 1 8 System crash Perform a soft reset If the terminal still does not turn on perform a hard reset See Resetting the Terminal on page 2 36 Rechargeable lithium ion Battery failed Replace battery If your terminal still does battery did not charge not operate try a soft reset then a hard reset See Resetting the Terminal on page 2 36 Terminal removed from Insert terminal in cradle and begin charging cradle while battery was The standard battery requires charging approximately 2 1 2 hours to recharge fully and the optional larger capacity battery charges in approximately five hours Cannot see characters on Terminal not powered Press the Power button display on Fail to communicate with Distance from printer is Bring the terminal closer to the printer and IrDA printer between 5 inches and 39
109. Device Manager window appears ES Device Manager Er ax 6 15 tok t COM Ports You can enable disable and check the assignments of the Bluetooth COM ports below Bluetooth Phone Bluetooth Printer Bluetooth LAP Bluetooth Desktop Bluetooth FAX Bluetooth COM Port COM Ports Object Sharing rs Figure 7 13 Device Manager COM Ports 2 Tap the COM Ports tab Note The Bluetooth COM port cannot be disabled To free COM ports disable IrDA COM ports see IrDA on page 3 39 3 As required enable or disable the Bluetooth COM port assignments 7 12 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 4 Tapok Object Sharing Use the Object Sharing tab to set the default directory for storing files to share with other devices and for setting a contact for exchanging business cards 1 Tap Bluetooth icon Advanced Features My Bluetooth Device Object Sharing tab m Contacts Assign the business card you want to send to others For exchanges My business card Files Assign the Folder to use when you allow others ko access your Files My shared Folder Bluetooth Shared Folder COM Porks Object Sharing Figure 7 14 Device Manager Object Sharing Tab 2 See Exchange Business Cards on page 7 46 for information on exchanging business cards 7 13 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 3 To assign a folder for access by other devices tap the Assign next to the My
110. EO PAA FG l8 TOM Eror AN a ee oe NAA dee IE Led ed ko PAR AKA woes 12 20 Creating and Loading a Splash Seresni iiu wak kape pba RC AKA hahaaha 12 21 O ied MM NM MM RM M MM CM ME 12 21 PPG naka AGA sb eede ab deh shades en as TITIUS Taedia e E E EEE EE E etek bade dedeers ered e eed eseeeeeediaeehewe s Working with FFS Partitions Eusha Lah LAAL KG kA aoe or ERE era Sd PES DUNG 12 22 pa NL a ca AA AA AA 12 23 xiii PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Wii 2l MARAPAT PENE APP AP 12 23 bola BU AA PAA 12 24 Assigning User Written Applications to Buttons a 12 25 sa PAPA 12 25 Adding a Fropram irom the Inter sealed ka roe Ra REDE KPA KG RR TERCER 12 26 Update the ROM Image Using IPL 1 22422en 4h ok hee BAK KG KG ER RETE RERSERE EE 12 27 Chapter 13 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Jp ict ors DNE TRES ae bode ETE SEET E AG RAGE ALAALA KAB eee en eAR aeRO 13 3 nay Maintaining lhe PPT 8800 uisoaEeascEPR USWe TRA d TE e ER WG eres ER RAD AKNG 13 3 Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines 0a 13 4 Required Materials AAAH ee E 9e C3 WR 13 4 Cleaning the Terminal Connector 0 00 ee eee ne 13 4 Cleaning the Cradle Connector Ls iw esc cae REGE EORR RE IRE ESTER ERSCRRERES 13 7 Ric casti APA APP PT PA PA 13 10 Appendix A Block Recognizer Characters Wt hg oe ee oe ee oe WG DNA LENG DA EE kama hha a GA GAN Ah ee elec A 1 Appendix B Demo Program kisa
111. En the list tap on Contacts E Figure 7 66 My Business Card Window d Select your business card and tap ok e If your business card is not listed tap on Contacts to create one When you return to the Object Sharing screen tap ok Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a contact The device must support the OBEX Object Push profile Tap the Bluetooth icon Transfer via Bluetooth Exchange Business Cards 7 47 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 5 If your terminal does not have a device in the Bluetooth Devices Folder it begins to search for Bluetooth devices nearby 6 Select the Bluetooth device you wish to exchange business cards with If the device is not listed tap Find Ei Socket OBEX Device Mame Choose the desired device and tap Select IF the desired device is not shown tap Find to search For one that may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Figure 7 67 Socket OBEX Window 7 The terminal begins to exchange business cards Exchange Cards E3 Exchanging Business cards Cancel Figure 7 68 Exchanging Business Cards 8 After the exchange the new business card appears in your Contacts list 7 48 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Send a Contact 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a contact 2 Tap Start Contacts The Contacts window appears 3 Tap and hold the contact s you want
112. Error Source If the directory paths specified by the Source and Destination cells do Destination Path not exist the cell containing the non existent path turns red to highlight Verification the error For more information on FFS Partitions and Non FFS Partitions see Flash Storage on page 12 22 12 20 Configuring the Terminal Creating and Loading a Splash Screen To generate a custom splash screen use a bitmap editor 1 Create a color bitmap with dimensions of BX x BY where e BX is less than or equal to 240 pixels e BY is less than or equal to 320 pixels Note For best quality use a relatively high resolution color image 256 color Lower resolution images also work Save the file as a 256 color bitmap Use TCM to convert the bitmap image file to a Hex file see Building the Image on page 12 7 Loading the Splash Screen via TCM To load the bitmap lig e Click TCM exe in the TCM directory Connect the terminal to the host computer and invoke IPL to prepare the terminal to receive the splash screen download In TCM select File Load Terminal oelect your splash screen Hex file to begin downloading to the terminal Close TCM 12 21 C PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Flash Storage Programs pre installed on your terminal are stored in read only memory ROM You cannot remove modify or accidentally lose this software You may add programs and dat
113. Figure 8 32 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 16 Tap Finish 17 Enter the dial up number exactly how it should be dialed Include the country and area code as required ISP via Bluetooth Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line ar credit card IF you travel ar change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj jV eltel Ea Figure 8 33 Enter Dial Up Number Window 8 27 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 18 Tap Next User name Password Gkck Ro SE SE SE SE SE E ER E B A Domain domain name If provided by ISP or network administrator Advanced Cancel 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w ejr t vju i o D I T LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj yp te Ea Figure 8 34 My Connection Window 19 In the User name text box enter the user name for this connection 20 In the Password text box enter the password for this connection 21 In the Domain text box enter the domain for this connection if required 22 Tap Advanced The Advanced window appears Wait For credit card n SEC Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if not connected in sec General Port Settings TCP IP servers Figure 8
114. If the desired device is not listed tap Find 7 50 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 5 The Open window appears HF socket OBEX et dx 6 35 Folder All Folders hd Type All Files Name Fader los 4 7 2 8 36 w abboot AirBEAM AirBEAM AirBEAM Bir BEAM airtbeam airtbeam AirBEAM airtbeam Figure 7 73 Open Window 6 In the Folder drop down list select the folder where the file resides 7 Inthe file list tap the file to send 8 The terminal sends the file to the other Bluetooth device Send a File Sending File Cancel Figure 7 74 Sending a File Browse Remote Device The Bluetooth File Explorer enables the terminal to share files with another Bluetooth device The other device must support the OBEX File Transfer server profile This section covers the following file transfer operations e Prepare for file transfer e Send receive file s or folder s e Create a folder e Delete file s or folder s 7 51 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs e Refresh remote view e Connect disconnect e Exit the program Note Local device refers to the terminal you are running the Socket OBEX from Remote device refers to the Bluetooth device you are trying to transfer files with Prepare for File Transfer 1 Ensure the remote device has file sharing enabled It must support the OBEX File Transfer server profile 2 Tap the Bluetooth i
115. N Tl O D 7 A PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality Continued Alpha Default Alpha CAPS Key State State State ASCII VK Code Value Decimal Decimal Lighten screen ESCAPE 27 Tl CO Tl Co F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are generated when no function is defined on each key at Control Panel D 8 Keypad Maps Table D 2 15 Key Keypad Functionality Continued Alpha ASCII Default Alpha CAPS VK Code Value State State State Decimal Decimal NEN SPACE BK SPC BK SPC Lj gt F6 F7 F8 F9 and F10 VK codes are generated when no function is defined on each key at Control Panel ENTER ENTER TI C O z D 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide D 10 Appendix E Bluetooth Regulatory Information FHSS Descriptions 1 Output Power and Channel Separation of a Bluetooth Device in the Different Operating Modes The different operating modes data mode acquisition mode of a Bluetooth device don t influence the output power and the channel spacing There is only one transmitter which is driven by identical input parameters concerning these two parameters Only a different hopping sequence will be used For this reason the RF parameters in one op mode are sufficient 2 Frequency Range of a Bluetooth Dev
116. OOK Lii eaae an xor Oak on ee Yo e dd S odora do beeen den keeeetane TOG Pocket Internet Explorer 0 0 0 0 cc eee nsns 10 34 Kada ARA APA PE EE Ze PAP Be Pee LUE cae chas ee ae ban dein dakebt EP PAA DE Creating Mobile Favorites 00 00 waaa aaa aaa nnns 10 34 Saving Memory on your Terminal ee en 10 35 o PA GC AA AA 10 35 Using Pocket Internet Explorer 10 36 PONG NG WOD 64sec medo eedond edu S HK KALOG ERAP ER arean eaea RM END da AAP dee abd ee CER PPO Ge Copy Pictures to your Device e eee ee eeeee 10 39 ENT PRU Lui audire RP ad ed DAA E dior Went aber pees eck 10 99 Send Pictures ET AA AA AA AA 10 39 Set Picture as PANUOD paka dod rk KG ds cake ERO HARANGAN KA en s 10 39 Ei ag APA AA AA PAA APA ti View Slideshow of Pictures 10 40 Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC CON APA ER PP CAPT PO Installing Other Development Software 2 22 11 6 Chapter 12 Configuring the Terminal EBEN co ea eek he oe ete AAP O AA Tele Starting Terminal Configu ration Manager 12 3 Denning Seriot FPIODOTIBE ug acaoc E ROC 9 RO AC OR e KAKA KPA KR PAA pie Tana Creating a Hex Image Script 0 0 aasa 12 7 Open a New or Existing Script File essere 12 7 Copy Components to the Script Window 2 aaa 12 7 Ria lag aas ee eed 3 AA WA PE PAGAR X 4X4 PAA REM Building the Image 12 7 la na MU ALA Ta Enor RENE AA APP ee be hee M B IPL Error Eee OU CA AA eoees TRY YR E
117. PDA and Bluetooth enabled phone for wireless connections Tap Next ko continue or kap Back to exit Figure 7 3 Get Connected Wizard Window 7 5 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 Tap Next gt Er af 2 55 4 Select your phone Use the list below to select the model of your Bluetooth phone IF you don t see your phone try using the selection nat in this list My Bluetooth phone is nat in this list gt Figure 7 4 Select Your Phone Window 3 Inthe My Bluetooth phone is drop down list select a Bluetooth phone The wizard provides tailored instructions based on the selection Tap Next gt 4 The next window s vary and provide instructions for preparing the phone for Bluetooth connections Some or all of the following may need to be performed Naming the Bluetooth phone e Setting the Bluetooth phone in discoverable mode Preparing a Bluetooth passkey N a n id 1 IT or in Start e e m2 10 26 3 Start e e m2 10 26 Prepare the phone part Prepare the phone part zi 1 J 2 Take this opportunity to give your Nokia a Now vou must set up your Nokia phone phone a name to be Discaverable Your phone cames with a Factory preset Starting From the phone s top menu name like Nokia 6310 On the phone select the Bluetooth menu You will see edit the name by going to the menu a Bluetooth item that should say ON then touch the down arrow ko sel
118. PPT 8800 explains how to use your terminal including instructions for powering on and resetting the terminal using the stylus and a headset entering information and scanning Chapter 3 Settings explains how to adjust settings on the terminal and add and delete programs Chapter 4 Communication explains how to use Microsoft ActiveSync for communication between the terminal and host computer Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection using Mobile Companion version 3 9 1 Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection using Mobile Companion version 3 9 2 Chapter 7 PPT 8860 Bluetooth describes how to use and configure the Bluetooth wireless connection on the PPT 8860 Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth describes how to use and configure the Bluetooth wireless connection on the PPT 8866 Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart explains how to set up your terminal to synchronize with a server using the AirBEAM Client and AirBEAM Staging applications Chapter 10 Applications describes how to use the applications installed on the terminal Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC provides instructions for installing the Software Developer s Kit on your host computer Chapter 12 Configuring the Terminal describes how to install and use the Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and Initial Program Loader
119. PT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 5 Read the instructions and perform the task on the phone Tap Next gt The terminal searches for a Bluetooth phone When the search is complete a list of discovered Bluetooth phones appears Device Name g Nokia7650 pa Choose the desired phone and tap Select To perform the search again tap Refresh Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Figure 7 11 Get Connected Select Device Window 6 Select the phone to connect to and tap Select A service discovery phase begins which lasts for about 5 to 10 seconds 7 The next two screens describe procedures you can only complete after the wizard is completed Read through each screen but do not complete the described procedures until you exit the wizard 8 Continue to the last screen of the wizard and tap Finish See Bonding with Discovered Device s on page 7 18 to complete the bonding process and if desired set up automatic connections 7 10 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Bluetooth Configuration The terminal uses a Bluetooth radio to communicate with other Bluetooth enabled devices and must be set up properly to do so This section provides instructions for setting up the terminal to enable find and communicate with other devices Configuring the Terminal To configure the PPT 8860 1 3 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features My Bluetooth Device The Device Manager window appears ES Device Manager
120. Pictures to your Device You can copy jpg pictures from your PC and view them in Pictures Copy the picture files from your PC to the My Pictures folder within the My Documents folder on your terminal For more information on copying files from your PC to your terminal see ActiveSync Help on your PC Edit Pictures You can rotate crop zoom and adjust the brightness and color contrast of your jpg pictures 1 Tap d to rotate a picture 90 degrees counter clockwise 2 Tap F to crop a picture by dragging and selecting the crop area Tap outside of the box to stop cropping 3 Tap IP to display the Zoom panel from which you can zoom in or out of a picture or return a picture to full screen size 4 Tap Edit Brightness and Contrastto adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a picture Send Pictures You can send a jpg picture to others as an e mail attachment The picture is resized to approximately 30 KB making it easier to send over wireless connections 1 In Pictures tap the picture you want to send as an e mail attachment 2 Tap Tools Send via E mailto create an e mail message with the picture attached Set Picture as Background You can use one of your own jpg pictures as the background on the Today screen and specify how you want it displayed on the screen such as adjusting the transparency level 1 In Pictures tap the picture you want to set as the background 2 Tap Tools Set as Today Wallpaper
121. Point 0 0 0 ccc eee 7 41 Connecting to a Discovered Access Point 0 0000 cece eee eee 7 42 Connecting to an Undiscovered Access Point 0 000 cc eee eee eee 7 43 AG CODO on E E ree seers bebe bbs obese ees sees ex 7 44 van Plc 6 2644644 PK AA NG KA obo ebd dota dosed ane bbb cebensneseceadedsas 7 46 EO Busness a a uas ados dw eee es oe KGAD ORE CR E Cada eee eee es 7 46 Senda LODS aue S04 PAR PP PA aee a bol Rb EO n 7 49 a a ARA AA been ees 7 50 Browse Remote DeMOR a AG CR KAKA BG AB eS eee dhe ede dense AGA 7 51 Prepare TOF File ANSE a KG KAG nasce awsee9 mr ek 4b 56545586454 REN DRAKE US ecd 7 52 Send or Receive a File or Folder cc ee eee ene 7 53 LI BA Ot tO TOTO eee eee ee ee ee kA AG 7 54 ei a Fio Or FOEI ao 6 h AA AA AA 7 55 Refresh Remote VieW 00 ccc a 7 57 Connecting or Disconnecting to a Remote Device 7 57 Contents Exit Bluetooth File Explorer 0 0 ccc eee eee eee ee 59 Receive Contact or File en ee eee ee ee T PAT cxa 7 59 Enable File Sharing E Eee PIED ar ER TRRCTEERTUMF RR PAGGANA i Ha lt uaaccve cancesoiavacnceeac rcp 8 3 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On and Off 0 ccc eee 8 3 Bluetooth Power States 0 00 cece ccc cece 84 EO NOD TERETERE E EEE E E EE EAE ENTE AA Warm BOOU a ee ee ee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee knk sn eee er aeaea PB ce
122. Realm values The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the APs and users it supports The KDC also permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified The KDC field should remain with the default KDC name krbtgt unless it is changed in the server Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the Realm field LEAP Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol is an 802 1X authentication type for wireless LANs that supports strong mutual authentication between the client and a RADIUS server It provides dynamic per user per session Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP key enhancements to mitigate a variety of network attacks Select LEAP When you attempt to connect to the server the Network Log On screen displays Enter your user name password and if necessary the domain name Consult your system administrator for this information 1 Select the IP Config tab to configure the following terminal profile network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS Changes made within the P Config tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles Figure 5 5 5 10 Mobile Companion Mode Encryption IP Config Power IP Type kx Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
123. Reference Guide 3 Tap AvantGo Channels 4 Tap Activate 5 Follow the directions on the screen You must synchronize your terminal with your host computer then tap My Channels to complete setup When synchronization is complete tap AvantGo Channels in your list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels To add or remove channels tap Add or Remove Using Pocket Internet Explorer With Pocket Internet Explorer you can browse mobile favorites and channels downloaded to your terminal without connecting to the Internet You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web ES Internet Explorer 4 m2 9 35 IX file windows default htm Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer Welcome ta Packet Internet Explorer Not online yet Find aut how to get connected and save offline content zan bol Avant Go PocketPC com View Tools 4 se E Favorites Button Home Button Refresh Button Back Button Figure 10 24 Pocket Internet Explorer 10 36 Applications To view mobile favorites and channels tap Favorites icon to display your list of favorites then tap the page you want to view ES Internet Explorer e f 2 43 oki lt Mobile Favorites AS AvantGo Channels fl MSN Mobile Tap the favorite you lie Pocket PC Web Guide want to view 9 Pocket PC com wh windowsMedia com Tap to add or delete a Open Add Delete folder or favorite
124. Script Window 220 00 ee ees O OT ens oe ooo 2329 TP IKA T beh KAM GA TEEN FOE oer Padre S NN a Ne BRL RAP AA PA Sending the Hex File 2 ee eee eee eee eens EO NG eid 2 ecw beeen de eee bee TOTO TIT D TIL KAME KK AG Bede ee IPL Error SGC cia whe oa hes kde eke de RE Ae ENR e e LR oo does He eee he hee Eno MESSAGG re ae er ee he a ee AA AA Creating and Loading a Splash Screen eee eee Loading the Splash Screen via TCM 0 0 ccc eee eee Pie Ge AA rs dael eds oes AA BE I e ge ce cone BAKA KA deo hee ees bourse ces GRABA KAG oO ee ee es WOR rs Pe gt Lie d AA AA AA ms jos HAGGANG BIN NAG E ee ede ore bee ee bb 4 an AA AA esena ig 1051 AA AA AA Assigning User Written Applications to Buttons ee ees Adding On oh ake we Hoe OE a Oke OS Reed ee 24508 b REESE a Adding a Program from ING Interno eos ce kA KABAGAL GG sede REA ENE v Ee vu dnd Update the ROM Image Using IPL uad doves Rd aco PhP RG UR RC RR RR x 12 1 C PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Introduction Terminal Configuration Manager TCM is an application that allows developers to customize flash file system partitions for the terminal The most common use is to create an Application partition hex file that contains the customer s application TCM can also be used to load hex files to the flash memory of the terminal The program resident on the terminal that receives the hex fil
125. Send to whole team using new format View notes Edit Tools Tap to change task Figure 10 9 Task Summary Screen 10 11 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Notes Capture thoughts reminders ideas drawings and phone numbers with Notes You can create a written note or a recording You can also include a recording in a note If a note is open when you create the recording it is included in the note as an icon If the note list is displayed it is created as a stand alone recording Tap to change the sort order of the list Ll Dutlook Nobes1 m z Tap to open a note or Create Copy play a recording Delete Select All Send via E mail Tap and hold to display a Beam File pop up menu of actions Rename Mote Tap to record e AN I i m U NG h at lada eie Recording toolbar Tap to create a new contact Figure 10 10 Notes Application 10 12 Applications To create a note 1 Tap Start Notes to open the application 2 Tap New 3 Create your note by writing drawing typing and recording For more information about using the input panel writing and drawing on the screen and creating recordings see Chapter 2 Operating the PPT 8800 Tap to return to the task list the task is saved automatically Team meeting notes Adam will send current status to core team Julie will get the revenue numbers Tanner is back from t
126. Shared Folder field The Add Delete Folders window appears GG Bluetooth Shared Folder CG BluetoothOnly CG Business cy Microsoft Remate Display Control E Personal GG PrinterDrivers e SymbolSettings cy Templates Figure 7 15 Add Delete Folders Window 4 Select a folder or tap New to create a new folder 5 Tapok 6 Tapok 7 14 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Discovering Bluetooth Device s Use the Bluetooth Device Discovery wizard to discover other Bluetooth devices nearby The Bluetooth Device Discovery wizard is a more detailed alternative to using the Bluetooth Get Connected Wizard Bluetooth ActiveSync or Bluetooth LAN Access options 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Devices window appears ES Bluetooth Devices 4 m2 4 40 e ES X Ho Figure 7 16 Bluetooth Devices Window 2 Select Tools Device Discovery The Discovery window appears ES Bluetooth Devices 4r 4 41 e Bluetooth Device socket Discovery Welcome to the Bluetooth Device Discovery Wizard This Wizard Finds nearby Bluetooth devices and guides you through adding them to the Bluetooth Devices Folder To continue make sure the new devices you want ko Find are in Discoverable mode Figure 7 17 Bluetooth Device Discovery Window 7 15 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 3 Tap Next gt 4 Select the device type to search for ES Bluetooth Devic
127. T 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide labeled abc create lowercase letters Use the right area labeled 123 for writing numbers symbols special characters and punctuation The block recognizer supports the graffiti method of entering text New Edit Tools d Figure A 1 Using Block Recognizer A 2 Block Recognizer Characters The following chart illustrates some of the characters you can write the dot on each character is the starting point for writing Letter Area Humb er Punctuation Area a ca ue ES 3 00 73 M 9 OIC un se yg d e a HH BONE E a c Figure A 2 Character Chart For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer with Block Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area A 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide A 4 Appendix B Demo Program Introduction The demo program illustrates how to use some of the terminal s many applications If the demo program is not already on the terminal it can be downloaded from the Symbol Device Configuration Package for PPT 8800 See Chapter 12 Configuring the Terminal for instructions on adding programs to your terminal The demo program could be loaded in the terminal s Application directory in a compressed cab file To install the demo program from the cab file of ae BO ce Tap Start Programs File Expl
128. Tools E Figure 7 33 Details View Note n Details view scroll right to see the current Bonded status 7 25 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Deleting a Device If you no longer plan to connect with a device delete it from the Bluetooth Devices window 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices 2 Tap and hold the device to delete In the pop up menu select Delete Bond Properties Delete My Bluetooth Device eal Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 34 Delete Device 3 Alternatively after selecting a device tap the Delete icon or tap Device Delete 4 A confirmation dialog appears Tap Yes ES Bluetooth Devices 4 m2 5 19 Bluetooth Devices Confirm deletion of the device Device 2 EBPOX oe Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 35 Delete Device Confirmation Dialog Box 7 26 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Bluetooth Communications Dial up to Your Network Complete the following steps to create a new Bluetooth connection Before setting up dial up networking obtain dial up information and other necessary settings for your office network or ISP 1 Tap Start Settings Connections Connections icon The Connections window appears NT Ta 2 fie Settings Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a
129. a files to random access memory RAM In addition to the RAM based storage standard on Windows CE terminals the terminal is also equipped with a non volatile Flash based storage area which can store data partitions that can not be corrupted by a hard reset This Flash area is divided into two categories Flash File System FFS Partitions and Non FFS Partitions FFS Partitions The terminal includes two FFS partitions These partitions appear to the terminal as a hard drive that the OS file system can write files to and read files from Data is retained even if power is removed The two FFS partitions appear as two separate folders in the Windows CE file system and are as follows Platform The Platform FFS partition contains Symbol supplied programs and Dynamic Link Libraries DLLs This FFS is configured to include DLLs that control system operation Since these drivers are required for basic terminal operation only experienced users should modify the content of this partition e Application The Application FFS partition is used to store application programs needed to operate the terminal Working with FFS Partitions Because the FFS partitions appear as folders under the Windows CE file system they can be written to and read like any other folder For example an application program can write data to a file located in the Application folder just as it would to the Windows folder However the file in the Application folder is i
130. a 30s period For multi slot packet the hopping is reduced according to the length of the packet Example for a DH5 packet with a maximum length of five time slots Dwell time 5 625 ms 1600 1 5 1 s 79 30s 0 3797s in a 30s period This is according the Bluetooth Core Specification V 1 1 for all Bluetooth devices Therefore all Bluetooth devices comply with the FCC dwell time requirement in the data mode This was checked during the Bluetooth Qualification tests The Dwell time in hybrid mode is approximately 2 6ms in a 12 8s period 8 Channel Separation in Hybrid Mode The nominal channel spacing of the Bluetooth system is 1 MHz independent of the operating mode The maximum initial carrier frequency tolerance which is allowed for Bluetooth is fcenter 75 kHz This was checked during the Bluetooth Qualification tests Test Case TRM CA 07 E for three frequencies 2402MHz 2441MHz 2480 MHz 9 Derivation and Examples for a Hopping Sequence in Hybrid Mode For the generation of the inquiry and page hop sequences the same procedures as described for the data mode are used see section 5 but this time with different input vectors E 3 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide e For the inquiry hop sequence a predefined fixed address is always used This result in the same 32 frequencies used by all devices doing an inquiry but every time with a different start freq
131. ac i Hoe nee bese ee ee eo ee ERE MUR RE wen di EFE M eT 3 33 an AA PA AA E E ES 3 33 noo AA AA PAPA AA ee eee 3 34 LU rnPEYIA 3 35 D PA O SA O AA ONES EA 3 35 AA TEN 3 3 Lk cic ee ees 6 ee T oe ee A a ee E ee ee eee eee 3 39 TLE ee eee ns oo BORA HANGGAN TAG eS ee See Se ee oe eos E bee eee TS 3 40 BY ch peek ee ace ee oe AA ek oe ee eee eee wid 3 40 aa nia AA PA AA AA 3 41 KEN e EE oh A KA a dudo o6 AA KAKA 9 ace he DAGANG KENA ee eee 3 42 PO STENENE EUERE EAEN ee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee NEA SE TER 3 43 eb okie peng ees seh e eee bbe bord oes bo es bbe 4s ae ee See eee RC E 3 43 ERE LL oe og be ee AA AA PE eres er RENRERRREIPEPS RE SE 3 44 sl r 3 45 Optimizing Battery Life 2 I I Ir 3 45 misitque CENTER ET ELTE TT SITO 0 TTL LT TITIO 3 47 Remove ProgramS or rrrrcrrrrrrrPPPETPEP 3 50 es oe cee ET E E A A E E E A EE EE 3 51 EE AALAGA BALA NA ooo eee Aa aed ced debe qp AAAH NA 3 52 i oll AA PAA PAA 3 52 DL 66a E EErEE SOEs EE 3 53 e U EUNTES OREERT EE NEETER EEEE ee TOI ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 3 54 kies AA AAP PA Ree eee eee aad oars 3 57 Change Speed Registry Settings 0 a 3 58 Tac AA ALPE PERIERE PER A O54 oe eb EE ES IS 3 60 Wireless Adapter Control llli n 3 61 Chapter 4 Communication NA is oo ke ee E TIT TIT ee ee on Tr 4 3 Installing Communication Software 0 cc eee eee ene 4 3 N
132. acklighton page 3 29 for more information Backlight Provides Bluetooth software information See Bluetooth Versions on page 3 32 Available only on PPT 8866 configurations Bluetooth ersions View and modify digital certificates which are used by some applications for establishing trust for secure communications See Certificates on page 3 33 for more information Certificates 3 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 3 2 System Tab Applications Continued O a Regional Settings Remove Programs Screen Symbol Settings 3 6 Change date time and time zone information See Clock on page 3 35 for more information Turns the IrDA port on or off to allow the Bluetooth radio access to two more COM ports PPT 8860 only See rDA on page 3 39 for more information Adjust the allocation of storage and program memory See Memory on page 3 40 for more information View battery status and change power management options See Power on page 3 43 for more information Change how numbers currencies dates and times are displayed See Regional Settings on page 3 47 for more information Remove loaded programs from RAM See Remove Programs on page 3 50 for more information Align the touch screen and enable ClearType fonts See Screen on page 3 51 for more information Change settings unique to the terminal See Symbol Settings on page 3 52 for mo
133. adle 4 21 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Plug one end of the inter cradle cable into the Expansion Connector modular jack labeled EXP on the back of the first cradle Serial Cradle Ethernet Cradle Inter Cradle Cable 1 Plug the other end of the inter cradle cable into the modular jack labeled Host on the back of the second serial cradle 2 Repeat these steps for any additional 4 slot serial cradles you want to connect Note This only works with the CRD amp 800 4000S 4 Slot Serial cradle It does not work with the single slot cradle Configuration of the Host Computer The host computer that you intend to synchronize with the terminal must be setup with the appropriate communication software and connection settings This guide assumes that you are using Microsoft ActiveSync software on both the terminal and the host computer To configure the host computer 1 Download and install ActiveSync See nstalling ActiveSync on page 4 3 2 Configure the connection settings The host computer must be configured for TCP IP network communications a Click on the ActiveSync icon from the system tray b Tap File Connection settings c Inthe Connection settings dialog box select the Allow Network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer option You may have other options selected for example Allow serial cable or i
134. alibrating the screen 1 21 GE AUC ece APA AA B 16 changing processor speed 3 57 changing profiles S20 6 25 changing the date 3 35 changing the time 3 35 TINGS ao ee TEE 10 35 Charge LED Indicator 1 21 CHOI PAA 1 12 1 15 spare battery 1 20 using four slot cradle 1 15 using MSR PAA 1 30 using single slot cradle 1 12 using UBC 2000 1 20 using universal cable cup 1 16 charging batteries 1 11 charging spare batteries 1 18 NN M M ETRRNTETLI TOTO A 3 cleaning cradle connector 13 7 terminal connector 13 4 cleaning terminal 13 3 clear type fonts 3 51 alain AP ES 8 4 command bar 2 12 jp Re AASA 2 13 2 14 command bar icons 2 14 communicating with printers communicating with vending machines 4 28 communication hu AA AA APA 4 35 single slot cradle 4 9 using the universal cable cup 4 26 communication LED Indicator 4 25 communication LED indicator 4 25 communication setup s asss ass 4 9 companion programs infrared receive 4 35 Media Player 10 30 Microsoft Reader 10 30 MSN Messenger
135. alling standard 1 8 battery and backup battery status 3 43 Deam dala anseaeenusasAzduacsad ds 13 12 beaming information via bluetooth 8 17 block recognizer coceasaccckeaebude umen 2 25 Bluetooth receiving a contact P998 receiving afile 7 59 Buone AA PAP PAA 3 44 beaming information 8 17 DATI 212 ise do ar Ene Ear ara 8 7 deleting bonded device 8 12 discoverable mode 8 6 8 15 discovering devices 8 7 CON 6 ac ose REO RETE REESE 2 14 receiving beams 8 14 renaming bonded device 8 11 lgi PAA 8 5 PIPI aspe AMA KAANAK d 8 6 Bluetooth resume 7 4 bonding bluetooth 8 7 boot ED AA ANA AA 8 4 OO ao area eae de sere ead 8 4 DUO ose ence eens did ex dan 3 60 button settings 3 8 buttons Index 2 assigning applications 12 25 Ka AA 2 5 Ane PAP PAA AA E C cable viro AA oe a a ee C 4 CADIE cect WE GREG NG AR KNA KA Y NA 1 16 universal cable cup 4 26 4 AA 1 6 serial charging cable 1 6 snap on autocharger 1 6 snap on DEX cable 2 cores 1 6 snap on printer cable 1 6 calendar application 10 3 creating appointments 10 4 meeting requests 10 5 summary screen 10 5 calibrating screen B 9 c
136. alues of various reader parameters Tap nterface Parameters to view and modify the values of the following interface parameters Interface Type Enable Settle Time Inverse Label White Level Clock Resolution Power Settle Time Tap Scan Parameters to view and modify the values of various scanner parameters Tap Device Info to see the values of the following parameters Beam Width Aim Mode Scan Direction Feedback Demo Program e Supported Fmts e Max Image Rect e Tap Scanner Version to view the version numbers for the hardware decoder PPD MDD and API Refer to the Help file on the SDK for details on the available parameter options 24 Settings Select S24 Settings on the Control Panel to specify S24 related parameters ES CHPanel Example 4r m2 3 28 e 524 Settings 524 System Signal Ping Test 524 Network WEP Config ff pag cel Figure B 16 S24 Settings Screen e Tap View Config to view the current S24 settings e Tap S24 System to view and modify the system parameters e Tap Signal to view the signal strength in your current location e Tap Ping Test to view and modify settings for a ping test and perform a ping test e Tap S24 Network to view and modify the network parameters e Tap S24 WEP Config to view and modify the WEP configuration B 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Scan Wedge Scan Wedge allows bar code integ
137. an KANYAN Tr v H 4 3 ect Up a Paare Mu ee KG IK DOR E KAB eR a R4 RARE ee D 4 4 DES QUUD 2342224415 2 1 44325 34 22 3 45 23 4991 4389035 doo diit ha actui bed dra 4 8 BG gc bc uer cT E 4 9 Using Me Seral Charging CADIE acuerdo c3 irre e EF EPEE YA ririn PETERE egg 4 9 viii Contents Using the Single Slot Serial Cradles 0 0 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee es 411 Using a Four oit Ethernet Cradle KGG KG ee 4 14 DHT ROUE so ng arreter E Edd wd d dcs eee ae He ews a eet OO EA e e o oe e558 GNG BAT Pewee ee ECIEYRERESUERIAMS0 12399 23 99 994 4 15 Connecting the Cradle to a Network 445 Configuring the Cradle for DHCP Address Mode 416 Configuring the Cradle for Static Mode 4 18 Network Address Translation NAPT nnana 00000 e eee aes 4 20 KIEL ONION COGS onc cde e bod LAMA arae eres GR Va WEE es GA 4 21 Configuration of the Host Computer a 4 22 Configuration of the Terminal llle III 4 23 Communication AA PAPA PA PAA ar 4 24 Communication LED Indicator 200 24 25 Using the Universal Cable Cup 0 nananana RIRs 4 286 Serial Communication aac hex p ROO KG KG PAGPA CAE EORR RON PAKSA PA LAGE Rn 4 28 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network boasts eee wee ere eee beens 4 29 Da KG agg ec ae eee re ere cde a RADO Send Wal AA AA eoe dob qoae es Receive IMONNGUON lt 244440 6acecb dere ede ek O05 086 iri
138. an download book files from the Web Just visit your favorite eBook retailer and follow the instructions to download the book files Use ActiveSync to download the files from your host computer to your terminal as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder Using the Library The Library is your Reader home page it displays a list of all books stored on your terminal To open the Library 1 Onthe Reader command bar tap Library 2 Onabook page tap the book title and then tap Library on the pop up menu 3 To open a book tap its title in the Library list box Tap to scroll through Library the Library list Tap to select a sort order Sort The Best American Short Stories show The Ghost Writer Tap to specify the ssa The Hundred Secret Senses Tap to open a book books you want to Outlander display in the list Suger Plum Dead Another World Winter of the Wolf Moon E The Last Precinct Shop Pe viru Tap here to navigate to prom On Writing other parts ofthe Reader pman LN Passage to Juneau Help Of Love and Other Demons Return Stranger in a 5trange Land 10 31 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Reading a Book Each book consists of a cover page an optional table of contents and the pages of the book Navigation options are listed in the bottom portion of the cover page The first time you open a book you ll probably want to go to the first page or to
139. and fonts Printer Name Unknown Page Size Width Unknown pixels Height Unknown pixels Selected Fonts Text Unknown Address Unknown Title Unknown Figure B 20 Win32PrintSamp Window B 15 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Tap Settings Printer to select a print Select a printer name and then tap the OK button Tap Settings Font to select a font Tap File Print to print a sample to the printer About Select the About icon on the PPT 8800 Demo window to view information about the demo program NN dm Os 9 PPT8800Demo o 515 GD Otl Example Otl version 4 1 7 1 Copyright ie 1999 7003 Symbol Technologies Exit select the Exit button to exit the demo program B 16 Appendix C Technical Specifications Environment The following table summarizes the terminal s intended operating environment Table C 1 Technical Specifications Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Battery Charging Temperature Humidity Electrostatic Discharge ESD Drop to Concrete Weight including battery 14 to 122 F 10 to 450 C 13 to 158 F 25 to 70 C 0 C to 40 C 4 32 F to 4104 F Note To charge the battery for the mobile device battery and charger temperature must be between 32 F and 4104 F 0 C and 40 C 5 to 90 non condensing 15 kVDC air 8 kVDC contact 4 feet 1 2 met
140. and from a remote destination 5 11 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet email delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located and or email delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations 2 Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving Modes for the terminal profile Mobile Companion Mobile Companion Mode Encryption IP Config Power Made Encryption IP Config Power Radio Transmission Power Radio Transmission Power Infrastructure adoc N Automatic Power Saving Mode Automatic Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Excellent Network Performance Excellent Network Performance Uses less battery power Uses less battery power Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 5 7 Mobile Companion Power Tab Adjusting the Radio Transmission Power level enables you to expand or confine the transmission area with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby Reducing a coverage area in high
141. ap to return to the calendar the appointment is saved automatically Tap to choose from predefined text Subject Tap to choose from o Cl previously entered locations Starts 8 26 02 12 00 PM Ends 8 26 02 1 00 PM Tap to select a time Type Norma Tap to select a date Occurs Once Reminder Remind me 15 minuters Categories Ma categories Notes is a good place for maps and directions Appointment Figure 10 2 Entering an Appointment Using the input panel enter the subject and a location Tap first to select the field If needed tap the date and time to change them Enter other desired information Hide the input panel to see all available fields To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes on page 10 12 8 When finished tap OK to return to the Calendar p a 10 4 Applications Note f you select Remind me in an appointment your terminal notifies you according to the options set in Start Settings Personal tab Sounds 8 Notifications Using the Summary Screen When you tap an appointment in Calendar a summary screen displays Tap Edit to change the appointment 1 14 Calendar Lunch w adam 12 00p 1 00p Mon 8 26 2002 Corner cafe View appointment details Remember portfolio View notes Edit Tools Tap to change appointment Figure 10 3 Appointment Summary Screen Creating Meeting
142. are buttons See Buttons on page 3 8 ra for more information Buttons Switch input methods and set input options See nout on page 3 11 for more information 3 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 3 1 Personal Tab Applications Continued mei Mg l Configure the items that appear in the Start menu See Menus on page 3 14 for more information Change owner s personal profiles See Owner Information on page 3 16 for more information Owner Information Change owner s password and set security options See Passwords on page 3 19 for more information Password Select the type of actions for which you want to hear sounds and customize how you are notified about different events See Sounds amp Notifications on page 3 22 for more information Sounds amp Notifications Customize the information displayed on the Today screen See Today on page 3 24 for more information 3 4 Settings System Tab ES Settings About Backlight Certificates O 5 amp Clock Memory Power Qo 2 D Regional Remove Settings Programs Personal System Connections EE Figure 3 2 Settings System Tab Table 3 2 lists the applications available in the System tab Table 3 2 System Tab Applications a Provides device information and name See About on page 3 26 for more information Customize when and for how long the backlight should stay on See B
143. assword 5 For a simple password In the Password field enter a four digit password 6 For a stronger password a In the Password field enter a seven character password A strong password must contain at least seven characters that are a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters numerals and punctuation ES Settings Password Prompt if device unused For O Simple 4 digit password a Strong alphanumeric password Password 1231 2 3 4 5 6j7 8 9 0 4 Tab q w e jr t v uj i jo D E T LAP a sjd f g h T k T Shift zx c v b n m 7 iCuj A te Ej Figure 3 14 Alphanumeric Password b In the Confirm field re enter the password 7 Tap ok 3 20 Settings Hint To set hint so that you can remember your password 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Password icon Hint tab E settings e 4 411 ok Password Provide a password hint in case you Forget your password This hint may be visible by others Figure 3 15 Password Window Hint Tab 2 Inthe text box enter a password hint that would remind you of the password you set 3 Tapok 3 21 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Sounds amp Notifications Use the Sounds amp Notifications window to set event sounds and volume options Volume To adjust the system volume and enable event sounds 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Sounds 8 Notifications icon
144. ate a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F ct jad IN te Figure 8 9 Bluetooth Bonded Devices Window 8 10 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Renaming a Bonded Device If it is necessary to rename a bonded device it can be done from the Bluetooth Bonded Devices window 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab 2 Tap and hold the device to rename In the pop up menu select Rename Ey settings e 4 1103 Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options m un E wn na Rename Mode Bonded Devices E Figure 8 10 Rename Device Selection Dialog Box 3 The Rename bonded device window appears EJ settings e 461113 Rename bonded device Mame BONDED1 Figure 8 11 Rename Bonded Device Window 8 11 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Enter a new name for the bonded device in the Name text box Tap ok Note Tap Delete in this window to delete a bonded device Deleting a Bonded Device If it is no longer necessary to connect with a device delete it from the Bluetooth Bonded Devices window 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab 2 Tap and hold the device to delete In the pop u
145. b view displays instead of the APs tab WLAN Profiles Displays the current profiles and allows the user to add edit and delete profiles Find WLANs Displays a list of Soectrum24 networks APs and networked peers available to the terminal for association The networks are listed by their ESSID To the right of each network is a signal strength icon Networks with a signal strength of Good three green bars out of five or better should be considered for connection Tap a network and tap Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network Once connected the Mode Encryption IP Config and Power tab views display the ESSID security settings network address information and power consumption level set for that network See Finding WLANs on page 6 6 for more information 6 5 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 6 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions Continued LONE tanpa Options Displays settings for configuring system sounds AP and terminal association capabilities profile roaming options as well as the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility Finding WLANs A completed profile is a set of terminal configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined terminal operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network environme
146. backup battery e start the terminal e configure the terminal Installing the Battery installing the Standard Battery Before using your terminal install a lithium ion battery 1 Turn the locking screw counterclockwise until the cover releases from the terminal 2 Lift the battery door away from the terminal Figure 1 3 Locking Screw 1 8 Getting Started 3 Insert the lithium ion battery in the battery compartment with the battery tether positioned as shown ensuring the battery snaps into place Tether Figure 1 4 Inserting the Standard Battery Note Ensure the battery is positioned correctly The battery charging contacts should be placed on top of the charging contacts in the battery compartment 4 Replace the battery cover by inserting the top first then pressing the bottom down firmly Figure 1 5 Closing the Back Cover 5 Turn the locking screw clockwise to secure the battery cover to the terminal A PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Installing the Optional Larger Capacity Battery To install the optional larger capacity battery 1 Remove the bottom of the handstrap from the battery cover 2 Unscrew the locking screw and remove the battery cover Figure 1 6 Unscrew Locking Screw 3 Ifa battery is installed pull tether up to release battery 4 Insert the larger capacity battery in the battery compartment with the battery tether pos
147. beam select a device Infrared Align ports amp Searching Figure 4 16 Searching for a Device 5 After the file is sent a message appears indicating successful data transfer Note You can also send items but not folders from File Explorer Tap and hold the item then tap Beam File on the pop up menu GG Start Menu CG StartUp GC Temporary In Copy Rename Delete Send via E mail Beam File Figure 4 17 Beaming a File from File Explorer 4 36 Communication Receive Information To receive information align the IR ports so that they are unobstructed and within close range When information is sent from the other terminal your terminal if configured receives it automatically 1 In order to receive information automatically tap Start Settings Connection tab Beam icon The Beam window appears E settings at 4 aa9 5 Receive all incoming beams Receive an infrared beam From a Pocket PC 000 or HIPC device E Figure 4 18 Beam Window 2 Select the Receive all incoming beams check box to receive beams 4 37 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 By default the terminal detects incoming infrared IR beams and prompts you to accept them Figure 4 19 Receiving Beam Data Acknowledgement 4 If you do not want the terminal to detect or receive beams deselect the Receive all incoming beams check box Note f
148. ber of events such as warnings appointments and key presses To optimize battery life turn off any sounds you don t need See Sounds amp Notifications on page 3 22 for instructions Note When batteries are low a battery icon appears in the Navigation bar See Status Icons on page 2 13 for more information Settings Regional Settings With regional settings you can change the way the terminal displays dates times currency amounts large numbers and numbers with decimal fractions You can also choose the metric or U S system of measurement You can also choose from a large number of input locales When you switch to another input locale some programs offer special features such as font characters or spell checkers designed for different languages 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Regional Settings icon Region tab e 46436 Appearance samples Time 4 36 35 PM Short date 515 03 Long date Friday May 16 2003 Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 7893 00 Positive currency 123 456 783 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 00 Figure 3 42 Regional Settings Window Region Tab 2 From the drop down list select the country in which you are currently located 3 47 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Select the Number tab Number e 46436 Regional Settings Decimal symbol Mo of decimal places Digit
149. bet A Z a z numbers 0 9 function keys F1 F10 and assorted characters The keypad is color coded to indicate which modifier key ALPHA or function to press to produce a particular character or action The keypad default is numeric producing numbers See Using the Keypad on page 2 5 and Appendix D Keypad Maps for keypad functions 2 33 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Finding Information The Find feature locates information Tap Start Find to launch this feature Enter the text you want to find select a data type then tap Go To find information taking up storage space on your terminal select Larger than 64 KB from the Type drop down list You can also use the File Explorer to find files and organize them into folders Tap Start Programs File Explorer to launch Explorer Tap to change folders ES File Explorer uz 10 45 e Select the sort My Device 5 order for the list Application CG My Documents Platform Tap the folder C3 Program Files name to open it Li Temp CG Windows mdmlog5 8 26 02 54B Refresh Yiew All Files Paste Paste Shortcut Mew Folder Tap and hold to create a new folder Figure 2 30 File Explorer Note Jo move files in File Explorer tap and hold the item then tap Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop up menu 2 34 Operating the PPT 8800 Scanning The terminal has an integrated scanner which allows y
150. came with your Access Points APs for instructions on setting up the required hardware Note n Symbol PPT 8866 terminals with Bluetooth Extension Version 3 2 see Figure 3 25 on page 3 32 only one radio can be on at a time Bluetooth can not be used when 802 11b is in use To enable simultaneous mode Bluetooth Extensions Version 3 3 or greater is required For information about Bluetooth wireless communication see Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth The terminal Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the wireless connection The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates terminal signal strength as follows Icon Status Excellent signal strength Very good signal strength Good signal strength Fair signal strength Poor signal strength Out of network range not associated 5 3 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Mobile Companion The Mobile Companion utility is used to configure the terminal s wireless network settings The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray The status icon changes in real time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network Tap the icon on the task tray to open the Mobile Companion menu 74 Mobile Companion ao aff 3 05 Wednesday October 15 7003 Tap here ko set owner inform Mobile Companion Menu Status
151. cannot be located or e mail delivery fails WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations An IEEE 48 bit address the terminal is assigned at the factory that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer Displays the name of the terminal Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed through a DHCP request within the IP Status tab Select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the specified IP address Mobile Companion Signal Info IP Status Ping Aps Start Test Size AP OOAO Fe 42 64 C4 Total Tx O Total Rx O Retries O Avg Mbps O 0 0 D D 9 Signal Level RT Time ms 100 Min Max l7 B ld Avg O Figure 5 11 Mobile Companion Ping Tab Select a target device IP address from the P drop down list Select the size of the packet transmission from the Size drop down list Tap Start Test to begin the ping test Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping test The average mega bits per second signal strength data rate currently in use test Statistics and round trip RT times are displayed for each test The associated AP MAC address is also displayed The signal strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real time bar graphs 5 17 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Referen
152. ce Guide 10 Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the terminal s profile Mobile Companion Signal Info 1P Status Ping APs Known Access Points Amac dama 4 Sy OO AD FS 426214 85 Figure 5 12 Mobile Companion APs Tab The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its associated status Tapping on the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set Roaming options Selecting the Set Mandatory item prohibits the terminal from associating with a different AP The letter M displays on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option has been selected Selecting Set Roaming allows the terminal to roam to any AP with a better signal These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID A signal strength value of 32 is the highest possible The APs tab only displays when Infrastructure is selected as the terminal operating mode from the Mode tab 11 Ifthe terminal is in Ad Hoc mode select the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC addresses of the other terminals in the network their operating mode PSP or CAM their transmit rate their supported data rate and the length of time an 5 18 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 adapter has been out of the Ad Hoc network Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network performance and terminal membership data Mobile Compani
153. ce to connect to different mailboxes set up and name each mailbox connection Setting Up an E mail Service In Inbox on your terminal tap Accounts then New Account Follow the instructions in the wizard on the screen For an explanation of a screen tap Start then Help When finished tap Accounts then Connect to connect to your e mail server For more information on using the Inbox program see nbox on page 10 14 10 15 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using the Message List Messages you receive display in the message list box By default the most recently received messages are listed first Select the service and folder you want to display ES Inbox Select the sort order Received Date for messages i amp Robert Brown 8 45PM 16K a RE Today s Meeting Tap to open a message E9 Jay Adams Mark as Unread a HE Pease Move To Andrew Dixo 2j Bradley Beck RE Lunch Reply Ej Stuart Munad Reply All PocketPC Forward E Linda Mitchel Reminder Delete l Tap and hold to display a pop up menu of actions RE Working late 5j Adam Barr 7 15PM 1k Don t Forget Inbox Activesync 11 Items Tap to connect and to send and receive e mail Tap to connect to the selected service Figure 10 12 Inbox Application 10 16 Applications When you receive a message tap it in the list box to open it Unread messages display in bold Tap t
154. con Transfer via Bluetooth Browse Remote Device 3 If the terminal has no devices in the Bluetooth Devices folder that supports OBEX File Transfer then it begins to search for Bluetooth devices nearby 4 Select the Bluetooth device you wish to browse and tap Select If the desired device is not listed tap Find Ej socket OBEX et dx 6 35 s29PPT8860 WinCE Choose the desired device and tap Select IF the desired device is not shown tap Find to search For one that may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Figure 7 75 Finding Bluetooth Devices 5 The terminal begins to establish a file sharing connection 52 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 6 After the devices successfully connect the Bluetooth File Explorer appears f EJ Bluetooth File Explo 47 sip 7 01 X c Bluetooth Shared Fal Bf ScreenShot 10 bmp c Application Data cy ConnMgr Ey My Documents Connected to PPT2860 Vince File Device Help Fa y x E Figure 7 76 Bluetooth File Explorer Window Half of the window shows contents of the remote device while the other half shows contents of your terminal the local device The very bottom of the window displays the connection status Note A copy of the selected items will be transferred not the original Send or Receive a File or Folder Select the file or folder that you wish to transfer You can only select items from one device per transfer session 1 2 Tap items f
155. con on the task tray to open the Mobile Companion menu 74 Mobile Companion ao aff 3 05 Wednesday October 15 7003 Tap here ko set owner inform Mobile Companion Menu Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Mobile Companion Options icon Figure 6 1 Mobile Companion Menu 6 4 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 When the menu opens select Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs or Options from menu Table 6 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions re ne Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection Signal tab view displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter using its current profile to the associated AP Info tab view displays software driver firmware hardware and country information and the current profile name ESSID and encryption mode IP Status tab view displays network address information Ping tab view displays signal strength data data rate and conduct data transmission tests between the terminal and associated AP or client Status Cont d APs tab view displays APs with the same ESSID as the current WLAN profile The terminal s roaming capabilities can be set from this tab When not in Ad Hoc operating mode the APs tab displays instead of the Peers tab Peers tab view displays the BSSIDs power modes transmit rates and data rates of other networked clients within the Ad Hoc peer to peer network When in Ad Hoc operating mode the Peers ta
156. connection field enter a name such as SP via Bluetooth 10 In the Select a modem field select Bluetooth Phone 11 Tap Next ES Settings ISP via Bluetooth Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card Po IF vou travel or change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjg h J k T shift z x c v b n m Z ruj jV te gt Ela Figure 7 40 Enter Dial Up Number 1 29 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 12 Enter the dial up number exactly how it should be dialed from your Bluetooth phone Include the country and area code as required 13 Tap Next My Connection User name John Doe Password kk RR E E E E SE hok Domain domain name If provided by ISP or network administrator Advanced Lancel 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b jn m F ruj te Ea Figure 7 41 My Connection Window 14 In the User name field enter your username 15 In the Password field enter your password 16 Tap Advanced The Advanced window appears Wait Far credit card fo SEC Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if not connected in SEC General Port Settings TCP IP servers Figure 7 42 Advanc
157. cradle operate simultaneously Figure 4 2 Insert Terminal Into the Cradle 2 The cradle s communication LED turns red then flashes green indicating that the host computer and terminal are communicating See Communication LED Indicator on page 4 25 for other indications Note f you remove the terminal from the cradle while the LED is flashing green you disrupt communication and data may be lost When the terminal finishes communicating the slot s LED turns solid green until the terminal is removed from the slot 3 Onthe terminal a succession of dialog boxes appear indicating the status of the connection When successfully connected and synchronized the status of the host computer is Connected Synchronized If the terminal is inserted into an interconnected serial cradle slot while another terminal on the serial cradle chain is communicating with a host computer the terminal waits its LED remains red until the first terminal finishes communicating Then the slot s LED turns green until the terminal is removed from the slot To remove the terminal pull it straight up from the cradle slot 4 24 Communication Communication LED Indicator Table 4 1 Communication LED Indicator a mimo Off Terminal not in cradle terminal not placed correctly cradle is not powered Solid Red Terminal is present but communication has not started Flashing Green Terminal is in the cradle and communicating with the host computer S
158. ct a bonded Bluetooth phone to use as 4 dialup modem Press Hew to bond with a new Bluetooth Device Figure 8 29 New Dial Up Window 8 25 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 12 Ensure the Bluetooth phone is discoverable Tap New The terminal searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them in the list eo aff 1 59 Select a Bluetooth device Searching complete 0002c07109e4c Figure 8 30 Select Bluetooth Device Window 13 In the list select the device and then tap Next Enter Device Bluetooth PIN Enter a Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with 000 07109edc The same PIN must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer ko PIN requests Pee Figure 8 31 Enter Bluetooth Device PIN Window Note The Device Pin can only be numeric characters 8 26 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 14 In the Device PIN text box enter a PIN between 1 and 16 characters and tap Next The terminal sends the PIN request to the phone When prompted enter the same PIN on the phone 15 In the Name text box edit the name of the device requesting the bond if desired ao d2 10 31 Mame the Bluetooth Device amp Enter a name For the bonded device Name EONDED1 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ct jad IN te
159. current WLAN profile 4 Select the Enable Sounds check box to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test and associating with an AP The tones are important to notify users if the pinging is received or if the terminal has roamed to another AP Note Mobile Companion has a password protection feature When Mobile Companion initially displays the password is off by default 5 To create a password tap Change Password Change Password Current Password New Password Confirm Mew Password Figure 5 15 Mobile Companion Change Password 6 Enter a case sensitive password 10 characters maximum in the Current Password field and tap OK To change the current password enter the current password in the Current Password field and enter a new password in the New Password and Confirm Password fields and tap OK Changing Profiles Select WLAN Profiles trom the Mobile Companion menu to view connect to create and edit a profile A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined operating parameters available for use in various network 5 20 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 environments When the WLAN Profiles window initially displays existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list box Mobile Companion 123456 ABCDEF Edit E Delete Move Up
160. d or clicked e Bullets indicate lists of alternatives or action items lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential e Numbered lists indicate a set of sequential steps i e those that describe step by step procedures Related Material The following items provide more information about your terminal and accessories e PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Quick Reference Guide p n 72 63153 xx e CHD8800 10008 Serial Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 58095 xx e CHD8800B 10006 Serial Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 64181 xx e CRD8800 4000S Serial Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 58096 xx e CRD8800 4000E Serial Cradle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 59203 xx e MSR8800 Magnetic Stripe Reader Quick Reference Guide p n 72 64824 xx e TRG8800 Trigger Handle Quick Reference Guide p n 72 64623 xx e UBC 2000 Product Guide p n 70 33188 xx e AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide p n 72 55769 xx e Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals p n 72E 38880 xx XX About This Guide e Symbol Mobility Developer s Kit for NET http software symbol com devzone e Symbol Mobility Developer s Kit for Embedded Visual C 4 0 http software symbol com devzone e Device Configuration Package for PPT 8800 available at http software symbol com devzone e PPT 8860 Socket Bluetooth Software Developer s Kit available at http software symbol com devzone e ActiveSync software available a
161. d receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified Tap Kerberos Options to configure different caching modes for Kerberos credentials When connecting to a Kerberos supported profile the system can prompt for the associated user name and password at specified instances during the authentication process Caching of credentials is optional Kerberos Options Select any combination of the following Kerberos Credential Caching settings Reset When selected the system prompts the user for the username and password upon a warm boot Connect When selected the system prompts the user for login information when the system initiates a connection to the ESSID Time When selected the system requests a user name and password after the specified time parameter Available time parameters are specified as an nterval in minutes or At hh mm a specified time chosen with the pull down menu If a time option is not selected authentication continues without a user name and password verification Resume When enabled the system prompts the user for username and password after the system is Suspended and subsequently resumed If disabled the system prompts for a username and password only if the user s credentials are not in the registry LEAP Select this option to enable LEAP authentication LEAP is founded on see Figure 6 5 mutual authentication The AP and the user attempting to connect to it require authentication before acc
162. day Tap to switch Tap to change volume or mute all sounds Tap to change the date and time Tap to open an item Your day at a glance Tap to create a new item Tap to view connection status Figure 2 6 Today Screen Note The Today screen may vary depending on your terminal configuration The Today screen is customizable Tap Start Settings Today icon Use the Appearance tab to customize the background and the tems tab to change the list and order of items that appear on the screen 2 11 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar The navigation bar at the top of the screen displays the active program various status icons see Table 2 6 and current time It also allows you to select programs and close screens Use the command bar task tray at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs The command bar includes menu names buttons and the input panel button It can also include icons of active radios or programs where applicable see Table 2 6 on page 2 13 To create a new item in the current program tap New To see the name of a button hold the stylus on the button Drag the stylus off the button so the command is not carried out Tap to change volume or mute all sounds AJ start 1134 x Tap to close program SPs Tes Gal Tapto quickly select a program Today you have recently used Tap to s
163. de moves the cursor down on the screen In the function mode moves the cursor to the left In the alpha mode is a backspace key Function Executes an operation when pressed with another key or keys simultaneously such as one of the Scroll keys Refer to Table 2 5 Executes the same function Func in both the aloha and numeric modes 2 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 2 4 15 Key Keypad Actions Continued Key Powers the terminal on and off and turns the backlight on and off when held Executes a selected item or function Table 2 5 15 Key Keypad Input Modes DNE Alpha Lowercase Mode Alpha Uppercase Mode FUNC Au AHAHAHA pe ee eI ofm T III Fw w re mace 9 mo Gown uer fese fese fewer acrion pero JAN Note The key functions can be changed by an application The keypad may not function exactly as described 2 8 Operating the PPT 8800 Note For detailed keypad configurations including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix D Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard from the input panel see to Entering Information on page 2 23 Key Mode Icon When you press the ALPHA or FUNC key the Key Mode icon appears in the command bar indicating the key state The icon disappears when in numeric mode W Pecket word et 421129 GD AT eO us lPocket Word Ee d 10 46 GD 123 1 2 3 4 5 6
164. ded to the host computer if necessary manually download content You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile favorites In Internet Explorer on your host computer click View Toolbars Customize Saving Memory on your Terminal Mobile favorites take up storage memory on your terminal To minimize the amount of memory used In the settings for the Favorites information type in ActiveSync options turn off pictures and sounds or stop some mobile favorites from downloading For more information see ActiveSync Help Limit the number of downloaded linked pages In Internet Explorer on the host computer right click the mobile favorite you want to change then select Properties On the Download tab specify O or 1 for the number of linked pages to download Using AvantGo Channels AvantGo is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites Subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from your terminal then synchronize with your host computer or connect to the Internet to download the content For more information visit the AvantGo Web site To sign up for AvantGo 1 In ActiveSync options on the host computer turn on synchronization for the AvantGo information type In Pocket Internet Explorer on your terminal tap Favorites icon to display your list of favorites 10 35 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product
165. dow appears displaying two sub windows One contains a newly created script and the other contains a file explorer view used for selecting files to be placed in the script pi TCM Scripti 8 xl File Script View Window Help so PAv E E e P DQ IP Scripti 9 Volume 1 E Volume 2 E Volume 3 BV File Explorer zs 314 Floppy 4 amp Local Disk C amp Local Disk D S DNQ110ENUD E c8 Compact Disc F SI Sys on Taz G SI Proj on Bugs bunny K 2 Purge on TaziPurge P S3 Archives on Daffy T S3 Sys on Taz W S3 Apps on Taz X SI Sys on Taz Y SI Sys on Taz Z FEF ER E E F F Ready ES RIS Figure 12 1 TCM Window Table 12 1 lists the main components for the TCM main window Table 12 1 TCM Window See Script Window CA Displays the files to be used in the creation of the partition s 12 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 12 1 TCM Window Components continued Component kon Denon E View the current script items as large icons m ng Check the script for errors files not found Download the hex image to the terminal o Bm Arrange the sub windows in a tiled orientation 12 4 Configuring the Terminal Table 12 1 TCM Window ee Neen continued anl Na NN View or change the global
166. e occurs if the address of the data received is not sequential 12 19 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide TCM Error Messages TCM validates the cells in your partition table when you press the Enter button Cells highlighted in red contain an error Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected The errors that TCM may encounter and possible solutions are described in Table 12 3 Table 12 3 TCM Error Messages Error Description Solution Error Partition Size The size of a partition must be an integral multiple of the FFSSectorSizelnBytes specified by the ini file When the user enters a partition size TCM rounds up to the next highest integral multiple of the sector size and displays this value in the partition table grid This error check is made upon value entry independent of the Execute button Error Image Larger than If the required size of the binary image file is larger than the associated Partition partition size the Partition Size cell in the partition grid turns red to highlight the error The Required Size cell indicates the actual size required Error Total size of all If the total memory allocated to the 3 FFS partitions is greater than the FFS Partition total Flash Memory on the terminal the Used FFS Memory display box turns red Decrease the size of one or more of the partitions then recheck the configuration using the Execute button
167. e 4 11 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP Select either DHCP or Static from the IP Type drop down list If you select Static IP enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window See your network administrator for this information Tap ok Tap ok The Mobile Companion wireless status icon should indicate that the terminal is connected to the AP If the status icon does not indicate that the terminal is connected to the AP see your network administrator Communication 15 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon Advanced tab e 42627 Connections Networks are groups of settings used by programs to automatically connect to an ISP or private network Select Networks Dialing rules determine how a number is dialed From a specific location Select Location Select what your network card connects to Network Card Advanced Figure 4 12 Connections Window Advanced Tab 16 Tap Network Card The Configure Network Adapters window appears Tap an adapter to modify settings NE2000 Compatible Ethernet Driver L2TP NDISYWAN Miniport AsyncMlac NDISWAN Miniport PPTP NDOISYWAN Miniport 802 116 Wireless LAN Figure 4 13 Configure Network Adapters Window 17 Select The Internet from the My network card connects to drop down list 18 Tap ok 19 Tap ok 4 33 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 20 Tap Start Inte
168. e Chapter 3 Settings To set up ActiveSync to synchronize your terminal with your host computer see Chapter 4 Communication To configure your terminal for Spectrum24 see Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 or Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 To configure your terminal for Bluetooth see Chapter 7 PPT 8860 Bluetooth or Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth To set up AirBEAM to synchronize your terminal with your host server see Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart To install development software on your development PC see Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC To configure your terminal using the Terminal Configuration Manager see Chapter 12 Configuring the Terminal 1 31 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 1 32 Chapter 2 Operating the PPT 8800 Chapter Contents NU a paaa KABA ne eee eee a ee es ee Se ee ee RKAEPIASASEGRARIGTE REG P dd ews the Power BUON cc chk oe es eee So aero os AA Adiusing Mo BACkighi 52a ded d 8E 9o 29A OLDER CERO UR ORC eR ee eT ye gandard OT INANOD x 8 ad bee CIO dE Ron ORDER RR SUPE UP FUR E RA a LOLA saei O ce ee eee ee ee as hoe aes Oe eet oases LENG 4 ohn ses ce oer aces GABI KA NY ob bbe ere be BRAD DEE kA TTE LEN AA AAP AAP PAA eee ea eG ee MAP Ae TN a PAS heck ee E Sh ee be AA Standard 6 Key Configuration 0 0 eee ee eee eens a g UY 4 ae 8 bho he eh OEE OSS BEERS DEE Oe E 4 Key MOGs OT
169. e Signal tab is view only and is not available if the current operating mode is Ad Hoc Missed Beacons Displays the amount of beacons uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized missed by the terminal The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons If the LED is Red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal Txmit Retries Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the Transmit terminal The fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal As Retries long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve the signal Signal Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator RSSI of the signal transmitted between the AP and terminal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal 5 14 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 2 Select the Info tab to view the terminal s current software and driver revision data as well as the operating parameters of the current profile Mobile Companion
170. e and burns it to the flash memory is called Initial Program Loader IPL The customization of partitions is controlled by TCM scripts The scripts contain all of the necessary information for building an image The script is essentially a list of copy commands specifying the files to copy from the host computer to the partition TCM works with a pair of directory windows one displaying the script and the other displaying the source files resident on the host computer Using standard windows drag and drop operations files can be added and deleted from the script window The Device Configuration Package DCP includes scripts used by Symbol Technologies to build the standard Platform and Application partitions that are resident on the terminal when the terminal ships from the factory The standard Platform partition contains drivers while the Application partition contains Demo applications and optional components The standard TCM scripts can be found in the following folder Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 TCMScripts The process for building and loading a hex file can be summarized in the following steps Start Terminal Configuration Manager Create a new script or modify an existing one Build the hex file Load the hex file to the terminal pU qe ox Configuring the Terminal Starting Terminal Configuration Manager To start TCM on the host computer select Start Programs Symbol TCM The following win
171. e asks if you want to bond On Motorola enter GRANT on Nokia enter ACCEPT b Make up a 4 16 digit passkey enter it on the phone then enter it on the terminal c After successfully bonding with your phone you may want to set up your phone for automatic connections See Automatic Connection on page 7 44 for instructions If you did not save the dial up password the Network Log On screen may appear Enter the Password and tap ok PPT 8860 Bluetooth 5 When the terminal starts calling you see the call status on both the terminal and phone display After the terminal connects it receives transmits the information as requested e g Pocket Internet Explorer displays the requested website 6 Tousea different Bluetooth enabled phone for dial up networking you can use the same connection setup but you must make the new phone your favorite Run the Get Connected Wizard again select the new phone and make it your new Favorite when prompted 7 Alternatively you can use the Bluetooth Devices folder to change your favorite phone see Setting Up A Favorite Device on page 7 24 Bluetooth ActiveSync This section explains how to use the Bluetooth ActiveSync option to quickly and easily ActiveSync to a Bluetooth enabled notebook or host computer with ActiveSync installed The procedures vary depending upon if you e ActiveSync with a favorite computer e ActiveSync with a discovered computer e ActiveSync with an un discovered compute
172. e display in the Unavailable ports field From the Baud Rate drop down list select the appropriate baud rate Your options are 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 From the Protocol drop down list select NONE Insert the terminal in a cradle or connect it to a development computer with a serial cable Click OK to load the file 12 15 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 21 As soon as the first character of data is received IPL displays the Receiving Data screen 12 16 IPL VER X XX Partition Name Downloading Data Processing XXXXX KB of YYYYY KB image Figure 12 12 Receiving Data Screen Note f the partition being downloaded was set to first erase the flash the message Pre Erasing Flash first appears before downloading begins This screen indicates that the area selected in the Main Menu is currently downloading and displays until an entire image is received or until an error is detected As more data is received the Receiving Data screen is updated to reflect the current status Configuring the Terminal 22 When the entire image is received IPL displays the Download Complete screen to indicate that the download is complete IPL VER X XX Partition Name Download Complete Press bnter to return to Main Menu Cold Boot Exits IPL Figure 12 13 Download Complete Screen 23 Press the Enter key to return to the Main Menu scree
173. e terminal as shown in Figure 13 1 Ensure the tip of the cotton touches the back of the connector Figure 13 1 Inserting the Cotton Tipped Applicator 5 Twist the cotton tipped applicator and slowly move it back and forth from one side of the connector to the other Figure 13 2 Cleaning the Connector 6 Repeat step 5 at least three times 7 Remove the cotton tipped applicator from the connector Note The cotton tipped applicator dipped in alcohol can also be used to scrub off any grease and dirt near the connector area 8 Using a dry cotton tipped applicator repeat steps 3 5 13 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 9 Spray compressed air in the connector area by pointing the tube nozzle approximately 1 2 inch away from the surface 0007777 LUMA Figure 13 3 Air Spray Terminal Connector WARNING Do not point the tube nozzle at yourself and others Ensure the tube or nozzle is away from your face 10 Inspect the area for any grease or dirt 11 Repeat steps 3 9 as required 12 Ensure there is no lint left by the cotton tipped applicator 13 Remove lint if found 13 6 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Cleaning the Cradle Connector To clean the cradle connector follow the steps below 1 Remove the power to the cradle by unplugging the DC cable 2 Position the cradle as shown in Figure 13 4 Figure 13 4 Preparing the Cradle
174. e text using your stylus instead of the mouse to drag across the text To search a document for the text you want tap Edit Find Replace Tap to return to the Tap and hold to see a document list changes are pop up menu of actions saved automatically Attendees Format Action Items Paragraph Se Tap to change Recognize formatting options Alternates Use buttons to format text Mew Edit View Tools E Tap to show or hide the toolbar Figure 10 16 Formatting Text 10 21 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Writing Mode In writing mode use your stylus to write directly on the screen Ruled lines are displayed as a guide and the zoom magnification increases to allow you to write more easily For more information see Writing on the Screen on page 2 26 3 Pocket Word uz 2 43 jok UY YN IN re LA With Space button selected AS A drag to insert space An arrow appears showing the space direction and size Tap to highlight selected text Pen Space Tap to select formatting options Button Button such as pen weight and line color Figure 10 17 Writing on the Screen in Pocket Word If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke the writing becomes a drawing and can be edited and manipulated as described in the following section Written words are converted to graphics metafiles when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word docu
175. eSync Status Connecting to Host Figure 7 56 Connecting to Host 5 After a successful connection is made the status dialog indicates Connected Connected to Wireless ActiveSync Wireless ActiveSync Status Connected Figure 7 57 Connected to Host 6 Now you are ready to synchronize files 7 40 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Bluetooth LAN Access This section explains how to use the Bluetooth LAN access feature to quickly and easily connect to a Bluetooth enabled LAN access point The procedures vary depending upon if yOu e Connect with a favorite AP e Connect with a discovered AP e Connect with an un discovered AP Connecting to a Favorite Access Point To communicate with a favorite AP 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Bluetooth LAN Access A screen appears that allows you to choose which AP to connect to in your Bluetooth Devices folder En Bluetooth Devices Device Name Choose the desired lan access device and tap Select IF the desired lan access device is not shown tap Find to search for one that may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation E 2 Choose an AP from the list and tap Select 3 Ifyou would like to save the new AP to your Bluetooth Devices manager check Save selection for future use Note f your AP is not listed tap Find and follow the instructions provided in Connecting to an Undiscovered Access Point on page 7 43 7 41 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Window
176. ean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution See Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines on page 13 4 for additional information about cleaning the terminal and cradle connectors WARNING Avoid exposing the PPT 8800 including its cradle to con tact with hot oil or other flammable liquids If such exposure occurs immediately clean the terminal or cradle in accor dance with the cleaning guidelines at the end of this guide 13 3 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Terminal and Cradle Connector Cleaning Guidelines This section explains the proper way to clean the connector area of the PPT 8800 terminal and cradle Required Materials Use the following cleaning materials e Cotton tipped applicators Puritan e Isopropyl alcohol e Can of compressed air with a tube nozzle Micro Blast e Lint free cloth WARNING Read the warning label on compressed air and alcohol products before using and ALWAYS wear eye protection Cleaning the Terminal Connector To clean the terminal connector follow the steps below 1 Remove the main battery from the terminal 2 Replace the battery cover see Installing the Battery on page 1 8 3 Dip the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator in isopropyl alcohol Maintenance and Troubleshooting 4 Insert the cotton portion of the cotton tipped applicator inside the connector on the bottom of th
177. ears Tap each target with the stylus and following the on screen messages 4 Select the Enable ClearType check box to enable easier reading of text in programs that support ClearType 5 Tap ok 3 51 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Symbol Settings Use the Symbol Settings window to set specific settings for the terminal Wakeups The terminal can be configured to wakeup from sleep mode 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon Wakeups tab ES Symbol Settings r m2 4 39 ok h _ Trigger _ Trigger Trigger Trigger Any Key C Any Key Any Key Any Key whan wlan wan wlan Note The 802 11b radio power will remain on during 4 suspend when a WLAN check box is enabled Wakeups Settings System Config Prd AJ Wakeups Settings System Processor 4 PPT 8846 and 8866 Only Figure 3 49 Symbol Settings Window Wakeups Tab 1 Select the Trigger Any Key and or WLAN check box in the Power Off or Auto Off list box See Table 3 6 for a list of wakeup conditions settings 2 Tap ok 3 52 Settings Note A wakeup condition settings are not retained after a hard reset After a hard reset wakeup only occurs with the Power button However all settings are maintained after a soft reset Table 3 6 Wakeup Conditions Power Off When the terminal goes into Trigger button is pressed sleep mode by pressing the l Po
178. eason DO NOT remove the battery within the first 24 hours of use Using the Serial Charging Cable Figure 1 9 Power Set Up The standard battery usually fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours and the optional larger capacity battery usually fully charges in approximately five hours Using the Single Slot Serial Cradles You can charge the battery in the terminal using either the CRD8800 or CRD8800B Single Slot Serial Cradle The CRD8800B cradle accepts a terminal with the larger capacity battery kit installed on the terminal To charge the terminal s battery using the Single Slot serial cradle Getting Started 1 Connect the cradle to a power source AC Line Cord AC Line Cord Figure 1 11 Connecting Power to the CRD8800B Cradle Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Insert the terminal into the cradle The terminal starts to charge automatically CRD8800 CRD8800B Figure 1 12 Inserting the Terminal into the Single Slot Serial Cradle The standard battery usually fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours and the optional larger capacity battery usually fully charges in approximately five hours Getting Started Using the Four Slot Cradles To charge the terminal s battery using the Four Slot Charging Cradle or the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 1 Connect the cradle to a power source AC Line Cord Figure 1 13 Conn
179. ect Next use the down arrow to select Bluetooth then Bluetooth settings Bluetooth settings From there use the then My phone s name down arrow until you see a setting For We suggest changing Ehe name ta My phone s visibility Make sure this something like Gary s 6310 etc setting says shown ko all Consult your phone s instruction manual Consult your phone s instruction manual Figure 7 5 Get Connected Wizard Windows 7 6 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 5 Read the instructions and perform the task on the phone then tap Next gt The terminal searches for a Bluetooth phone When the search is complete a list of discovered Bluetooth phones appears En Get Connected Device Name Choose the desired phone and tap Select To perform the search again kap Refresh Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Eaj Figure 7 6 Get Connected Select Device Window 6 Select the phone to connect to and tap Select A service discovery phase begins which lasts for about 5 to 10 seconds 7 As prompted in the next window prepare the phone for bonding For instructions on setting the phone to Bondable or Pairable mode refer to the phone s user manual Have the passkey ready then tap Next gt The Bluetooth Passkey window appears ES Passkey Required 4 f 2 19 ok 3 Bluetooth Passkey The Following device wants a passkev PPT8860 The same Bluetooth passkey is required on each device Please enter t
180. ecting Power to the Four Slot Cradle 2 Insert the terminal into the cradle The terminal starts to charge automatically Figure 1 14 Inserting the Terminal into the Four Slot Cradle The standard battery usually fully charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours and the optional larger capacity battery usually fully charges in approximately five hours a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using the Universal Cable Cup To charge the terminal s battery using the Universal Cable Cup with the vehicle charging adapter or the wall outlet power supply and line cord Ensure the locking tabs are in the open position up Insert the terminal into the cable cup Press down on the two locking tabs Pull on the cable cup to ensure that it is securely attached to the terminal c O T V Locking Tabs Figure 1 15 Attaching the Universal Cable Cup to the Terminal 5 Open the rubber cap covering the power port Figure 1 16 Connecting the Power Cable 6 Plug the power connector into the power port Getting Started 7 Wrap the cable around the cable support Back of Cable Cable Cup Support Figure 1 17 Securing the Cable 8 Connect the other end of the cable to a vehicle power adapter or appropriate power source Vehicle Charging Adapter Power Supply Figure 1 1
181. ed not used for check box to turn off the Default time is one backlight after a certain period of time minute has passed unused Period of time can be selected from the list Available timings are 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min and 5 min Select the Turn on backlight when a Check Box is not button is pressed or the screen is selected tapped check box to turn on the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped Note To change display brightness level see Symbol Settings on page 3 52 3 30 Settings External Power To set the backlight settings when using external AC power 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Backlight icon External Power tab E settings ef d ais ok Backlight On external power Turn off backlight if device is not used For O Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Battery Power External Power Adjust power settings to conserve power E Figure 3 24 Backlight Window External Power Tab 2 Make the desired selections See Table 3 5 for backlight settings 3 Tap ok Table 3 5 External Power Backlight Settings Status Conditions of light On Off Default Hard Reset On External Select the Turn off backlight if device is not Check Box is selected Power used for check box to turn off the backlight Default time is one after a certain period of time has passed minute unused Period of time can be selected from the l
182. ed Window General Tab 17 Tap the General tab 7 30 18 19 20 21 e HEP Pok Advanced Use server assigned IP address O Use specific IP address use slip Use software compression Use IP header compression vene ses 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tabu w e r t v uji jo D LAP a sjd f g h T k T Shift z x cj v b n m Z cuja i te gt Eg PPT 8860 Bluetooth In the Baud Rate drop down list select 115200 Un check the Wait for dial tone before dialing check box If your network uses DHCP tap ok If you need to enter IP addresses tap the TCP IP and Servers tabs to enter the necessary settings Tap ok e didaa QD Advanced Use server assigned addresses O Use specific server address Alt DMS Alt WINS 12331 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tabu w e r t v uji jo D 1 CAP a sjd f g h T k T shift z x cj v b n m cuja i te gt Eg Figure 7 43 Advanced Window TCP IP and Servers Tabs 22 Tap Finish 23 Tap the Connection icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen An X indicates that the terminal is not connected 31 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 24 The Connectivity dialog box appears with the dial up connection just created Verify the phone number then tap the phone number riz a Connectivity a SP via Bluetooth I Settings ze E Figure 7 44
183. een 2 31 recording message 2 32 writing on screen 2 26 entering text n es 2 23 error messages 12 18 12 20 Gol awake aga 5 5 5 18 6 5 6 22 E SIDO saaaamaaamd gm 149 3 14 4 30 5 5 6 5 Excel PA ceo ee d Erant 10 24 external 5 YONG essse wuw erae ee 4 53 external power 3 31 F favorite INKS a a Eka e ANA GANG ox 10 34 file explorer 2 34 B 4 finding information 2 34 flash file system 12 22 non FFS partitions 12 24 Ja REEERE REN GT ETETETT 12 24 splash screen 12 24 ADONE AERE 12 22 COOVING oes ea des edes 12 23 regmerge 12 23 flash GUNAOG 24 chsecib ete ciesecaas 12 22 Index 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide G sA APA APA AA 5 11 6 15 H MENSA saa EKO KARLA outed tE ini 1 3 BURNIN io4e4 oose eee PE 1 25 hard reset on ane peace dada beeen hs 2 36 8 4 Paga AA AA AA 2 5 hex file sending a hex file 12 9 hex image hex image script 12 7 O a oe bee a a EG seuss 1 7 icons ActiveSync aaa 2 14 bluetooth csse rer RR 2 14 mobile companion 2 14 EIE Luca doped BA BOXER OD 2 13 2 14 image building building an image 12 7 inbox application 10 14 10 18 connecting to e mail server 10 1
184. een tap one of the Following themes and tap OK Y i n d ows B B fa U t Beam Delete Use this picture as the background Browse Appearance Items Figure 3 18 Today Window Appearance Tab 2 Select the desired theme for the Today screen background To use your own background select Use this picture as the background check box and tap Browse to locate the desired file on the terminal 3 To beam a theme to another terminal select the desired theme and tap Beam 4 To delete a theme select the desired theme and tap Delete 5 Tap ok 3 24 Settings Items To select items that appear on the Today screen 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Today icon Appearance tab Owner Info Calendar Inbox Tasks Display Today screen if device is not used For hours Figure 3 19 Today Window Items Tab 2 Select the items you want to appear on the Today screen To customize the information further select an information type and then tap Options not available for all information types 3 Tap ok 3 25 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide About Use the About window to view general system properties change memory settings input device name and view copyright information Version The Version tab view displays general system settings 1 Tap Start Settings System tab About icon Version tab AF settings e 46413 Microsoft Pocket PC
185. efinitely 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client does not automatically retry 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries up to the number of times specified Retry Delay This field specifies the amount of time in seconds that the AirBEAM Smart Client delays before automatically retrying after a synchronization failure use Test feature is disabled the synchronization process fails 813 if any download files are in use Wait Welcome _ This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client waits for the WELCOME windows to be completed before automatically launching the synchronization process after a reset Close Apps This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically attempts to close non system applications prior to resetting the mobile unit If enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client sends a WM CLOSE message to all non system applications before resetting the mobile unit This feature offers In use Test This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client tests to determine if a file is in use before downloading If the n use Test feature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client downloads a temporary copy of any files that are in use If any temporary in use files are downloaded the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically resets the client to complete the copy of the in use files If the n applications the opportunity to prepare i e close open files for the pending reset 9 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mob
186. elect Tools My Favorites The My Favorites window appears ES Bluetooth Devices 3 s x 5 31 ok NA My Favorites The Favorite printer selection is automatically used when print software sends output to the Socket Bluetooth Printer port ae My Favorite printer na device available KO Use the Favorite selected above a Don t use a Favorite prompt me with a list of suitable devices instead Printer COM Port anm Figure 7 31 My Favorites Window Note 7abs appear only for COM ports you have enabled To enable a port see Assigning COM Ports on page 7 12 3 Tap the tab for the type of device you would like to set a favorite for If needed use the arrow buttons to scroll and find the tab you need 4 To select a favorite device select Use the favorite selected above radio button 5 n the drop down list select your device 6 Tap ok After setting a device as your favorite its icon appears in the Bluetooth Devices window with a heart next to it Change Views To switch between the large icons or details views in the Bluetooth Devices window 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices 1 24 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 2 Select View Choose between Large Icons or Details En Bluetooth Devices Lenr520 Peter s Ericsson Figure 7 32 Large Icons View En Bluetooth Devices 5 41p Phone Peter s Ericsson Miscellaneous 3 LargeIcons 1 be e Details Device Yiew
187. elect a program Tap to see additional programs Tap to customize the device Inputpanel New button button Mew Edit Tools E Menu Buttons names Figure 2 7 Screen Navigation 2 12 Operating the PPT 8800 Status Icons You may see the status icons listed in Table 2 6 on the navigation bar located at the top of the screen Table 2 6 Status Icons em ee Turns all sounds on and off Main Main battery is charging is charging Main aa is low kaa LL NN Main battery is very low is very low mu Main battery is fuk is full M is active Synchronization is occurring is occurring aaa connection is IrDA connection is occurring LI Message sni NN that one or more instant messages were received E Mail Notification that one or more e mail messages were received 1 20 Time and Next Displays current time in analog or digital C Appointment format Multiple Notifications There are more notification icons than can be displayed Tap to display remaining icons Only appears in the Time and Next Appointment dialog box 2 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Task Tray Icons You may see the task tray icons listed in Table 2 7 on the command bar located at the bottom of the screen Table 2 7 Task Tray Icons KA IcIHINMMISMISIMNMN The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates mobile comp
188. ensed From RSA Data Security Inc Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Figure 3 22 About Window Copyrights Tab Settings Backlight Use the Backlight window to conserve battery power or to turn off the backlight when the terminal is idle You also have options to turn on the backlight when you tap the screen or press a key Battery Power To set the backlight settings when using battery power 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Backlight icon Battery Power tab settings diana D Backlight Warning Using backlight while on battery power Will substantially reduce battery life On battery power Turn off backlight if device is not used For fl Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Battery Power External Power Adjust power settings to conserve power proe Figure 3 23 Backlight Window Battery Power Tab 2 Make the desired selections See Table 3 4 for backlight settings 3 Tapok 3 29 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Note When you perform a hard reset all settings selected in this view return to the default settings The settings are maintained after a soft reset Table 3 4 Battery Power Backlight Settings Status Conditions of light On Off Default Hard Reset On Battery Power Select the Turn off backlight if device is Check box is select
189. ensure that there is a clear path between the two devices Adjust the room lighting or move to a different location Your terminal requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the data you are receiving For example if you are receiving a 30K application you must have at least 60K free Maintenance and Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting Your Terminal continued Your terminal does not Scanning application is Verify that the unit is loaded with a scanning accept scan input not loaded application See your System Administrator Unreadable bar code Ensure the symbol is not defaced Distance between exit Ensure you are within proper scanning window and bar code is range incorrect Terminal is not Ensure the terminal is programmed to programmed for the bar accept the type of bar code you are code scanning Terminal is not If you are expecting a beep on a good programmed to decode and don t hear one check that the generate a beep application is set to generate a beep on good decode Battery is low If the scanner stops emitting a laser beam when you press the trigger check your battery level When the battery is low the scanner shuts off before the terminal notifies you of the low battery condition Note If the scanner is still not reading symbols contact your distributor or Symbol Technologies Note f after performing these checks the terminal is still not reading symbols contac
190. er and checks the packages it is configured to look for If the package version was updated the client requests the transfer AirBEAM License The AirBEAM Smart Client is a licensed software product The AirBEAM Smart Client s version synchronization functionality is enabled through a license key file that is stored on the client device The license key file can be built into AirBEAM Smart Client s image or downloaded in a special AirBEAM package The AirBEAM license key file contains a unique key and a customer specific banner that is displayed when the AirBEAM Smart Client version synchronization logic is invoked Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client 1 Tap Start Programs AirBEAM Smart Client The AirBEAM Smart CE window appears 2 Tap File Configure The AirBEAM configuration window appears Packagesil Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 stat B QA 2 22 pm Figure 9 1 AirBEAM Configuration Window 9 4 AirBEAM Smart The configuration window is used to view and edit AirBEAM Smart Client configurations This dialog box has six tabs that you can modify Packages 1 Packages 2 Server Misc 1 Misc 2 and Misc 3 Packages 1 Tab This tab is used to specify the package name of the first four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server Description
191. erence Guide Using the Letter Recognizer To use Letter Recognizer 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Letter Recognizer 2 Write letters or numbers in the writing area just as you would on paper Write capital letters in the left side of the box numbers in the right side and lower case letters in the center Figure 2 22 Letter Recognizer When you write a letter it is converted to typed text on the screen For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer with Letter Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area Using the Transcriber To use Transcriber 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Transcriber Oe awee 7 x New Edit Tools CH Figure 2 23 Transcriber 2 Write anywhere on the screen When you write anywhere on the screen Transcriber changes the written characters to typed characters For specific instructions on using Transcriber with Transcriber open tap the question mark under to the writing area Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing such as the Notes program and the Notes tab in Calendar Contacts and Tasks you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen 2 26 Operating the PPT 8800 To write on the screen tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode Lines appear on the screen to guide you New Edit Tools Tap the Pen button and use your stylus like a pen Figure 2 24 Writing on the Scree
192. ers IP54 dust category 2 1 28 in Hx 3 22 in W x 5 75 in L 32 4 mm H x 81 8 mm W x 146 mm L PPT 8800 with battery 10 4 oz 295 grams PPT 8846 with battery 11 1 oz 315 grams PPT 8860 with battery 10 8 oz 305 grams PPT 8866 with battery 10 9 oz 309 grams C 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table C 1 Technical Specifications Continued Display were color TFT LCD 65K colors 240 W x 320 QVGA size Touch Panel Glass analog resistive touch Main Battery Rechargeable Lithium Ion 1700 mAh minimum 3 7V Standard Optional Larger capacity rechargeable Lithium lon 3400 mAh minimum 3 7V Backup Battery Ni MH battery rechargeable 15mAh 2 4V 2 cells Intel XScaleTM PXA255 Operating Platform Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Interface 0000000 RS 232 max 115 2 kbps min 1200bps USB Client CF Card Slot Type Il not user accessible Options 802 11b radio PPT 8846 and 8866 Bluetooth radio PPT 8860 Keypad Options Standard backlit 6 key and 15 key versions with power button 1D Decode Capability UPC EAN JAN Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar NW 7 UCC EAN 128 RSS variants RSS Linear variants C 2 Technical Specifications COM Port Definitions Table C 2 PPT 8800 COM Port Definitions COM3 IRComm PPT 8866 Only BTCOMM COM4 Raw IrDA PPT 8866 Onl
193. es 4 4 43 XO The Wizard is ready to search For Blueooth devices in vour immediate area Choose the type of devices you want ko detect Any Bluetooth device ai Data capable phone Gi LAN access point m Another PDA or computer Enter how long you want the Device Dicovery process bo last in the edit box below to fF second s Figure 7 18 Select Bluetooth Device to Search For 5 Tap Next gt 6 The terminal searches for Bluetooth devices in the area ES Bluetooth Devices 4 mix 6 17 X Searching For Bluetooth devices Time remaining Figure 7 19 Searching for Bluetooth Devices 7 16 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 7 When the search is complete a window appears listing the discovered Bluetooth devices EF Bluetooth Devices 4r m2 4 44 e Device Mame Device Class Choose each device ko save by tapping the checkbox to the left of each device Figure 7 20 Discovered Bluetooth Devices 8 Select the checkbox next to the device s 9 Tap Next gt 10 A service discovery phase begins which last about 5 to 10 seconds per chosen device When completed the Congratulations window appears Ei Bluetooth Devices 4 4 4 6 3 Bluetooth Device socket Discovery L Congratulations You have successfully added 1 new device to vour Bluetooth Devices Folder Tap the Finish button to exit the Wizard Figure 7 21 Bluetooth Device Discovery Congratulations Window 11 Tap Finish a PPT 8800 with Mic
194. es Symbol TCM Readme Release Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 Notes License 11 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 11 3 DCP Contents and Locations Continued Product Reference Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 Guide Hexlmages Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 Hex Images Flash File Folders Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 Flash Folders Tools ex Keyboard Program Files Symbol Device Configurations PPT 8800 v1 0 Tools remap if any 8800 v1 0 T CMScripts Documents and Settings All Users Start Menu Programs The SMDK and DCP are available from the Symbol Developer s Zone web site http devzone symbol com Installing Other Development Software Developing applications for the terminal may require installing other development software such as application development environments on the development PC Follow the installation instructions provided with this software Chapter 12 Configuring the Terminal Chapter Contents PU ANG 273 9208 3 5 PARARE RR dE ER SO YAAN Re KAS Pda dcsc kasd Rd Rugs dd Starting Terminal Configuration Manager 0 0c ce re Defining Script Properties a aiios eee OR eoi ood i dedo edo A Re Re 4 d A Rh Ra Sey a Hor ay AA Open a New or Existing Script Fila ccs Kab pa axe pana KA ted REREERE REA RE REG Copy Components to the
195. es ee Aha AG Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client aasawa aa 94 it NG AA AA AA AA AA E 9 5 mtf N ka P KAW ARKADA PLANG E he LA NLANG LAAN GAN OGG NADA bS KAKA 9 5 XI PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide URL PA AA AA PAA AA AA AA AA a 9 6 PADI TRE See iod seen este d oso ee did odo setae NAAN AA nbn NANA ABA ATAS 9 7 O PAD 2 eee ABAKA en ke Rem apti A ONU oe ee aM ee mas 9 9 MSCs TAO LLL ene NAA See AG AA AA AA ae SRS 9 10 UTIN wii NS SONG odd ne preire rotera ea co aed ee edd EENE EEEE 9 10 Manual Synchronization 9 11 ANA BONS oad oe ches de hood deo dede d ede dca dox aa 9 11 Aa ING 12 3198 4 APA ER ER PAA AP AP n dor XR 9 12 Chapter 10 Applications RISO 356 ceRbRIEP E AP CE ePi d add AA 10 3 LOU PG eee eee ese eae oe oes eR ee en 4 ho ooo ee oe see eee es ers 10 3 Creating Appointments iusso ace DALAGA oh bench add area qe acis 10 4 Using ihe Summar SOBRE Laud d ow Ed eR ORC EROR ROCA PICS E RU D QUE E Ee 10 5 Creating Meeting Requests 0 er 10 5 LONE 2G KAMAG BG ca ORTAS TEORIAN ENATS TATTIS EB ERA ALABANG ICA ERR 10 6 Using ihe Summary SOGO ic odd nee Pe ri eeri AOOPRRO do KG Rad ob a oe oa os 10 8 ig AA AA AA PA AA E ES T 10 9 LENI me DUNG GEN asas ABG be APEJIAAZG ES EROS SA REX RSXqXE Y qEPRERE S 10 11 po o Ene 10 12 Bi eye ea ear eee ye wearer ae waren
196. ess to the network is permitted 6 11 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 6 2 Authentication Options Continued EAP TLS EAP TLS is an authentication scheme through IEEE 802 1x It see Figure 6 6 authenticates users and ensures only valid users can connect to the network It also restricts unauthorized users from accessing transmitted information EAP TLS achieves this through secure authentication certificates Tap Install View Certificates to invoke a dialog box requesting the installation or retrieval of EAP certificates PEAP Select this option to enable PEAP authentication This method uses a see Figure 6 7 digital certificate to verify and authenticate a user s identity 8 6 12 Select the Encryption tab to set the adapter profile security level by configuring the encryption scheme and corresponding keys Select an option Open System WEP or TKIP WPA from the Encryption drop down list See Table 6 3 on page 6 13 for Encryption option descriptions ES Network Er aff 1 39 x Key Gi Oz 3 34 Passkev Made Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 B Figure 6 8 Mobile Companion Encryption Tab The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security The AP and the terminal are required to use the same enc
197. ete Tap ok Settings Clock Use the Clock window to change the date time time zone and set alarms Time To set the date time and time zone 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon Time tab E settings et 4 416 aMT 5 Eastern WS 4 15 22 PM PE 5 16 2003 m GMT 1 Berlin Rome 10 16 22 PM mms E Figure 3 28 Clock Window Time Tab Select the Home radio button Select your current time zone from the time zone drop down list To set the hour a Tap on the hour field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the hour b On the clock face tap and drag the hour hand to the current hour To set the minutes a tap on the minute field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the minutes b On the clock face tap and drag the minute hand to the current minutes To set the date tap in the date field 3 35 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 7 Tap the down arrow to the right of the date field The calendar displays EB March 2003 M T WT F 5 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 ii 12 BE 14 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 31 1 2 3 4 5 Today 6 13 03 Figure 3 29 Calendar 8 To select the month and year tap the arrows to the right or left of the month until the current month displays 9 Tap the day of the month The calendar disappears 10 Tap ok If you visit a
198. etooth device receiving the contact Tap Pending to cancel The terminal processes and sends the file s 8 20 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Sending a File 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a file 2 Tap Start Programs File Explorer icon to search for a file to send 3 Tap and hold the file s to send In the pop up menu select Beam File Eg File Explorer ar aff 4 16 e H Business New Word File 17 2 01 47RR Cut Copy Rename Delete Send via E mail Beam File Figure 8 23 File Explorer Window 4 The terminal begins to search for Bluetooth devices within range e 4 4an7 ok New Word fleti psw To beam select a device Infrared Align ports O000207109e4c Tap to send amp Searching Figure 8 24 File Window Beam Note f the terminal is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list ensure It is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 8 21 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide feet 10 meters of the terminal In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on 5 On the File window tap Tap to send to the Bluetooth device receiving the file s Tap Pending to cancel 6 The terminal processes and sends the file s 8 22 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Bluetooth Communications To use a phone that has Bluetooth capabilities as a modem for the terminal create a Blueto
199. evel for the new profile Deleting a Profile Select a profile to delete from the list box and tap Delete to remove the selected profile Ordering Profiles Select a profile from the list box and tap Move Up or Move Down to order the profile If the current profile association is lost Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list and then the next until a new association is achieved 6 26 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the terminal using registration reg files There are two registry files Spectrum24DS reg contains the global registry settings for Mobile Companion and S24Profiles reg contains the profile specific and operating registry settings for Mobile Companion A sample S24Profiles reg file is provided as part of the DCP for PPT 8800 Edit the file using a text editor See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified Save this text file as S24PROFILES REG Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the terminal Once this file is loaded onto the terminal these settings are restored after a hard reset 6 27 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 6 28 Chapter 7 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Chapter Contents KUTO ha nama Ka ene ee ee ee ee ee a ee ee ee eee ee ee ee kh ee ee ee 7 3 Turning Bl
200. files Each driver is initialized by a call to the RegisterDevice function The Device Manager calls this function on behalf of the driver However applications can load their own special purpose stream interface in which case they also call this function to register the driver h RegisterDevice _T COM nlndex _T btd dll DWORD amp pp if h NULL Success hComPort InitSerial TEXT COMB8 CBR 115200 Init port if RComPort NULL Failure ifdef DEBUG LogData T Failed to open Comport trying again endif 8 39 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 8 40 hComPort InitSerial TEXT COM8 CBR 115200 Init port Perform serial operations here j ifdef DEBUG else Failure LogData _T Failed to register Comport device endif SetCursor LoadCursor NULL NULL 7 Clear the wait cursor End FUNCTION GetBA PROTOTYPE int GetBA WCHAR pp BT ADDR pba PURPOSE Form the BDADDR in a way the PORTEMUPortParams structure understands kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk jint GetBA WCHAR pp BT ADDR pba Bump pointer through any leading spaces while pp pp for inti 0 i lt 4 i pp if liswxdigit pp return FALSE int c pp if C gt a C C a 0xa else if c gt A c c A 0xa elsec c 0 if c
201. following order when the button is held The display backlight turns on first continue to hold and the keypad backlight turns on When either backlight is on the backlights turn off when the button is pressed and held Decrease display backlight decrease brightness Increase display backlight increase brightness 2 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 15 Key Configuration Use the key combinations listed in Table 2 2 to control the display and keypad backlight Table 2 2 15 Key Keypad Backlight Controls Press and hold Turns the display backlight and keypad backlight on and off When both backlights are off the backlights turn on in the following order when the button is held The display backlight turns on first continue to hold and the keypad backlight turns on When either backlight is on the backlights turn off when the button is pressed and held Press fue Decrease display backlight decrease brightness Press Fu Increase display backlight increase brightness Using the Stylus Your terminal has a stylus for selecting items and entering information The stylus functions as a mouse Tap Touch the screen once with the stylus to press option buttons and open menu items Tap and Hold Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for that item On the pop up menu that appears tap the action you want to perform Drag
202. formation about the owner The information can be displayed when the terminal is turned on Identification To enter personal information 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Owner Information icon ldentification tab e 46410 Owner Information E amm O Show information when device is turned on Figure 3 10 Owner Information Window Identification Tab 2 Fill in or edit the data as desired 3 To have this information display when you start the terminal select the Show information when device is turned on check box 4 Tap ok 3 16 Settings Notes To add more information about the owner 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Owner Information icon Notes tab Ei settings et 4 4a11 ok Owner Information s j a Show information when device is turned on Identification Notes Rs 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d Tabu w e r t v uj i jo D E T LAP a sjd f g h T k T shift zx c v b n m 7 ct fad 4 etje Ej Figure 3 11 Owner Information Window Notes Tab 2 Enter information in the Notes box To have this information display when you start the terminal select the Show information when device is turned on check box 4 Tapok 3 17 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide After the information is entered and the Show information when device is turned on check boxes are selected the Welcome window appears whenever
203. g Description Off 5V is not supplied to the serial port Active On The terminal outputs 5V while the serial port is open by an application Always On 5V is always available at the serial port The default setting is Off after a hard reset The selected setting is maintained after soft reset 3 From the Standard decode beep volume drop down list select the appropriate volume setting 4 Tap ok System The System tab displays terminal system data 3 54 Settings 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon System tab 5 Symbol Settings r m2 10 53 ok UUTO Part 1 S6000050BF7 460E2 LILITD Part 2 29000300903F31D1 Build ID 880w 05010214 IPL ID Book ID Platform ID 666w Plat l amp 8 Decoder Rev MJRFFAA3 Figure 3 51 Symbol Setting Window System Tab 2 Inthe System tab you can view the system data listed in Table 3 8 Table 3 8 System Tab Data em Been Format Inherent value of built in flash XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ROM where X is an alphanumeric character Part 1 Flash ROM of data bus high order word Part 2 Flash ROM of data bus low order word Build ID Control version of when OS image X XX XXXXX is built where X is an alphanumeric character IPL ID Version of IPL X XX XX where X is an alphanumeric character Boot ID Version of Boot X XX XX where X is an alphanumeric character Platform ID Version of Platform 88XXw OSXXXXXX where X is an alphanumer
204. g Mode drop down list Infrastructure Select Infrastructure to enable the terminal to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the terminal default mode when Mobile Companion initially displays 6 7 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the terminal to form its own local network where terminals communicate peer to peer without APs using a shared ESSID Select the Long preamble check box if the terminal and its profile are using a long preamble when transmitting data A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission Devices in Ad Hoc mode are required to use the same preamble length to interoperate The terminal initiating the Ad Hoc network sets the channel using the Channel drop down list used by each peer in the Ad Hoc network Note On the PPT 8866 the Bluetooth radio must be turned off when using 802 11b Ad Hoc mode If the Bluetooth radio is not turned off the Ad Hoc connection fails while using Bluetooth See Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth for more information about Bluetooth 6 Select the country of operation for the terminal from the Country drop down list This ensures the terminal is using country code information compatible with the country code data used by the associated AP 7 Select the Authentication tab to configure server based authentication Select an
205. g in large worksheets in Pocket Excel View in full screen mode to see as much of your worksheet as possible Tap View Full Screen To exit full screen mode tap Restore Show and hide window elements Tap View then the elements you want to show or hide Freeze panes on a worksheet First select the cell where you want to freeze panes Tap View Freeze Panes You may want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet oplit panes to view different areas of a large worksheet Tap View Split Drag the split bar to where you want it To remove the split tap View Hemove Split Show and hide rows and columns To hide a row or column select a cell in that row or column Tap Format How or Column Hide To show a hidden row or column 10 25 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide tap Tools Go To then type a reference that is in the hidden row or column Tap Format Row or Column Unhide For more information on using Pocket Excel tap Start Help MSN Messenger With the MSN Messenger instant messaging program on your terminal you can e see who is online send and receive instant messages e have instant message conversations with groups of contacts To use MSN Messenger you need a Microsoft Passport M account or a Microsoft Exchange e mail account You need a Passport to use MSN Messenger Service If
206. ging Cable or the Single Slot Cradle to the development computer Serial device cable Figure 12 5 Cradle Connection to Development Computer 12 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 8 12 10 Connect the power supply to the Serial Charging Cable or the cradle and the AC line cord to the power supply and the AC outlet Perform a hard reset of the terminal see Performing a Hard Reset on page 2 36 Replace the battery cover On the Standard 6 key keypad simultaneously press and hold the APP 1 and the APP 4 keys then press and release the Power button On the 15 key keypad simultaneously press and hold the 1 and 4 keys then press and release the Power button Continue to hold down the keys until the IPL screen appears IPL VER X XX WARNING IPL Requires AC Plug in AC Power then reset device Figure 12 6 IPL AC Power Warning Screen Place the terminal into the cradle or connect the Serial Charging Cable to the terminal Caution Do not remove power from the terminal while in IPL mode If the battery fully depletes during OS upgrade serious damage to the terminal can oc Cur Configuring the Terminal 9 IPL displays the Baud Rate screen which lists the available baud rates for the serial connection IPL VER X XX IPL Key Sequence gt 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9600 Auto Baud Press Up Down to select
207. grouping symbol Mn of digits in group List separators Negative sign symbol Negative number Format Display leading zero Measurement system Gran me pue Figure 3 43 Regional Settings Window Number Tab 4 Select the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab 5 Select the Currency tab er 46437 QD Regional Settings Currency symbol Currency symbol position Decimal symbol Mn of decimal places Digit grouping symbol Mn of digits in group 21 1 Negative number Format x Universal currency symbol Fe ome Figure 3 44 Regional Settings Window Currency Tab 6 Select the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Regional tab 3 48 Settings 7 Select the Time tab ee 46437 Regional Settings Time sample 4 37 34 PM Time separator aY AM symbol AM PM symbol PM we bn Figure 3 45 Regional Settings Window Time Tab 8 Select the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab 9 Select the Date tab e 46438 Regional Settings Short date 516 03 Long date Friday May 16 2003 Short date Midiy bu kag saa a Long date dddd MMMM dd vyyy 7 Calendar type Gregorian Calendar x ma ox 77 Figure 3 46 Regional Settings Window Date Tab 10 Select the desired optio
208. h CA AA AA AN AA AA B 1 LA UA B 2 s n CP ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 0 306 er AT B 3 an BC dt ot oe eee esa coors Godan teens AA B 3 BODIE LOEO PAP ee eee eee ee re eee eee re ae eee RO B 4 m cu PLC Cr ES B 4 LOUPE EEEE EE A E E E E E RS EXER AA B 5 BDDME EIE E KALA E E A EE EE S EEEE ETE EEE ETE qd dics NG B 5 System Versions irsserssrisr iss iiiisra KG ROROA DAA s darai nei B 6 Dask AU BABA A ENET Bd EE ER 6 doe EE AAEE AA ORTE TTE B 7 xo AEREE AP AG ee ee NEES EETA SEEE ASNES ENEN EITT B 7 LO TG EE E E E E E eee AE E E B 8 etel e 6 Ss ek E AA eee B 9 Sapaata e euE Ue EEEE E A AA AA B 10 BUD SIME eean EEE S ba dod bee E e YA B 11 HA d eC NRTESTETIETTT TOT TITIO B 12 AL AA RAR T TO ST Goode eee eee eee es B 13 eL ARA PA AHA B 14 Hi RA AA PA AAP AA B 15 opos PP AA PAA AE PP B 16 AMA AT TA B 16 XIV Contents Appendix C Technical Specifications Ska AA PAPA AA AA AA C 1 COM Port DENNINIONG lt lt 04060066604 GAGA KA penne Shad ER ARO ORd eee DASE SRA SESAME EOS wD C 3 PN eg a ce ok Se ek eb es eek Be a OR ee Bd wu Ed b Wd a GG pari C 4 Appendix D Keypad Maps WD AA 9 MAA ee ee beeen eee he eee PAA AA APA APA D 1 KA ase ce ke AA ee ee ee ees And dc d ee es D 2 Appendix E Bluetooth Regulatory Information PES Gr i PAPA EE RE E 2419 AA AA E 1 Index XV PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Xvi About This Guide Introduction The PPT 8800 with Windo
209. h Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide To show or hide the input panel tap the Input Panel button Tap the arrow next to this button to view input methods Options Block Recognizer Keyboard New Edit Tools d EIE Input Panel Button Select an input method Tap to see your choices Figure 2 18 Input Panel Button When you use the input panel your terminal anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel When you tap the displayed word it is inserted into your text at the insertion point The more you use your terminal the more words it learns to anticipate To change input settings such as the number of words suggested at one time select Options from the Input Panel menu and tap the tabs to see each setting screen e 46409 ng e 46409 Naa Suggested words pop up in a window above These options apply when writing or Input method Jey ODAC SO the input panel Tap to accept recording is supported C Large keys e r t Suggest words when entering Eext Voice recording Format Small keys jal f a 8 000 Hz 8 Bit Mono 8 KB s Suggest after entering letter s E Use gestures For Ehe Following keys and A i S vnd Default zoom level For writing 20056 remove them From the keyboard Space H shift key 4dd a space after suggested word Default zoom level For typing 10096 Replace text as you type Capitalize First lette
210. he Letter Meco GO Lu d uda BG PBB KAKA NA KAN AKA KAMARA LABA cide KAKA 2 26 LOG APAN OS KAMA GALERA BA ASA BAGA PRE RK AG AA 2 26 Veit ONS SOCEM Lu ues PAA AA 2 26 LOnVermnog INO NON nad ados qu ape EE qe CES ov chee LANE GWA selene 2 28 vi Contents ED i M T RT RITE TET TTC OTT ween aac bast TT TIT TET 2 30 c cesgeblnspo v REE Drawing on f 0r o M P 2 31 CO O d DIGUIDD ova oss qu KANG RAE PATET EAR RUEES SRI REA Rada haka PA DO UA GD AA KNA BAKAS TOTIS LI eee ba oe Be as 2 32 POND NU cosa PARA ee IRR TRE RUE blo BADA AN AGE KANG DBA KELAN GNG er 2 33 Entering Information Using 15 Key Keypad pba eee bape PAP AA PP 2 33 Pad METTE heeded GA GA arenes RA WENT wes se Seed kB EE es 2 34 ieee ARA RA PEE E A OE E APAPAP Soan LED GN 544 49 Yd BE EA DX RR a C RR 2 35 Resetting NG Terminal ida cc acen cake mn Re Rie RR MR CR eR PAKA Eee Oe KA 2 36 PONG Oa E TERT TT TI Tl 1 D TM 2 36 PPO a HOO HESBL uu ede qiiae Sows oes Road Rad pan wks e ius xA Rex dor OOO Chapter 3 Settings iae c M RTT TET TOIT TT TT T oe oo on ee eee eea kee PRON BED oan GB KAG ordo Vo d p PORC AREE E ERE PE EUR E HR UR I md d 3 9 POLS A P rEEEETEEPES ON a P AA Xia board er EE T AA AA AA xqCREENXS M SA AAP PR DT ET E EE E EEEE E ET EE EEE E E gt Program Buttons ode oe bd oaks KG de aaa a NA Ro gba pte hee to be EEE T T E TE E TT 3 9 i S I ge EE E E AQ O E EE eee 3 11 Input Method MENETET
211. he conference and reports that the product was a big hit n23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab q w e r t y ulilo p LAP a sid f a h i K 1 cO Ctl E Tap to show or hide New Edit Tools CE 7 E lio dm poet Tap to write on the screen Tap to add a recording to the note Figure 10 11 Creating a Note 10 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Inbox Use Inbox to send and receive e mail messages in the following ways e Synchronize e mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Outlook on your host computer e Send and receive e mail messages by connecting directly to an e mail server through an Internet service provider ISP or a network Synchronizing E mail Messages To synchronize e mail messages first enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync options For information on enabling Inbox synchronization see ActiveSync Help on the host computer During synchronization e E mail messages are copied from the Inbox folder of Exchange or Outlook on your host computer to the ActiveSync folder on your terminal By default you receive messages from the last three days only the first 100 lines of each message and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size e E mail messages in the Outbox folder on your terminal are transferred to Exchange or Outlook then sent from those programs e E mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on your host
212. he list below to select the model of your Bluetooth phone IF you don t see your phone try using the selection nat in this list My Bluetooth phone is Figure 7 9 Select Your Phone Window 3 Inthe My Bluetooth phone is drop down list select a Bluetooth phone The wizard provides tailored instructions based on the selection Tap Next gt 4 The next window s vary and provide instructions for preparing the phone for Bluetooth connections Some or all of the following may need to be performed Naming the Bluetooth phone e Setting the Bluetooth phone in Discoverable mode Preparing a Bluetooth passkey N Taas n id 1 II rd iin Start 3 42 10 26 3 Start 3 m2 10 26 Prepare the phone part Prepare the phone part 1 J 2 Take this opportunity to give your Nokia n Now vou must set up your Nokia phone phone a name to be Discaverable Your phone cames with a Factory preset Starting From the phone s top menu select the Bluetooth menu You will see a Bluetooth item that should say ON Next use the down arrow to select Bluetooth then Bluetooth settings Bluetooth settings From there use the then My phone s name down arrow until you see a setting For We suggest changing Ehe name ta My phone s visibility Make sure this something like Gary s 6310 etc setting says shown ko all Consult your phone s instruction manual Figure 7 10 Get Connected Wizard Windows 7 9 P
213. he passkey below and tap Reply or tap Cancel to deny this request Bluetooth passkev CU aag 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p caPja s a f ajn ijkjij shift z x c v b n m cuja IN te Figure 7 7 Bluetooth Passkey Window 1 1 a PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 8 Enter the passkey Tap Reply 9 The phone may then either automatically accept the passkey or ask you to enter one If prompted for a passkey use the same one entered on the terminal Note Ericsson T68 T68i only When the phone requests to bond select 2 Add to paired devices Do not tap ACCEPT 10 Tap Finish After successfully connecting the phone appears in the Bluetooth Devices folder In the Today screen the Bluetooth icon blinks Note You may also switch between different phones by assigning a new favorite phone in the Bluetooth Devices folder Motorola Timeport 270C Nokia 3650 6310 7650 8910 8910i 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Get Connected The Get Connected Wizard window appears PAG 2 10 25 Get Connected with soc ket Bluetooth Welcome to the Bluetooth Get Connected Wizard This Wizard sets up your PDA and Bluetooth enabled phone for wireless connections Tap Next ko continue or kap Back to exit Figure 7 8 Get Connected Wizard Window 7 8 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 2 Tap Next gt Padi PRAE 4 Select your phone Use t
214. he tip of stylus on the center of each target that appears on the screen align screen Tap the target firmly and accurately at each location on the screen The target will continue to move until the screen is aligned zz Figure 1 23 Align Screen Note To re calibrate the screen at anytime press FUNC 6 on a 15 key terminal or press Function F4 on the standard 6 key terminal to launch the calibration screen application 3 Follow the directions on the screen which lead you through a simple exercise illustrating how to use the stylus and pop up menus pop up menus Mifipop up menus You can use your stylus two ways Single tap Tap and hold Buy stamps O Gall Andy a Reschedule dental anot Select All When you tap and hold an item with your stylus a pop up menu containing a list of actions appears Use pop up menus to reschedule the following appointment Tap and hold the 9 A M dental appointment and then tap Cut on the pop up menu Copy appointment Paste Delete Use pop up menus to reschedule the following appointment Now tap and hold 11 A M and then tap Paste on the pop up menu Cut Copy Paste Delete Figure 1 24 Using Pop up Menus Getting Started 4 Use the drop domn list to set your time zone and tap Next Select your time zone Time zone GMT 5 Eastern US GMT 5 Eastern US Figure 1 25 Setting Time
215. he title in the Library list and then tap Delete on the pop up menu For more information on using Microsoft Reader tap Start Help 10 33 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Pocket Internet Explorer With Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer you can view Web or Wireless Application Protocol WAP pages in the following ways e During synchronization with your host computer download your favorite links and mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the host computer e Connect to an Internet service provider ISP or network and browse the Web First create the connection see Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 29 To select Pocket Internet Explorer tap Start Internet Explorer Mobile Favorites ltems stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on your host computer are synchronized with your terminal This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync Favorite Links synchronization updates the list of favorite links both in the Mobile Favorites folder on your host computer and in Pocket Internet Explorer on your terminal Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite only the link is downloaded to your terminal you must connect to your ISP or network to view the content For more information on synchronization see ActiveSync Help on the host
216. ic character Decoder Rev Version of scan decoder XXXXXXXX where X is an alphanumeric character 3 55 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Tapok 3 56 Settings Processor The Process tab controls the speed at which the processor is running It can operate at either 400 MHz or 300 MHz Note Older versions allow changing the processor speed but the bus speed is set to 100 MHz Newer versions allow changing the bus speed for the 400 MHz CPU speed 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon Processor tab ES Symbol Settings r 2 4 40 ok 53 Symbol Settings 4 m2 8 23 ok Change the working speed of processor Current CPU speed 400MHz Current PxBus speed 100MHz 400MHz CPU Speed 400MHz High speed 100MHz PxBus Speed 00MHz PxBus Speed 7 300MHz o Ede O 300MHz CPU Speed Current speed 400MHz Hi Only 100MHz PxBus speed CHANGE is supported When the speed is set at low battery consumption can be reduced When Ehe speed is set at low battery consumption can be reduced Settings Config Processor Settings Processor I o Bil Older Screen Newer Screen Figure 3 52 Symbol Settings Window Processor Tab 2 Select either the 400 MHz CPU Speed or 300 MHz CPU Speed radio button If 400 MHz CPU Speed was selected select either 100 MHz PxBus Speed or 200 MHz PxBus Speed 3 Tap CHANGE 3 57
217. ical ISM band 802 15 1 Bluetooth wireless technology is specifically designed for short range 30 feet 10 meters communications and low power consumption Terminals with Bluetooth capabilities can exchange information e g files appointments and tasks with other Bluetooth enabled devices such as phones printers access points and other terminals In addition a dial up modem connection can be created between the Bluetooth terminal and a Bluetooth enabled phone The Bluetooth phone can then be used as a modem Symbol terminals with Bluetooth technology use the Microsoft Bluetooth stack To program Bluetooth within the terminal see the Microsoft Embedded Visual C help Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On and Off Turn off the Bluetooth radio mode to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions e g an airplane When the mode is off the terminal can not be seen or connected to by other Bluetooth devices Turn on the Bluetooth radio mode to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices within range Communicate only with Bluetooth radios in close proximity Note n Symbol PPT 8866 terminals with Bluetooth Extension Version 3 2 see Figure 3 25 on page 3 32 only one radio can be on at a time Bluetooth can not be used when 802 11b is in use To enable simultaneous mode Bluetooth Extensions Version 3 3 or greater is required For information about Spectrum24 see Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9
218. ice The maximum frequency of the device is 2402MHz 2480 MHz This is according the Bluetooth Core Specification V 1 1 3 Co Ordination of the Hopping Sequence in Data Mode to Avoid Simultaneous Occupancy by Multiple Transmitters Bluetooth units which want to communicate with other units must be organized in a structure called piconet This piconet consist of maximum 8 Bluetooth units One unit is the master the other seven are the slaves The master co ordinates frequency occupation in this piconet for all units As the master hop sequence is derived from it s BD address which is unique for every Bluetooth device additional masters intending to establish new piconets will always use different hop sequences E 1 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Example of a Hopping Sequence in Data Mode Example of a 79 hopping sequence In data mode 40 21 44 23 42 53 46 55 48 33 52 35 50 65 54 67 56 37 60 39 58 69 62 71 64 25 68 27 66 57 70 59 72 29 76 31 74 61 78 63 01 41 05 43 03 73 07 75 09 45 13 47 11 77 15 00 64 49 66 53 68 02 70 06 01 51 03 55 05 04 5 Equally Average Use of Frequencies in Data Mode and Short Transmissions The generation of the hopping sequence in connection mode depends essentially on two input values 1 LAP UAP of the master of the connection 2 Internal master clock The LAP lower address part
219. idually or together For example e mail addresses stored in Contacts can be used to address e mail messages in Inbox Using ActiveSync you can synchronize information in these applications between your host computer and your terminal Each time you synchronize ActiveSync compares the changes you made on your terminal and host computer and updates both with the latest information For information on using ActiveSync see Chapter 4 Communication and ActiveSync Help on the host computer You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Start menu Calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments such as meetings You can view your appointments in different ways Agenda Day Week Month and Year and easily change views using the View menu Calendar Aug 26 02 s gdrwrrs f amp Tap to go to today Lunch w adam x Tap to display or edit the 12 00p 1 00p Corner care appointment details Staff meeting 3 00p 4 00p New Tools HE Fy Hi El Tap to create a new appointment Figure 10 1 Calendar Application 10 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Note You can customize the Calendar display such as changing the first day of the week by tapping Tools Options Creating Appointments To create an appointment 1 Tap Start Calendar to open the application 2 If you are in Day or Week view tap the desired date and time for the appointment 3 Tap New T
220. iguration V 3 9 2 DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet e mail delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located or e mail delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations MAC Address An IEEE 48 bit address the terminal is assigned at the factory that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer Host Name Displays the name of the terminal Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed through a DHCP request within the IP Status tab Select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the specified IP address ES Mobile Companion r f 1 41 m Start Test Size AP OO AD FB8 42 64 C4 Test Statistics Total Tx 0 Total Rx O Retries O Avg Mbps O 0 0 O 8 Signal Level RT Time ms 100 Min Max O Avg O 1 2 55 11 Signal Info IP Status Ping aps Eg Figure 6 15 Mobile Companion Ping Tab Select or enter a target device IP address from the P drop down list Select the size of the packet transmission from the Size drop down list Tap Start Test to begin the ping test Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping tes
221. ile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Misc 3 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Misc 2 Misc 3 Use DHCP server C Use DHCP bootfile mi ag Use DHCP This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the server DHCP response option 66 to specify the P address of the FTP TFTP server If enabled special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the TF TP server name field option 66 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid xxxx yy reg Use DHCP This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the bootfile DHCP response option 67 to specify the Package and Package 1 parameters If enabled special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the Bootfile name field option 67 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid xxxx yy reg Synchronizing with the Server When the synchronization process is initiated the AirBEAM Smart Client attempts to open an FTP session using the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration Once connected the client processes the specified packages Packages are loaded only if the server version of a given package is different from the vers
222. in the terminal window on the terminal cy Figure 1 30 Swiping a Card Note The card may be swiped in either direction from left to right or from right to left For best results gently press down on the card while swiping to ensure contact with the bottom of the reader If the terminal is left idle long enough to go into the Suspend Resume state or the power is turned off and then on again it may be necessary to close and restart the terminal program to reinitialize the serial port To disconnect the terminal emulation select File Cancel The session you created appears as an icon in the Terminal folder You can create a desktop shortcut for the session and connect by double tapping it 1 29 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Charging the Terminal s Battery The terminal s battery can be charged while the MSR is installed on the bottom of the terminal using the Serial Charging Cable p n 25 38383 01 and power supply p n 50 14000 107 The standard battery charges in approximately 2 1 2 hours E Power Supply Serial Charging Cable Figure 1 31 Charging the Terminal Using the MSR 1 30 Getting Started Configuring the Terminal Refer to the following chapters to configure the terminal For customizing the settings on your terminal se
223. indows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Memory Use the Memory window to adjust RAM allocation view storage card memory usage and stop active programs Main To temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Main tab E settings ef 4 ai7 Memory is managed automatically To temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory move the slider Total main memory 61 60 MB Storage Program Allocated 30 80 MB Allocated 30 80 ME Inuse 1 55 MB Inuse 11 40 MB Free 29 25 MB Free 19 40 MB Main Storage Card Running Programs E Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large Files using storage memory E Figure 3 36 Memory Window Main Tab 2 To adjust RAM allocation move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If you don t have enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If your terminal is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory 3 Tap ok Note Resetting your terminal can make additional storage or program memory available If you continue to experience memory problems reset your terminal Programs supplied with the terminal are located in ROM and remain after a hard reset Programs you install are located in RAM and need to be reinstalled after a hard reset If you have trouble reinstalling programs adjust RAM allocation 3 40
224. ing with other devices ES CtlPanel Example 4r 2 3 24 K3 115200 Default aff pas Figure B 13 Communication Settings Screen Tap Portto select the appropriate communication settings to be used by ActiveSync Scroll through the communication settings to select the appropriate value B 10 Demo Program Audio Settings Select Audio Settings on the Control Panel to specify the beeper volume and view the version numbers for the Audio and Notify APIs ES CtPanel Example 4 7 2 3 25 X Audio Settings Low API Version 00 01 Notify API Version 00 00 CT T T T Jens Figure B 14 Audio Settings Screen e Tap Beeper Volume to toggle the beeper volume between low medium and high As you change the value the beeper sounds to demonstrate the level e API Version displays the version number of the Audio API e Notify API Version displays the version number of the Notify API PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Scanner Settings Select Scanner Settings on the Control Panel to specify scanner related parameters B 12 ES CtlPanel Example 4r 2 3 27 XO Scanner Settings Selected Scanner Reader Params Interface Params Scan Params Device Info Scanner Version aff 3 pag cel Figure B 15 Scanner Settings Screen Selected Scanner displays the value of the selected scanner Tap Reader Parameters to view and modify the v
225. ion loaded on the client Once the upload process is complete the AirBEAM Smart Client closes the FTP session with the server The AirBEAM Smart Client can launch an FTP session with the server either manually when initiated by the user or automatically 9 10 AirBEAM Smart Manual Synchronization 1 Configure the AirBEAM Smart Client See Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client on page 9 4 2 From the main AirBEAM CE window tap File Synchronize 3 Once connected the AirBEAM Synchronize window appears AirBEAM Synchronize i Processing packages e The Status List displays status messages that indicate the _ connectina i cC tian 811 progress of the synchronization process Disconnecting e Tap OK to return to the Main Menu This button remains inactive until the synchronization process is complete Tap Retry to restart the synchronization process This button is activated only if there is an error during the synchronization process Automatic Synchronization The AirBEAM Smart Client can be configured to launch automatically using the Misc 1 Preference tab see Misc 1 Tab on page 9 7 When setting automatic synchronization use the Auto load drop down list to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client should be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted Refer to Misc 1 Tab on page 9 7 for instructions on enabling Auto Sync 9 11 C PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs P
226. iri ACER RR ee RU keane BOT Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 Us ae AA AA eee es TERR ee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ere PG Mobile GO pag kA KG eo Ses WANG OE KAG DAGA EE ORG KSAMA Seed eds eae wise AA PEE 5 6 crop Pr M U 5 13 sa Ri AAP TET TT TUTTI LINO ell Lui ua aka I CREE DECR ERR BAKED EGRE RUE ee eee eee eee BANK NAT EINE Pe eda er dat Erde Sa ud ps AE E PO dcr RU al eicere dod d d Epod e ET red a Now Pre PP LBIBIIE lis s sped oho 3 Re PXWAT Xd PRRCeeqiqzedxdqencFE Peperore el Pm PESE eE coewdos S RETAOHRE RDIHUEA UE d EHE Po ER Ue da PER 5 21 Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File t CEDERE NE 5 22 Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 labis a ia ioca 9030093 93 E E YRERS WAR RE Sooke re Ob 545955446 ETCPRTEPENA VET M Mobile COMPANION es dre atr dad xa ba dx eee gt us avr ccu m OPERE n ng zd EX ee ee ee TOT UT TE TITIO DU ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Sue OR oua Ee ce RC SORS EE Pd eens EP TES 3 4 KG Oe skye beens NA asil AA PAPA AA AA AA 6 25 Creating a New Profile MM 6 26 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Deleting a Profile eua ce ae BK nee eb kee ene eaten EXE REG 4 X dub KAG KAKA BAKA KA 6 26 Aei le te gohan ea kee AA rs eee es APA 6 26 Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File 0 0 0 ee ns 6 27
227. iry procedure the paging unit has timing and frequency information about the page scan of the paged unit For this reason the time to establish the connection is reduced 11 Spread Rate Data Rate of the Direct Sequence Signal The spread rate data rate in inquiry and paging mode can be defined via the access code The access code is the only criterion for the system to check if there is a valid transmission or not If you regard the presence of a valid access code as one bit of information and compare it with the length of the access code of 68 bits the spread rate data rate will be 68 1 12 Spurious Emission in Hybrid Mode The dwell in hybrid mode is shorter than in data mode For this reason the spurious emissions average level in data mode is worst case The spurious emissions peak level is the same for both modes E 4 Tell Us What You Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 738 3318 or mail to Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza M S B 4 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager IMPORTANT If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number provided Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above User s Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual O Very fa
228. is required to press the OK button when the process is complete Non interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The Synchronization Dialog box is displayed but the user is not required to tap OK when the process is complete The Synchronization Dialog box terminates automatically Background the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically Nothing is displayed while the synchronization process is occurring RAM This check box specifies whether the automatic RAM management is enabled Management during the package synchronization process If enabled RAM management logic is invoked when there is not enough free disk space to download a package The RAM management logic attempts to remove any discardable AirBEAM packages resident on the client 9 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide LM p aaa Suppress This check box specifies whether the automatic insertion of a file path separator Separator character should be suppressed when the client generated server package definition file names When enabled the parameter also disables the appending of apd to the package This feature is useful for AS 400 systems in which the file path separator character is a period When this feature is enabled
229. isit shipping address Symbol Technologies AB Solna Strandvag 78 6 171 54 SOLNA Sweden Switchboard 08 445 29 00 domestic Call Center 46 8 445 29 29 international Support E Mail Sweden Support se symbol com Spain Espana Symbol Technologies S L C Peonias 2 Edificio Piovera Azul 28042 Madrid Spain 91 324 40 00 Inside Spain 34 91 324 40 00 Outside Spain If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner contact that Business Partner for service For the latest version of this guide go to http www symbol com manuals XXIV Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter Contents ec cl ae ee eer ee ea ee ee ee ee ee ee oe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 1 3 Unpacking the Terminal pec aw be ears See bh aoe See eee AA AA eee ee 1 3 Bil al a tia x aks eas nen AA Ree ee 1 4 PROCEED A Loa 2 su RI Re ee ee ee EN TI PAPA ee 1 6 orante ARA TIT T TT TE T AP AA 1 8 EID The 5h AA PAPA reused 1 8 Installing the Standard Battery aa 1 8 Installing the Optional Larger Capacity Battery 0 a 1 10 Charging the Terminal Battery a 1 11 Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery 0 eee eeee 1 11 Using the Serial Charging Cable ee eee eee 1 12 Using the Single Slot Serial Cradles eee eens 1 12 Using the Four Slot Cradles a aa AG enced ee ee eee bee DALE GARENA 1 14 Using the Universal Cable Cup 0 0 0 nr 1 15 LO
230. ist Figure 8 15 Accept a Bond Request Window Note The Device Pin can only be numeric characters 3 Inthe Device PIN text box enter the same PIN that was entered on the device requesting the bond The PIN must be between 1 and 16 characters 89 start gt aff 12 57 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN amp Enter a Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with PFT The same PIN must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer ko PIN requests Deep 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F ct jad IN te Figure 8 16 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN Window Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Tap Next 5 Inthe Name text box edit the name of the device requesting the bond if desired EJ settings et m2 10 31 Name the Bluetooth Device gt Enter a name For the bonded device Name BONDED1 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ct jad jV te Figure 8 17 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 6 Tap Finish 7 The bond is created and the terminal can now exchange information with the other device 8 16 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Beaming Information The terminal can beam information such as an appointment in Calendar a task in Tasks a contact ca
231. ist Available timings are 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min and 10 min Select the Turn on backlight when a button Check Box is not is pressed or the screen is tapped check selected box to turn on the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped 3 31 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Bluetooth Versions Note This feature is only available on PPT 8866 configurations To view the Bluetooth version information 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Bluetooth Versions icon e Hii Dok Bluetooth Versions Bluetooth Versions Applet Version 1 1 Bluetooth Extensions version 3 2 Bluetooth Monitor version 3 2 Radio Firmware Version 7 Radio Hardware Version 757 BD Addr D050F96394DA Figure 3 25 Bluetooth Versions Window 2 Tap ok to close the window 3 32 Settings Certificates On your terminal you can add and delete public key certificates These certificates help establish your identity when you are logging onto a secured network such as a corporate network Certificates also help establish the identity of other computers such as servers with which you connect This helps prevent unauthorized users from accessing your terminal and information You can store two types of certificates on your terminal personal certificates that establish your identity and root certificates that establish the identity of se
232. itioned as shown ensuring the battery snaps into place Getting Started 5 Replace the new battery cover by inserting the top first then pressing the bottom down firmly Figure 1 8 Secure New Battery Cover 6 Tighten the locking screw to secure the new battery cover to the terminal 7 Re attach the handstrap to the handstrap connector on the new battery cover Charging the Terminal Battery Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery Note To charge the battery for your mobile device battery and charger temperatures must be between 32 F and 104 F 0 C and 40 C Before using your terminal for the first time charge the standard lithium ion battery in the terminal for approximately 2 1 2 hours using a cradle or the serial charging cable The optional larger capacity battery charges in approximately five hours Note To ensure the quickest charging time turn the terminal off while charging Your terminal is equipped with a memory backup battery which automatically charges from the fully charged lithium ion battery This backup battery retains data in memory when the terminal s battery is removed When you first use your terminal it takes about 24 hours to charge the backup battery from the main battery a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Note f you remove your lithium ion battery before the backup battery is fully charged data may be lost For this r
233. ituation has occurred on some Novel servers To remedy the situation use static mode Static Mode If there is no DHCP server on the network the cradle must be manually configured with IP addresses and other network related information Connecting the Cradle to a Network To set up network communications 1 Ensure there is a DHCP server accessible to the cradle on the subnet 2 Connect one end of a standard 10 Base T network cable to the connector labelled Host on the back of the cradle Connect the other end of the cable to a subnet hub Ethernet Cable To Ethernet hub Figure 4 12 Connecting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 4 15 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Configure the cradle See Configuring the Cradle for DHCP Address Mode on page 4 16 or Configuring the Cradle for Static Mode on page 4 18 4 Power up the cradle the cradle performs a power up sequence then attempts to collect its network parameters from the DHCP server While collecting network parameters all LEDs flash green Once configuration completes all LEDs shut off If configuration of the cradle from the DHCP server fails all LEDs flash red The cradle retries the DHCP request every 10 minutes Configuring the Cradle for DHCP Address Mode 1 Start a terminal emulation session for the cradle a Connect the modular end of cable p n 170013 000 and a null modem adapter between the expansion
234. kbox is disabled Connection Settings X m Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this J mn ter am computer Status Device connected Get Connected cow Status COM port is available v Allow USE connection with this desktop computer Status USB is available v Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer Status Network is available Status icon vw Show status icon in Taskbar ea tap Figure 12 10 ActiveSync Connection Settings Window 14 In TCM press the Load button on the TCM toolbar The Load Terminal Dialog window appears Load Terminal Dialog p E x HE amp FILE TO LOAD lam FilesiSymbol Device ConfigurationsiPPT 880001 Hex Imagestiplatfarm hex Browse Comm Port Baud Hate Protocol Unavailable ports comz 115200 NONE Multiple Hex File Download Cancel Figure 12 11 Load Terminal Dialog Window 15 If the correct hex file is not displayed in the HEX FILE TO LOAD field click Browse and navigate to the correct hex file to be downloaded 12 14 18 19 20 Configuring the Terminal When downloading more than one hex file if is recommended that they be downloaded in the following order Partition Table Splash Screen Application partition Platform partition Operating system IPL From the Comm Port drop down list select the COM port being used Ports already in us
235. ket Excel such as an expense report or mileage log tap Start Programs Pocket Excel New A blank workbook appears Or if you ve selected a template for new workbooks in the Options dialog box that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided You can open only one workbook at a time when you open a second workbook you ll be asked to save the first You can save a workbook in a variety of formats including Pocket Excel pxl and Excel xls Pocket Excel lists the files stored on your terminal Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of or send a file tap and hold a file in the list then select the appropriate action from the pop up menu 10 24 Applications Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools such as formulas functions sorting and filtering To display the toolbar tap View Toolbar Cell contents appear here as you enter them Format button AutoSum button Zoom button 5 Tabi a w e F y u11 0 b1EL1 CAP a sjd fjg h j K I z Shift z x C jv b n m 7 cujan te Mew Edit View Format Tools Figure 10 19 Using Pocket Excel If your workbook contains sensitive information you can protect it with a password Open the workbook tap Edit Password Every time you open the workbook you must enter the password so choose one easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess Tips for Working in Pocket Excel When workin
236. klight 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon Brightness tab r 1 EJ Symbol Settings r 4 41 ok Brightness Level sees ET Figure 3 54 Symbol Settings Window Brightness Tab 2 Select one of the brightness levels listed in Table 3 10 from the Brightness Level drop down list Table 3 10 Brightness Level Settings Power save Power saving mode Default after hard reset Low Bright Slightly dark High Bright Slightly bright Super Bright Very bright Note Backlight brightness goes to Power save automatically when the battery is low regardless of the setting 3 60 Settings Wireless Adapter Control Note This feature is only available on PPT 8846 and PPT 8866 configurations This feature can also be controlled by an application via APIs Refer to the Device Configuration Package DCP for the PPT 8800 for more information To turn the Spectrum24 wireless radio on or off 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Wireless Adapter Control icon E WLAN Control et 42825 D Wireless Adapter Control Driver Version 3 181 Hardware Version 3 00 Firmware version F3 91 71 MAC Address 00 AD F8 63 63 D6 Wireless Adapter Status Radio On O Radio OFF Use Symbol Settings Wakeups to modify Wake On LAN settings E Figure 3 55 Wireless Adapter Control Window 2 Tap the Radio On button to turn the wireless radio on 3 Tap the Radio Off button to turn the wireles
237. l 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D I T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj IN te Figure 8 46 My Connection Window 8 35 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 14 In the User name text box enter the user name for this connection 15 In the Password text box enter the password for this connection 16 In the Domain text box enter the domain for this connection if required 17 Tap Finish 18 Tap the Connection icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen An X indicates that the terminal is not connected 19 The Connectivity dialog box appears with the AP connection just created Tap the phone number to start connecting Figure 8 47 Connecting to a Bluetooth AP Note Multiple connections may be listed Tap on the phone number of the AP connection 20 Depending on the AP and connection settings entering a passkey and or a password may be required 8 36 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 21 If a password is required and it was not saved the Network Log On screen appears 1 E Logon to Server er aff 1 49 Network Log On Resource My Connection C Save password 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T caPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F ead KL Nie Eg Figure 8 48 Network Log On Window 22 Enter the Password and tap ok 23 The terminal atte
238. l Panel and change the setting if you need a longer delay before the automatic shutoff feature activates Battery is depleted Replace the battery Battery cover is Replace the battery cover removed Tapping the window LCD screen not aligned Re calibrate the screen See Screen on buttons or icons does not correctly activate the corresponding feature The system is hung Soft reset the system To perform a soft reset see Resetting the Terminal on page 2 36 13 11 dan PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 13 1 Troubleshooting Your Terminal continued Wehen Case Sdn A message appears stating Too many files stored on Delete unused memos and records You that your terminal memory is full Beamed data does not transmit When receiving beamed data an out of memory message appears 13 12 the terminal Too many applications installed on the terminal Terminals too close together or too far apart Insufficient room lighting Not enough free memory available for receiving data can save these records on your host computer If you have installed additional applications on your terminal remove them to recover memory Select Start Settings Control Panel Double tap the Remove Programs icon Select the unused program and tap Remove Confirm that the terminals are at least 5 inches and at most 39 inches apart Also
239. l follow the appropriate instructions below for your specific phone 1 Motorola Timeport 270C a On the phone press MENU b Scroll to Settings then press SELECT 7 44 2070220 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Scroll to Connection then press ON On Bluetooth Link press SELECT Scroll to Devices then press SELECT Choose your terminal then press EDIT Scroll to Access Ask then press CHANGE Scroll to Automatic then press SELECT Press DONE Nokia 3650 7650 On the phone press MENU Scroll to Connectivity then press Options gt DM OO O 9 amp 9 The Open option should be highlighted Press Select The Bluetooth option should be highlighted Press Options The Open option should be highlighted Press Select g h Nokia 6310 8910 8910i a nana Scroll to the right tab to access the Paired devices list Highlight your terminal then press Options Scroll to Set as authorised then press Select In the confirmation screen press Yes On the phone press MENU Scroll to 10 Bluetooth then press SELECT Scroll to 4 View Paired Devices then press SELECT Highlight the Pocket PC then press OPTIONS Scroll to 3 Request Connection Authorization then press NO 7 45 C PPT 8800 with Microsoff Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Socket OBEX This section explains how to use the Socket object exchange OBEX application to trade files with another Bluetooth device that supports OBEX The OBEX a
240. le looks for files with a CPY extension on the FFS partition These files are text files containing the source and destination for the desired files to be copied separated by gt Non FFS Partitions Non FFS Partitions include additional software and data pre loaded on your terminal that can be upgraded Unlike FFS Partitions these partitions are not visible when the operating system is running They also contain system information Non FFS partitions include the following e Windows CE The complete Windows CE operating system is stored on Flash devices If necessary the entire OS image may be downloaded to the terminal using files provided by Symbol The current OS partition on the terminal is included as part of the TCM installation package Any upgrades must be obtained from Symbol This partition is mandatory for the terminal e Splash Screen a bitmap smaller than 16 Kb displayed as the terminal hard resets You may download a customized screen to display see Configuring the Terminal on page 12 1 e IPL Initial Program Loader This program interfaces with the host computer and allows you to download via cradle or serial cable any or all of the partitions listed above as well as updated versions of IPL Use caution downloading updated IPL versions incorrect downloading of an IPL causes permanent damage to your terminal IPL is mandatory for the terminal e Partition Table Identifies where each partition is loaded in the te
241. lect the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC addresses of the other terminals in the network their operating mode PSP or CAM their transmit rate their supported data rate and the length of time an 6 22 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 adapter has been out of the Ad Hoc network Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network performance and terminal membership data ES Mobile Companion r 2 10 known Peers Info 1P status Status Peers E Figure 6 17 Mobile Companion Peers Tab Setting Options Select Options from the Mobile Companion menu to access AP and Ad Hoc networks disable profile roaming and enable system sounds ar af 2 12 Optional Settings Access AP networks Access Ad Hoc networks Disable Profile Roaming Enable Sounds Enable Rogue AP Detection Change Password Figure 6 18 Mobile Companion Option Settings 6 23 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 1 6 24 select the Access AP networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks window see Finding WLANs on page 6 6 These are the APs available to the terminal profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks window to display the AP networks available to the terminal select the Access Ad Hoc networks check box to display available
242. less ActiveSync Status Connecting to Host Figure 7 52 Connecting to Host 4 After a successful connection is made the status dialog indicates Connected Connected to Wireless ActiveSync Wireless ActiveSync Status Connected Figure 7 53 Connected to Host 5 Now you are ready to synchronize files ActiveSync with Undiscovered Computer To ActiveSync with a computer that the terminal has not discovered 1 Tap Bluetooth icon Bluetooth ActiveSync A Bluetooth device search automatically begins ES New Bluetooth Devices 2 53 Bluetooth Device Search Looking For Bluetooth device s Time remaining To perform the search again tap Refresh Tap Cancel to abandon this operation PO save selection For Future use E Figure 7 54 Searching for Bluetooth Devices 7 39 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 Choose a computer from the list and tap Select If the computer is not listed make sure the computer is discoverable and tap Refresh to search again En Bluetooth Devices Device Name L E105DAP z28164085e Choose the desired PC and tap Select IF the desired PC is nat shown tap Find to search For ane that may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Ela Figure 7 55 Select ActiveSync Device 3 The service discovery phase begins 4 The terminal attempts to connect to the selected host computer Connect to Wireless Activ
243. less Network With a PPT 8846 or PPT 8866 terminal you can connect to the Internet across a wireless network To set up a wireless connection 1 Tap the Mobile Companion icon on the task tray The Mobile Companion menu appears Mobile Companion Menu Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Mobile Companion Options icon Figure 4 6 Mobile Companion Menu 2 Tap Find WLANs The Mobile Companion window appears Mobile Companion BY et 421042 Available WLAN Networks Available WLAN Networks ian RB 23456 Figure 4 7 Mobile Companion Window 4 29 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 The terminal tries to locate Access Points APs in the area When it locates a wireless LAN s the ESSID name displays in the Available WLAN Networks list 4 Tap the ESSID name and then tap Connect 5 The Mobile Companion Mode tab appears Mobile Companion Profile Name 802 11 ESSID E Network e ff 12 01 Wireless LAN Mode Profile Mame 123456 807 11 ESSID 123456 Operating Mode Infrastructure Operating Mode Infrastructure Country USA nG Made Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 gt E Figure 4 8 Mobile Companion Mode Tab 6 The profile name and ESSID name appears in the respective fields 7 Select Infrastructure from the Operating Mode drop down list Note Mobile Companion 3 9 2 contains an Authentication and E
244. less battery power Uses less battery power Encryption IP Contig Power ale Encryption IP Contig Power ale E E Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 6 11 Mobile Companion Power Tab Adjusting the Radio Transmission Power level enables expanding or confining the transmission area with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby Reducing a coverage area in high traffic areas improves transmission quality by reducing the number of noises in that coverage area e In Infrastructure mode there are two transmission power options e Select Automatic to use the AP power level Automatic is the default mode for terminals operating in Infrastructure mode e Select Power Plus to set the terminal transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP e n Ad Hoc mode there are five transmission power options e Select Maximum power to set the terminal to the highest transmission power level Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby Additionally use the maximum power level when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area 6 16 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 e Select 5096 2596 or 1096 to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum power level e Select Minimum power to set the terminal to the lowest transmission power level Use the minimum
245. leted and Sent Items folders depends on the options you selected In the message list tap Tools Options On the Message tab select your options To organize messages into additional folders tap Tools Manage Folders to create new folders To move a message to another folder in the message list tap and hold the message then tap Move to on the pop up menu Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync SMS POP3 or IMAP4 If you use ActiveSync e mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with your terminal You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the server For example if you move two messages from the Inbox folder to a folder named Family and you have designated Family for synchronization the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder You can then read the messages while away from your host computer If you use SMS messages are stored in the Inbox folder If you use POP3 and you move e mail messages to a folder you created the link is broken between the messages on your terminal and their copies on the mail server The next time you connect the mail server notes the messages missing from the terminal Inbox and deletes them from the server This p
246. list labeled All Contacts by default and select the type of contact to display To show all contacts again select All Contacts To view a contact not assigned to a category select None e To view the names of companies your contacts work for in the contact list tap View By Company The number of contacts that work for that company appears to the right of the company name e Tap Start Find enter the contact name select Contacts for the type then tap Go Using the Summary Screen When you tap a contact in the contact list a summary screen displays Tap Edit to change the information Contacts Adam Gabor Programmer RAD Inspired Technologies View contact details 206 555 1212 Work tel 111 First St Work addr Tap to view notes Edit Tools Tap to change contact information Figure 10 6 Contacts Summary Screen 10 8 Applications Tasks Use Tasks to keep a to do list Select the category of tasks you want displayed in the list Select the sort order of the list Indicates high priority Priority Buy birthday gift Call Maria Proof l l l roof new proposa Tap to display or edit Create Copy the task details Delete Task Tap and hold to display a Beam Task pop up menu of actions Mew Tools Tap to create a new contact Figure 10 7 Task Application Note To change the way information displays in the list tap Tools Options To create a task 1 Tap Start Ta
247. lithium ion battery handstrap attached to the terminal case stylus in the stylus silo Quick Reference Guide Inspect the equipment for damage If you are missing any equipment or if you find any damaged equipment contact the Symbol Technologies Support Center immediately See page xxii for contact information Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Parts of the Terminal Scan LED Exit Window LCD Display Right Scan Trigger shown Figure 1 1 Front View 1 4 Getting Started Stylus Silo Infrared IR Port Handstrap Connector Battery Compartment Speaker Reset Button Left Scan Trigger Tether Microphone Battery Cover Locking Screw Handstrap Connectors Figure 1 2 Back View PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Accessories Table 1 1lists the accessories available for he PPT 8800 Series terminals Note For specific part numbers for PPT 8800 Series accessories visit the PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs accessory web page htip www symbol com products mobile computers ppt8800acc html Table 1 1 Accessories Spare standard lithium ion Spare standard 3 7V 1700 mAh lithium ion battery battery Larger capacity lithium ion Optional 3 7V 3400 mAh lithium ion battery with replacement battery kit battery cover Stylus Performs pen functions Universal Cable Cup Connects to
248. loper Kit v1 0 for Basic eVC4 Samples evc basic HTML Help APIs Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1 0 for eVC4 Symbol Libraries LIB Program Files Windows CE Tools wce420 POCKET PC 2003 Lib armv4 Symbol Headers H Program Files Windows CE Tools wce420 POCKET PC 2003 Include armv4 Software Installation on Development PC Table 11 1 SMDK for eCV4 Contents and Location Continued Components Directory Location Start Menu Documents and Settings All Users Start Menu Programs Readme Help Samples WEB Updates The SMDK for NET contains the components listed in Table 11 1 Table 11 2 SMDK for NET Contents and Location Components Directory Location Class library Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio NET assemblies 2003 CompactFrameworkSDK v1 0 5000 Windows CE Forms source code Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE Source Sample applications Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE Samples Help files Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE Help Files Updates to native Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows drivers CE DriverUpdates CAB files Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE MassDeployment The DCP contains the components listed in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 DCP Contents and Locations Directory Location TCM and INI file Program Fil
249. losed the application The Visual C C sample scanning application enables the terminal s scanner allows the user to change scan parameters and displays scanned data To access the Scan demo tap Scan on the Symbol Launcher window ES ScanSamp2 Example 2 9 32 IX Evt Waiting for Trigger File Help Scanning Figure B 3 Scan Sample Screen Scanning Data Fields After a bar code is scanned the following data appears in the screen Data displays the data encoded in the scanned bar code Type indicates the hex type scanned SAC indicates the scanner being used and the bar code type scanned e g Code 128 Time displays the time the bar code was scanned Len indicates the number of digits in the bar code Evt indicates the status of the application Waiting for Trigger or Scanning B 3 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Scanning Options The following options are available in the Scan screen e Scan provides an alternative to the trigger buttons on the terminal e View displays the bar code content in a separate screen e Params is used to change scanning parameter options such as e beep time length of decode beep e beeper frequency tone e LED on time length of time LED remains on upon decode e Code ID AIM Symbol e Wav File sound of decode beep e Codes selects the code types the terminal is able to decode and sets the options for each code t
250. lot cradle 1 12 1 15 snap on autocharger 1 6 snap on DEX cable 1 6 snap on printer cable 1 6 SOIT TOS oux xkiueeREP ERES ened 2 36 8 4 software version 3 26 sound cta Ney MR 3 22 zig APAPAP PAA B 11 8 AAP TT 3 4 spare batteries charging a 1 18 spare battery ACL PEP nC a one 1 18 specifications cekaksexpbteechagsekustes C 1 Spectrum24 eee ee eee 5 3 6 3 ID QC AA AGA ANA II TOT 2 14 splash screen 12 24 DOMIN 244555408948 bb eRe 12 21 ION cuoi quea gargs qx OR Ea ones 12 21 Start menu selecting programs 2 21 start Menu iuuesaazetsazri AGA KAHEL eas 3 14 starting the terminal 1 8 1 21 static issn ic dewnddwcw anand 4 32 5 11 6 14 Oolalli amp crucu RE R 5 5 6 5 status ICONS dah a AGA dE ce EA 2 13 2 14 SUMA 5 55245 AA AA 1 3 2 4 subnet mask 5 11 6 15 RICH NAGBABAGA BAKA AKA TOT T 8 4 suspend mode ocad eere osa ERA RPRSES 7 4 Symbol Mobility Developer s Kit 1 7 11 3 Symbol settings syam wa Res 3 6 3 52 symbol support center xxii T task ray KONG v 2 14 tasks application 10 9 summary screen 10 11 ii EE 12 3 building hex image 12 7 defining properties 12 5 error messages 12 20 file browser wind
251. low Flashing Red Error communication did not start Fast Flashing Red Warning Terminal inactivity timeout The terminal did not finish data synchronization or had an open connection for more than 15 minutes This time is programmable in the cradle flash parameters Solid Green Terminal is present in the slot and communication is complete All LEDs Flashing Red Failed automatic cradle configuration via local DHCP Service 4 25 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using the Universal Cable Cup 1 Ensure that ActiveSync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created See nstalling ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 2 Start ActiveSync if it is not running on the host computer To start select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears 4 Microsoft ActiveSync BE xl File View Tools Help Bg E Details Explore Options e o Sync Stop Pocket PC2003 Not connected Information Type Status ica Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 3 ActiveSync Not Connected Note Every terminal should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same name See Device ID on page 3 27 for instructions on changing the device name Ensure that locking tabs on the cable cup are in the open position up Insert the terminal into the cable cup
252. luetooth icon Turn Transmitter OFF Turn Transmitter OFF Get Connected Advanced Features rh Bluetooth ActiveSync Bluetooth LAN Access Transfer via Bluetooth F About Figure 7 1 Bluetooth Menu Turn Transmitter Off 7 3 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 2 The Bluetooth radio transmitter turns off The Bluetooth icon becomes gray as well as relevant menu options Turn Transmitter ON Get Connected Advanced Features a Bluetooth ActiveSync Bluetooth LAN Access Transfer via Bluetooth About Figure 7 2 Bluetooth Menu Turning Transmitter On 3 To turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter back on tap the gray Bluetooth icon 4 Select Turn Transmitter ON Note When the terminal is placed in suspend mode the Bluetooth radio turns off When the terminal resumes it take approximately 10 seconds for the Bluetooth radio driver to re initialize the radio 7 4 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Connecting to a Bluetooth Phone The Get Connected Wizard guides you through a one time setup process that prepares the terminal and a Bluetooth enabled phone for connection The wizard varies depending on the phone Ericsson Nokia 6210 NTT DoCoMo Sony Phones 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Get Connected The Get Connected Wizard window appears h m2 10 25 Get Connected with socket Bluetooth Welcome to the Bluetooth Get Connected Wizard This Wizard sets up your
253. ment on your host computer Drawing Mode In drawing mode use your stylus to draw on the screen Gridlines appear as a guide When you lift your stylus after the first stroke a drawing box indicates the boundaries of the 10 22 Applications drawing Every subsequent stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing For more information see Drawing on the Screen on page 2 31 Select Shape on the pop up menu to convert objects to proper shapes E Pocket Word Resize an object by dragging the selection handles Tap to select formatting options such as line weight fill color and line color Tap an arrow to see your choices Pen button Figure 10 18 Drawing on the Screen in Pocket Word Recording Mode In recording mode you may embed a recording into your document Recordings are saved as wav files For more information see Hecording a Message on page 2 32 For more information on using Pocket Word tap Start Help 10 23 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Pocket Excel Pocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on your host computer to provide easy access to copies of your workbooks You can create new workbooks on your terminal or copy workbooks from your host computer to your terminal Synchronize workbooks between your host computer and your terminal so you have up to date content in both locations To create a new workbook in Poc
254. miliar Slightly familiar X Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Numerics canine 9 4 128 bit shared key 5 8 5 9 package builder 9 3 15 key keypad 2 2 33 staging AA 9 12 40 bit shared key 002 5 8 5 9 Synchronization with server 9 10 AirBEAM configuration Slap PERA dx AA 9 7 A Misc 2 tab oouo 9 9 EP AG AGA eee ee bee KAL FEST SE 3 26 Packages 2 tab 9 5 access DONIS izucascisessaseseipeee 4 30 Server tab 0 a 9 6 accessories sos caesi AA PAA 1 6 1 7 alam a 8 97 cables aaa 1 6 aligning screen 000 eae B 9 holster aaa 1 7 alpha key mode 00 0000 naaa 2 9 large capacity battery LR ui o E 1 6 applications serial charging cable 1 6 button assignment 12 25 serial cradle 1 6 1 7 calendar 2 2020 0 0 dona 10 3 snap on autocharger errr ee eee ee 1 6 meeting requests eee 10 5 snap on DEX Cable aas ceeded decides 1 6 summary screen 10 5 snap on printer cable 1 6 cc A o 10 6 spare battery C P 1 6 summary screen 10 8 stylus csse 1 6 jo 10 14 trigger NANOS AA AA 1 7 connecting to e mail
255. mpts to connect to the AP f r 4 20 Pa F to AP via Bluetooth J Using Bluetooth Phone Dialing 555 1717 Figure 8 49 Connecting Dialog Box Automatic Connection Some Bluetooth enabled phones allow automatic connections to be set up with devices they have successfully bonded with without requiring a password to be entered manual for 8 37 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide each connection attempt To set up automatic connections between the phone and the terminal follow the appropriate instructions below for the specific phone Ts 8 38 Motorola Timeport 270C TO o gp a p No mo goo p g h On the phone press MENU Scroll to Settings then press SELECT Scroll to Connection then press ON On Bluetooth Link press SELECT Scroll to Devices then press SELECT Choose the terminal then press EDIT Scroll to Access Ask then press CHANGE Scroll to Automatic then press SELECT Press DONE kia 3650 7650 On the phone press MENU Scroll to Connectivity then press Options The Open option should be highlighted Press Select The Bluetooth option should be highlighted Press Options The Open option should be highlighted Press Select Scroll to the right tab to access the Paired devices list Highlight the terminal then press Options Scroll to Set as authorised then press Select In the confirmation screen press Yes N
256. must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer ko PIN requests Dese nue 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F ct jad ji te Eg Figure 8 7 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN Window Note f the device to which the terminal is bonding does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the terminal Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Note The Device Pin can only be numeric characters 7 Inthe Device PIN text box enter a PIN between 1 and 16 characters and tap Next The terminal sends the PIN request to the device for bonding 8 When prompted the same PIN must be entered on the other device When the PIN is entered correctly on the other device the Name the Bluetooth Device window appears Eig settings Er d2 10 31 Name the Bluetooth Device gt Enter a name For the bonded device Name BONDED 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p caPja s a f ajn ijkjij shift z x c v b n m ruj jV te Figure 8 8 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 9 Inthe Name text box edit the name of the other device if desired 10 Tap Finish The bonded device appears in the list AF settings et 4 1042 Bluetooth To cre
257. n Note Some programs that accept writing do not have the Pen button See the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode 2 2 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Converting Writing to Text To convert your writing to text tap Tools Recognize To convert certain words select them before tapping Recognize on the Tools menu or tap and hold the selected words then tap Recognize on the pop up menu If a word is not recognized it is left as writing Tr HF Notes PET Gh Cut Copy Paste M Clear Recognize Alternates Messe a Select the text you want to convert and The writing is tap Recognize on the pop up menu turned into text Figure 2 25 Writing on the Screen If the conversion is incorrect select different words from a list of alternates or return to the Original writing Tap and hold the incorrect word only On the pop up menu tap Alternates 2 28 Operating the PPT 8800 A list of alternate words appears Tap the word you want to use or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing Tap to return to your original writing Or tap the word you want to use report Report E H New Edit Tools E Figure 2 26 Alternate List Writing Tips Write neatly Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line Cross off the t and write apostrophes below the to
258. n 24 Repeat for each hex file 25 Hard reset the terminal see Performing a Hard Reset on page 2 36 when all partitions are downloaded successfully 26 On the development computer select File Exitto exit TCM 12 17 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Error Messages IPL Error Detection While receiving data IPL performs many checks on the data to ensure that the data is received correctly If an error is detected IPL immediately aborts the download and reports the error on the terminal IPL VER X XX Download Failed Error Condlrbtion Press Enter to return to Main Menu Figure 12 14 IPL Error Message This screen displays until you press the Enter key Once the screen is acknowledged IPL returns to the Main Menu screen to wait for a new selection 12 18 Configuring the Terminal The cause of the error displays under the Download Failed indication The errors that can be reported and the probable cause of the error are described in Table 12 2 Table 12 2 IPL Error Messages NEN NENNEN a Invalid Image This error occurs if another record is received before the Header Record Ensure the Header Record is the first record downloaded Partition Not Defined The destination code is a part of the Header record and is used as an index into the partition table The partition table entry located at this index contains partition information for the data d
259. n non volatile storage and is not lost on a hard reset e g when power is removed for a long period of time otandard tools such as ActiveSync can be used to copy files to and from the FFS partitions They appear as the Application and Platform folders to the ActiveSync explorer This is useful when installing applications on the terminal Applications stored in the Application folder are retained even when the terminal is hard reseted just as the PPT 8800 Demo program is retained in memory 12 22 Configuring the Terminal Windows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder residing in volatile storage Windows CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage There are two device drivers included in the Windows CE image to assist developers in configuring the terminal following a hard reset RegMerge and CopyFile RegMerge dll RegMerge dll is a built in driver that allows registry edits to be made to the Windows CE Registry Regmerge dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files reg files in certain Flash File System folders during a hard reset It then merges the registry changes that are in these files into the system registry located in RAM Since the registry is re created on every hard reset from the default ROM image the RegMerge driver is necessary to make registry modifications persistent over hard resets RegMerge is configured to look in three specific folders for reg files in the
260. ncryption tab Version 3 9 1 only contains an Encryption tab Refer to Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 for information on Mobile Companion version 3 9 1 settings and to Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 for information on Mobile Companion Version 3 9 2 settings 4 30 Communication 8 Tap the Encryption and or Authentication tabs EF a A 1 21 Authentication KDC krbtgt Kerberos Options Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 gt E Figure 4 9 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab Mobile Companion Mode Encryption 1P Config Power ngorthm 260K ShoredKey DD Wc awe Adapter will use this key Mode Authentication Encryption IP col 4 gt E Figure 4 10 Mobile Companion Encryption Tab 9 Select the encryption and or authentication information used on the wireless network Refer to Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 for information on Mobile Companion version 3 9 1 settings and to Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 for information on Mobile Companion Version 3 9 2 settings See your network administrator for this information 4 31 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 10 Tap the IP Config tab 11 12 13 14 4 32 AF Network ar PEZE IP Configuration Authentication Encryption IP Config Pq 4 gt E Figur
261. ncryption key to the default values Note The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used As a security precaution after setting the key values for the network the digits are replaced with asterisks within the encryption key fields If the associated AP is using an optional Passkey the active terminal profile is required to use one as well The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption tab The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire 40 bit 10 character or 128 bit 26 character Hex digit string Tap Passkey to display the Passkey window Enter an easy to remember 4 to 26 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm Tap OK The AP transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields These are the new WEP keys for the terminal profile Once displayed in the WEP key fields the adapter profile behaves as if the keys were entered manually 5 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Kerberos LEAP Kerberos is a different form of 128 bit data security whereby a terminal is required to have its request for AP resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the AP to transmit and receive data with the associated terminal Select Kerberos and enter the key distribution center KDC and
262. nd port translation is that multiple slots can simultaneously share the one network IP address of the cradle Accessing the outside network with the CRD8800 4000E is not the same as a direct connection to the outside network When using NAPT many network services do not function at all Since NAPT modifies addresses in TCP IP and UDP IP headers it is insufficient for network services that embed IP addresses inside packet data Also the CRD 8800 4000E assumes that terminals sending data with one TCP or UDP source port expects to receive replies on the same port number but some network services may reply with data over a range of ports These network services are unusable with the CRD8800 4000E Also some services listen to incoming requests from the network Since port numbers are usually fixed for a given service no terminals can be set up as listeners Note Turn off NAPT mode before using ActiveSync Inter Connecting Cradles Up to four 4 slot serial cradles CRD8800 4000S may be inter connected daisy chained with the CRD8800 4000E using an RJ 45 10 to RJ 45 10 inter cradle cable p n 70349 001 This cable is required for each cradle to be connected WARNING Each cradle must have its own power supply Any other method of power hookup is unsafe To inter connect cradles 1 Connect the power supply to the second 4 slot cradle Note You must use a 8 VDC 5 A power supply on the serial cradle being connected to the ethernet cr
263. nfrared connection to this COM port d Click OK 4 22 Communication Note Before communicating through an ethernet connection you must create a partnership between your terminal and your host computer See Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 for detailed instructions Configuration of the Terminal When you insert a terminal into the cradle the cradle provides a direct connect RAS service You need to configure each terminal for use with the cradle just as you would configure any remote client to connect to an Internet Service Provider ISP To configure the terminal install eConnect See Installing eConnect on page 4 8 1 On the terminal tap Start Settings System eConnect and ensure the following settings are made er ox ok eConnect Settings v3 2 1 Use eConnect for Docking Events When Docked Launch ActiveSync Connect to The Internet Launch application Serial Port Baud Rate 115200 m C Query cradle for DNS domain Bypass RF connection if present Figure 4 1 eConnect Settings Window 2 Tap OK 4 23 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Communication To communicate with a host computer over a network 1 Insert the terminal into the cradle or a slot on an interconnected serial cradle This initiates the communication between the terminal and the host computer to automatically ActiveSync the terminal All local slots in the
264. ng Profiles Select WLAN Profiles from the Mobile Companion menu to view connect to create and edit a profile A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined operating parameters available for use in various network environments When the WLAN Profiles window initially displays existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list box Figure 6 20 Mobile Companion WLAN Profiles Select a profile from the list box and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile The active profile displays the transmit and receive icon to the left Once selected the terminal is using the authentication encryption ESSID IP Config and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile Editing a Profile Select a profile from the list box and tap Edit to display the Mode tab where the ESSID and operating mode can be changed for the profile Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as necessary to edit the profile power consumption and security parameters 6 25 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Creating a New Profile Tap New to display the Mode tab wherein the profile name and ESSID can be set Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security network address information and power consumption l
265. ng WLANs the P Status tab is view only with no user configurable data fields Subnet Mask Gateway DNS WIMS MAC Address Host Mame Pocket PC Signal info IP Status Ping aes E Figure 6 14 Mobile Companion IP Status Tab IP Type If DHCP was selected from the P Config tab leased IP address and network address data displays for the terminal If Static was selected the values displayed were input manually in the P Config tab on page 6 15 IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Subnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway The gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination 6 20 o uw NB Spectrum24 Network Conf
266. ngs used by programs to automatically connect to an ISP or private network Select Networks Dialing rules determine how a number is dialed From a specific location Select Location Select what your network card connects to Network Card Advanced Figure 8 26 Connections Advanced Tab 3 Tap Select Networks The Network Management window appears Programs that automatically connect to the Internet should connect using Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using My Work Network hd Exceptions are needed if aur company uses periods in intranet addresses Figure 8 27 Network Management Window Tap ok Tap the Tasks tab ii p Uh m 8 24 In the top drop down list select My ISP In the bottom drop down list select My Work Network PPT 8866 Bluetooth 8 Tap Add a new modem connection under My ISP The My Connection window appears ar aff 12 15 My Connection amp Enter a name For the connection ISP via Bluetooth Select a modem BluetoothDUN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p caPja s a f ajn ijkjij shift z x c v b n m F ct jad IN te Figure 8 28 My Connection Window 9 Inthe Enter a name for the connection text box enter a name such as SP via Bluetooth 10 In the Select a modem drop down list select BluetoothDUN 11 Tap Next Ng gt aff 12 23 My Connections gt Sele
267. ns The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab 11 Tap ok 3 49 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Remove Programs Use the Remove Programs window to remove programs that were loaded onto the terminal 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Remove Programs icon E settings et 42438 D Remove Programs Programs in storage memory Microsoft Remote Display Control Remove Total storage memory available 209957 Adjust memory allocation E Figure 3 47 Remove Programs Window 2 From the Programs in storage memory list box select the program you want to remove 3 Tap Remove Note You can only remove programs that you have installed in RAM 4 Tap ok 3 50 Settings Screen Use the Screen window to align the screen and to enable ClearType fonts 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Screen icon e 46439 Align Screen Adjust the touch screen if your device is not responding accurately to screen taps To do so tap the Align Screen button or press the Action hardware button Align Screen ClearType ClearType smoothes the edges of screen Fonts For many programs C Enable ClearType Mote You must soft resek your device For changes En bake effect Adjust input options ko improve speed and accuracy E Figure 3 48 Screen Window 2 Tap Align Screen 3 The align screen app
268. nstalled on the development PC e Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 2000 e Microsoft Embedded Visual C v4 0 with SP2 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide e Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 SDK e Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 0 or higher In order to install the SMDK for NET the following components must first be installed on the development PC Microsoft Windows 2000 or Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 Add on Pack Microsoft ActiveSync 3 7 or higher Adobe Acrobat Reader 3 0 or higher To connect Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 to terminals running Windows CE 4 1 1 Download and install the Windows CE Utilities for Visual Studio NET 2003 Add on Pack from Microsoft 2 From the Tools menu select Select Windows Device CPU and change the targeted CPU type from to ARMV4T for PPT8800 4 1 devices 3 Restart your computer to be sure that the new settings take effect The SMDK for eVC4 contains the components listed in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 SMDK for eCV4 Contents and Location Components Directory Location Readme Release Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1 0 for eVC4 Notes License C C Samples Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1 0 for Standard eVC4 Samples evc standard C C Samples Program Files Symbol Mobility Deve
269. nts Select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area The Mobile Companion window displays the available WLAN networks Ei Network e 4 1042 Available WLAN Networks Connect Figure 6 2 Available WLAN Networks 1 Select an available WLAN network from the list box 6 6 Tap Connect The Mode tab appears ar aff 12 01 Wireless LAN Mode Profile Mame 123456 807 11 ESSID 123456 Operating Mode Infrastructure Made Authentication Encryption IP col 4 gt E Infrastructure Mode ar aff 12 02 Wireless LAN Mode Profile Mame 23456 802 11 ESSID 23456 Operating Mode Ad Hac Long preamble Channel Number Made Authentication Encryption IP col 4 gt E Ad Hoc Mode Figure 6 3 Mode Tab The Profile Name and 802 11 ESSID fields are populated with the name and Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 WLAN identifier of the network connection You can change the Profile Name if desired Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the terminal profile used to transmit with either an AP or another networked computer The ESSID is the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is 32 character maximum string identifying the WLAN The ESSID assigned to the terminal is required to match the AP ESSID for the terminal to communicate with the AP Select the operating mode from the Operatin
270. o card can be set on the terminal using a registration reg file A sample reg file is provided on the SMDK Edit the file using a text editor See notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified Save this text file as SPECTRUM24DS REG Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the terminal Once this file is loaded onto the terminal these settings are restored after a hard reset Note Hefer to the SMDK for the latest sample file 0 22 Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Chapter Contents pec maa AMA KAN ee ee ee se ee eee DARNA LANG ee eee ee ee 6 3 Re se ow TCI hs AA oe eee eee 6 4 gi gcki t a eee ee ees ere ee ese ee a eee ee ere ee KAKAI eee eee eer KG 6 6 PEIUS ox ee QA ee ee ree re eee ee err er ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee NA 6 17 snip pb PAPA DO TOT AA PAA 6 23 LOG GA BP cece ces HEB AGA DL PEPERE SHAN PG KLANG dE de deb epp ees 6 25 Sing Kai AMA AA MA AA AA 6 25 ceama Mew a AA AN 6 26 Deleting a Profile eee eee enna 6 26 Aec iae huii erR kee ode ede AA Be YAS es TT TII 6 26 Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File 0 cc ccc eee ee 6 27 6 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 6 2 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Introduction Wireless LANs allow PPT 8846 and PPT 8866 terminals to communicate wirelessly and to send captured data real time to a host device Bef
271. o create a recording 1 Start the Notes application 2 Tap the Record icon to begin recording 3 Hold the terminal s microphone near your mouth or other source of sound Indicates an embedded recording Quote from Adam Tap to begin recording UU DD Ap mn to show or hide the recording toolbar Figure 2 28 Recording Screen 4 When you are finished tap the Stop button The new recording appears in the note list or as an embedded icon 5 To play a recording tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note 2 32 Operating the PPT 8800 Using My Text When using Inbox or MSN Messenger use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used messages into the text entry area To insert a message tap My Text and tap a message R3 MSN Messenger m 1 58 tok You are chatting with Adam Kim Akers says Hi Can you meek at 2 00 Adam says I have another appointment scheduled For 2 00 I can t talk right now I ll be right there I m running late Where are you Hi Goodbye Tools Chats My Text 4 E Tap to select a prewritten message Figure 2 29 Using My Text Note You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending it To edit a My Text message tap Tools Edit My Text Messages Select the message you wish to edit and make the changes Entering Information Using 15 Key Keypad The 15 key keypad uses an alphanumeric keypad that produces the 26 character alpha
272. o return to the message list From Robert Brown Subject RE Today s Meeting Sent 4 23 01 8 45 47 AM Just a reminder to bring your individual schedules for the next 2 quarters with vou We will be discussing projects and timelines Thanks Bob Tap to delete this message Tap to view the previous or next message Tap to reply to or forward this message Figure 10 13 Viewing a Message When you connect to your e mail server or synchronize with your host computer Inbox downloads by default only messages from the last three days the first 100 lines of each new message and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size The original messages remain on the e mail server or your host computer You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve completely the next time you synchronize or connect to your e mail server In the message list tap and hold the message you want to retrieve On the pop up menu tap Mark for Download The icons in the Inbox message list indicates message status You specify your downloading preferences when you set up the service or select your synchronization options You can change them at any time e Change options for Inbox synchronization using ActiveSync options For more information see ActiveSync Help 10 17 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide e Change options for direct e mail server connections in Inbox on your terminal Tap T
273. oduct Reference Guide Note Multiple connections may be listed Tap on the phone number of the connection to dial 31 Depending on the phone and connection settings entering a passkey and or a password may be required before the phone starts to dial 32 If the dial up password was not saved the Network Log On screen appears ES Logon to Server ar aff 1 49 Network Log On Resource My Connection Save password Figure 8 38 Network Log On Window 33 Enter the Password and tap ok 8 30 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 34 The device begins dialing TI 19 Start Padi PARE Connecting to AP via Bluetooth Using Bluetooth Phone Dialing 555 1717 Settings Figure 8 39 Dialing the Bluetooth Phone Dial Automatically from an Application After a dial up connection is set up the Connection Manager automatically tries to connect whenever Pocket Internet Explorer Pocket Inbox or any other program that uses a dial up connection is used To dial automatically 1 Start the program that uses a dial up connection Enter a request for receiving and or transmitting information e g in Pocket Internet Explorer enter anew URL and tap Go The terminal automatically tries to connect Note f the phone number or dialing location is wrong tap Settings Tap Manage existing connections and edit the properties of the connection 2 Depending on the phone and connection settings entering a passkey and or a
274. okia 6310 891 0 891 i a nando On the phone press MENU Scroll to 10 Bluetooth then press SELECT Scroll to 4 View Paired Devices then press SELECT Highlight the Pocket PC then press OPTIONS Scroll to 3 Request Connection Authorization then press NO PPT 8866 Bluetooth Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port There are two ways to write an RFCOMM application The first is by creating a virtual legacy COM port The second is through Winsock Microsoft recommends using Winsock The sample code that follows demonstrates how to create a Bluetooth virtual COM port Begin SetCursor LoadCursor NULL IDC WAIT Set a wait cursor memset amp pp O sizeof pp Clear the PORTEMUPortParams structure pp uiportflags RFCOMM PORT FLAGS KEEP DCD DCD ON while in piconet pp channel 1 Set to either an explicit server channel or for a server application that wants the server channel to be autobound to RFCOMM CHANNEL MULTIPLE pp flocal FALSE7 Set to FALSE for a client port that is used to creating outgoing connections pp imtu should be set to something other than the default if data payload size is larger than 128 bytes For further information on this structure refer to the Microsoft Help GetBA T 53594D421722 amp pp device Set your slave s BDADDR here nindex 87 This must be the same as the COM port number For devices that expose the stream interface the drivers are DLL
275. oltsville N Y 11742 1300 htip www symbol com manuals 72E 63154 05 Revision A February 2005
276. on Info 1P Status Peers Figure 5 13 Mobile Companion Peers Tab Setting Options Select Options from the Mobile Companion menu to enable or disable international roaming configure consumption avoidance capabilities enable system sounds and set temporary settings Mobile Companion tok Option Settings Access AP networks Access Ad Hoc networks Disable Profile Roaming Enable Sounds Change Password Figure 5 14 Mobile Companion Option Settings 1 Select the Access AP networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab These are the APs available to the terminal profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the AP networks available to the terminal 2 Select the Access Ad Hoc networks check box to display available peer adapter networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks tab These are peers available to the terminal profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks tab to display the Ad Hoc networks available to the terminal 5 19 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Select the Disable Profile Roaming checkbox to configure the adapter WLAN profile to not roam to the next available WLAN profile when the terminal moves out of range of the
277. ondable mode Refer to the device s user documentation ES Bluetooth Devices 4 m2 4 52 e The Wizard is ready to attempt bonding with the Following remote Bluetooth device Device 2 Please make sure the remote device has Bluetooth enabled and that the device is in Bondable mode Tap Next to continue Figure 7 25 BT Device Manager Window 5 Tap Next gt 6 Ifthe remote device is set up to accept bonding a Bluetooth Passkey Required window appears ES Passkey Required 4 m2 4 54 ok Dp Bluetooth Passkey The Following device wants a passkey Device 2 The same Bluetooth passkey is required on each device Please enter the passkey below and tap Reply or tap Cancel to deny this request Bluetooth passkev CO oe e 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h J k T Figure 7 26 Password Required Window 7 20 PPT 8860 Bluetooth In the Bluetooth passkey field enter the passkey Tap Reply If required enter the passkey on the other Bluetooth device When you have successfully bonded with the other device tap Finish ES Bluetooth Devices 4 m2 2 30 e Bluetooth Device socket Bonding Congratulations You have successfully bonded with the device PP18860 Tap the Finish button to exit the Wizard E Figure 7 27 Bonding Complete Window 7 21 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs View Device Proper
278. ools Options On the Accounts tab tap the account you want to change Tap and hold the account and select Delete to remove it Creating E mail Messages To create an e mail message Tap New 2 Inthe To field enter an e mail or SMS address of one or more recipients separating each with a semicolon or select a name from the contact list by tapping the Address Book icon All e mail addresses entered in the e mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book Tap to send the message Tap to show or hide the complete header New Edit My Text E Tap to show hide the recording tool Tap to display the Address Book Tap to insert common messages Figure 10 14 Creating a Message 3 Enter your message To enter preset or frequently used messages tap My Textand select a message 4 Tap Sendwhen you re finished If you re working offline the message is transferred to the Outbox folder and sent the next time you synchronize 10 18 Applications If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received tap Edit Options and select the Request SMS text message delivery notification checkbox before sending the message Managing E mail Messages and Folders By default messages are displayed in one of five folders for each account you ve created Inbox Deleted Items Drafts Outbox and Sent Items The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have been deleted on the terminal The behavior of the De
279. option None Kerberos LEAP EAP TLS PEAP from the Authentication drop down list See Table 6 2 on page 6 10 for Authentication option descriptions Mode Authentication Encryption IP cof gt Prompt for Username Password at Reset Connect C Time L Resume v nm erberos Passwort Cancel E Kerberos Authentication Credential Caching Settings Kerberos Options Figure 6 4 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab Kerberos 6 8 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Er q 1 22 Authentication EAP Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 gt E Figure 6 5 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab LEAP Tra ira L Z gt BF Network i79 Manage Certificate DH 2 29 ok Authentication Manage Certificates 7 Existing certificates Type Identifier 4 Root Class 2 Public Primar Root Class 3 Public Primar ySRoot Entrust net Certifica Root Entrust net Secure S Install View Certificates Details Delete Tap and Hold Install new certificateer aa 2 User cient 49 Root server Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col gt TLS only TLS and PEAP Ej Figure 6 6 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab EAP TLS 6 9 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide a d 1 28 AF Manage Certificate 4 2 29 ok Authentication eee Manage Certificates i n zx
280. or transfer Double tap a folder to open it There are two different ways to initiate a transfer a Select File Send to remote or Get from remote as applicable The inappropriate option should be gray b Tap the Send to remote icon or Get from remote icon as applicable The inappropriate icon should be gray A dialog box reports the status of the transfer After the transfer a copy of each selected item appears in the other device 7 93 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Create a Folder To create a folder 1 Select File Remote device or Local device Ga Bluetooth Shared Fal ef ScreenShot 10 bmp Send to remote Get EOS ean remote Remote Remote de us Delete remote Ns Create remote folder 0 WinCE File Device Help ul D NA Yh E Figure 7 77 Create Folder 2 Select Create remote folder or Create local folder as applicable 3 Enter a name for the new folder Create remote folder Ea New Folder name Figure 7 78 Create New Folder 7 94 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 4 Tapok ES Bluetooth File Explo 47 x 8 41 De Remote New Folder c Application Data cy ConnMgr cy My Documents c profiles Connected to PPTS860 WincE File Device Help Fa x NA x E Figure 7 79 New Folder in File Explorer 5 The new folder should be listed under the appropriate device Delete a File or Folder To delete a file or folder 1 Select item s that
281. ore a terminal can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN the facility must be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the terminal must be properly configured Refer to the Access Points APs documentation for instructions on setting up the required hardware Note n Symbol PPT 8866 terminals with Bluetooth Extension Version 3 2 see Figure 3 25 on page 3 32 only one radio can be on at a time Bluetooth can not be used when 802 11b is in use To enable simultaneous mode Bluetooth Extensions Version 3 3 or greater is required For information about Bluetooth wireless communication see Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth The terminal Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the wireless connection The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates terminal signal strength as follows Icon Status Excellent signal strength Very good signal strength Good signal strength Fair signal strength Poor signal strength Out of network range not associated 6 3 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Mobile Companion The Mobile Companion utility is used to configure the terminal s wireless network settings The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray The status icon changes in real time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network Tap the i
282. orer Select the Application directory Tap the filename ppt8800 demos cab A dialog box appears Enter demo and tap the OK button The demo program installs and appears in the Start menu The following options are available via the demo program Notify tests the green amber yellow LED vibrator and beeper functionality Scan sample scanning application for Visual C C Files sample file management utility Ctl Panel accesses the Control Panel screen Scan Wedge integrates bar code scanning into applications Print sample print utility About provides version number and other information for the Demo program B 1 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Exit exits the Demo program To launch the Demo program tap Start PPT 8800 Demo The PPT8800 Demo window appears EG prreso0 Demo qa 4 244 O ow Notify 3 Ctl Panel About Otl Exit Figure B 1 PPT 8800 Demo Window Notify Notify tests the LED vibrator and beeper functionality of the terminal 1 Tap the Notify button The Notify Example window appears ES Notify Example Er aff 1 71 e Notify Example Green Decode LED Amber LED Yellow LED Yibrator Beeper Co esie oo Figure B 2 Notify Window B 2 Qr mO I Scan Demo Program Select one of the items from the list Tap the On button The selected item is activated Tap the Off button Tap Exit to c
283. oth modem connection on the terminal and send information to the phone using Bluetooth The phone relays the information over the phone line and sends back to the terminal any information that was requested over the connection Once a modem connection is created to the Bluetooth phone it can be reused Prior to creating a connection ensure the following e Bluetooth phone is turned on e Bluetooth phone is discoverable Some phones may also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request For more information see the phone documentation e terminal s and phone s Bluetooth radios are turned on e terminal and phone are within range of each other 30 feet 10 meters Dial up to the Network Complete the following steps to create a new Bluetooth connection Before setting up dial up networking obtain dial up information and other necessary settings for the office network or ISP 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon The Connections window appears T ij settings Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPN server connection Set Up my proxy server E Figure 8 25 Connections Window 8 23 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Tap the Advanced tab Connections Networks are groups of setti
284. ou to collect data by scanning one dimensional bar codes including Reduced Space Symbology RSS variants To scan bar codes with the terminal 1 Ensure that a scan enabled application is loaded on the terminal 2 Aim the scan exit window at the bar code 3 Press either the right or left scan trigger Ensure the red scan beam covers the entire bar code The green scan LED lights and a beep sounds to indicate a successful decode Figure 2 31 Scanning Scan LED Indicator See Parts of the Terminal on page 1 4 for the location of the scan LED on the terminal Table 2 8 Scan LED Indicator Solid Red Laser enabled Scanning in process Solid Green Successful decode 2 35 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Resetting the Terminal If the terminal stops responding to input reset it Performing a Soft Reset A soft reset restarts the terminal and saves all stored records and entries Caution Files that remain open during a soft reset may not be retained DO NOT perform a soft reset if the terminal is suspended Press the power button to wake the terminal To perform a soft reset on the standard 6 key keypad press the Enter and Function keys while holding down either the left or right scan trigger and then release the keys To perform a soft reset on the 15 key keypad press ENTER and FUNC keys while holding down either the left or right scan trigger and then release the
285. ow 12 4 loading splash screen 12 21 script window 12 3 SIANO AAP 12 3 12 30 terminal SUP TR 3 3 hard ERE uu dui one dodi doe doe dod 2 36 power AA PAPA os 2 3 icol MM PM I 2 36 SEMIN rn dhs 2 00 SOf reset AA AAP 2 36 a li ue sack niri hende es 1 21 il AA 3 92 terminal configuration 1 8 il AAAH PAP 2439 IUS ZONG AT AE ooo TRU OVA auucsdackkado E 6 13 Today screen 2 11 3 24 Pele aM 2 26 troubleshooting waaa amak ER 13 10 infrared communications 13 12 U universal cable cup 2119 290 EP PRA 1 6 UNDADIN 24445000048 TENA EERENdGEAYS 1 3 Index using headset 2 5 Bala skill AA 2 4 using the MSR 0000 20 1 29 V KG pte hb eee ke a 5 15 6 19 volume adjusting aaa pA KGG KG NGANGA 3 22 W wakeup terminal suspend mode 3 52 warm boot 0 0 eee eee 8 4 web browser 0000 eee 10 38 OD daka sees cess eae DE ees 6 13 WINS PANAPAAN 5 11 6 14 wireless LEA TAPA 4 29 wireless LAN else 4 30 WLAN Profiles 5 5 6 5 Word ae mad hd AA haa eek er 10 20 word completion settings 3 12 writing on screen 2 26 writing settings 2i2cucdicadsienudsneke 3 13 Index 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Index 8 Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza H
286. ownloaded If the Auto Select option is selected a check is made to ensure that valid partition information exists in the partition table at this index The check verifies that the Area Name and Sector Size are both non zero If not this error occurs Wrong Partition If a specific partition is selected from the partition list and the destination code of the Header record downloaded does not match the index of that partition this error occurs Image Too Big The size of the image is also part of the Header record If the data to be written exceeds the size of the partition as indicated in the partition table this error occurs Incorrect Byte Count Image data is processed until the End Of File EOF Record Type 01 record is received This error occurs if IPL detects that the number of bytes received does not equal the number of bytes sent Unable to Verify Partition If the Receive and Verify bit is set for that partition the data Data the Flash sector erased and the data written to the Flash part is verified If this data can not be verified this error occurs Transmission Errors The following error messages may appear if an error occurs during transmission e Checksum Error occurs if an invalid checksum is detected in the record Invalid Record occurs if a record is not defined in the Symbol Hex File Format Connection Lost occurs if one of the handshaking lines is de asserted during download Address Out of Sequenc
287. p line so they are not confused with the word above Write periods and commas above the line For better recognition try increasing the zoom level to 300 using the Tools menu Leave large gaps between words so your terminal can easily tell where words begin and end Hyphenated words foreign words that use special characters such as accents and some punctuation cannot be converted If you add writing to a word to change it such as changing a 3 to an 8 after you attempt to recognize the word the writing you add is not included if you try to recognize the writing again 2 29 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Selecting Text To edit or format typed text select it by dragging the stylus across the text Cut copy and or paste text by holding the selected words then tapping an editing command on the pop up menu or by tapping the command on the Edit menu Selecting Writing To select writing to edit or format 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you want to select until the insertion point appears 2 Drag the stylus across the text If you accidentally write on the screen tap Tools Undo and try again You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it then dragging the stylus across the screen You can cut copy and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text tap and hold the selected words then tap the command from the pop u
288. p menu or select the command from the Edit menu 2 30 Operating the PPT 8800 Drawing on the Screen Drawing on the screen is similar to writing on the screen To create a drawing cross three ruled lines on your first stroke A drawing box appears Subsequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the drawing Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing New Edit Tools Pen button Figure 2 27 Drawing on the Screen Note To change the zoom level select a zoom level from the Tools menu Selecting a Drawing To select a drawing to edit or format tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle appears To select multiple drawings deselect the Pen button then drag to select the drawings you want To cut copy and paste drawings tap and hold the selected drawing then tap an editing command on the pop up menu or tap the command from the Edit menu To resize a drawing deselect the Pen button and drag a selection handle 2 31 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Recording a Message You may record a message to capture thoughts reminders and phone numbers In Calendar Tasks and Contacts you can include a recording in the Notes tab In the Notes program you can either create a stand alone recording or include a recording in a written note T
289. p menu select Delete HJ settings e 461103 Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options Te 1 Rename Mode Bonded Devices E Figure 8 12 Delete Device 8 12 PPT 8866 Bluetooth 3 Aconfirmation dialog appears Tap Yes Delete Bonding with BONDED 1 Made Bonded Devices E Figure 8 13 Delete Device Confirmation Dialog Box PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Receiving Incoming Beams By default the terminal detects incoming Bluetooth beams and prompts the user to accept them Clear the Receive all incoming beams check box to prevent the terminal from detecting or receiving beams To turn off incoming beams 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Beam icon 3 settings e 46216 Beam Receive all incoming beams Receive an infrared beam fram a Pocket PC 000 or HIPC device Ela Figure 8 14 Beam Window 2 Tap the Receive all incoming beams check box to clear the box 3 Tap ok Note Ensure the Receive all incoming beams check box is checked to receive all incoming beams 8 14 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Accepting a Bond 1 Ensure that the Bluetooth device is turned on and in discoverable mode 2 When prompted to bond with the other device tap OK F NI 4212 56 A PPTi11 wants ko bond with your device over Bluetooth Add PPTH to your bonded Cancel devices l
290. ple file selection using SHIFT and CTRL and mouse clicking Save the Script File Modifications to a script file can be saved using the Save or the Save As function Saving changes to an existing script writes over the original script To use a Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function Building the Image Once the script has been created the hex image defined by the script can be built As part of the build TCM performs a check on the script which verifies that all files referenced in the script exist This check is important for previously created scripts to ensure that files referenced in the script are still in the designated locations Scripts are built using the following steps 12 7 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 1 Click the Build button The Configure Build window appears Configure Build EE n X Select Item To Build vw Splash Screen CE Terminal v Partition Table C parttbl hex BROWSE ASCH Restricted Set Latro C 44platform hex BROWSE vw Application C application hex BROWSE v COMPRESSION Cancel Figure 12 3 Configure Build Window 2 Select the partitions to build using the check boxes to the left of each partition name 3 Select the filename and location for each partition file using the BROWSE button 4 Select Compression for the hex image which reduces
291. port of the cradle and the COM port on a host computer Figure 4 13 Connecting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle to Host Computer b Start a terminal emulation session on the host computer Use standard terminal emulator software such as Pro Comm or Hyperterminal Use the following terminal emulation settings 115200 bps 8N1 XON XOFF flow control ASCII file transfer protocol c Power on the cradle Before the power up LED sequence begins on the host computer press a from the terminal program to load the Cradle Utilities 4 16 Communication configuration interface The Cradle Utilities Version screen appears on the host computer Cradle Utilities Version x xx Firmware Datecode xxxxxxxx 1 Public network settings 2 Advanced settings 3 PPP settings 4 Private network settings 5 Firmware Download Select a submenu OR Q Discard changes and restart F Save changes and restart 2 Press 1 to display the Public network settings menu Public network settings 1 Static Mode 1 2 NAPT Mode 1 The following settings are only used when Static mode is 1 3 Cradle IP Address 0 0 0 0 Router Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 1st DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 and DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 1st WINS IP Address 0 0 0 0 2nd WINS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 The following settings are only used when NAPT mode is 0 and Static mode is 1 A Terminal 1 IP Address 0 0 0
292. pplication supports e exchanging business cards e sending a contact e sending a file e browsing remote devices e receiving a contact or file e enabling file sharing The first four operations exchange business cards send a contact send a file and browse remote device are client oriented They involve initiating an object exchange The last two operations are server oriented and involve accepting objects in an exchange initiated by another Bluetooth device Exchange Business Cards 1 Ensure both Bluetooth devices have a business card assigned to it Note f each device does not have a business card assigned to it you cannot exchange business Cards 2 To assign a business card to your terminal a Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features My Bluetooth Device The Device Manager window appears 7 46 PPT 8860 Bluetooth b Tap the Object Sharing tab e 46844 QD Contacts Object Sharing Assign the business card you want to send to others For exchanges My business card Files Assign the Folder to use when you allow others ko access your Files My shared Folder Bluetooth Shared Folder COM Ports Object Sharing Figure 7 65 Device Manager Object Sharing Tab c Under My business card tap Assign The My Business Card window appears HF socket OBEX 4 11 21 i My Business Card 3 Martinez Enrique ao Georgene g2 Yarbrook James To add a new business card
293. r 7 35 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Ensure that ActiveSync on the desktop is set to the proper com port Determine what com port the Bluetooth device is set to on the desktop Bluetooth Configuration E ajx General Accessibility Discovery Local Services Client Applications Hardware Select the services that this computer will provide to other Bluetooth devices Double click a service name to set its security start up options and properties Startup Secure Connection COM Port Audio Gateway Auto Not Required Headset Auto Not Required FIM Synchronization Auto Required Fan Auto Required File Transfer Auto Required PiM Item Transfer Auto Not Required Dial up Networking Auto Required Network Access Auto Required Bluetooth Serial Port Auto Mot Required COM4 Properties Add Serial Service Delete Cancel Apply Help Figure 7 47 Sample Bluetooth Configuration Window 7 36 PPT 8860 Bluetooth Set the com port in ActiveSync s Connection Settings window Connection Settings 3 X m Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this i ter em computer Status Waiting for device ta connect Get Connected v Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port Infrared Port IR Status Network connections are disabled Status icon vw Show status icon in Taskbar ea tap Fig
294. r Communication 4 Turn on the terminal and slide it into the cradle Figure 4 11 Inserting the Terminal in the Cradle 5 Upon connection synchronization occurs automatically 4 13 a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Using a Four Slot Ethernet Cradle The CRD8800 4000E Four Slot Ethernet Cradle allows communication between terminals and their associated host computers connected to an Ethernet network using ActiveSync and eConnect The CRD8800 4000E must be connected to an Ethernet network which is connected to the same network as the host computers or an Ethernet network connected to the larger Internet via an Internet gateway The cradle uses one of two configurations to accomplish this DHCP mode or Static mode ActiveSync only allows one terminal to connect to a host at a time eConnect is a required control panel applet that is installed on the terminal and allows ActiveSync or any custom synchronization application to be launched when the terminal is inserted into the cradle eConnect can also be set up to start a TCP IP connection with the cradle allowing any IP based application to communicate through the cradle When the terminals are inserted in the cradle the cradle appears to be a direct connect PPP service The cradle must be properly configured for use with the terminal The configuration steps include e Connecting the cradle to a network e Configuring the c
295. r of sentence Backspace ri Enter Scroll upon reaching the last line Input Method Word Completion Input Method Word Completion Options _ Input Method Word Completion Option IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen touch screen E E Figure 2 19 Input Panel Options Using the Soft Keyboard To type with the Soft Keyboard 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Keyboard 2 24 Operating the PPT 8800 2 On the Soft Keyboard tap the keys with your stylus z 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tabq w e r t yju i olp T CAP ajs d f g h j k T shift z x c v binjm CTE TE a X 4 fje New Edit Tools 2 Ej Figure 2 20 Soft Keyboard Tap here if this is the right word Using the Block Recognizer To use the Block Recognizer 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Block Recognizer 2 Write a letter in the left side of the box or a number in the right side using special character strokes New Edit Tools A Figure 2 21 Block Recognizer When you write a letter it is converted to typed text on the screen For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer with Block Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area or see Appendix A Block Recognizer Characters 2 25 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Ref
296. r supply and the AC outlet 3 Perform a hard reset see Performing a Hard Reset on page 2 36 Replace the battery cover 5 On the standard 6 key keypad simultaneously press and hold the APP 1 and APP 4 keys and then press and release the Power button Continue to hold the APP 1 and APP 4 keys the IPL screen appears p 12 27 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 6 On the 15 key keypad simultaneously press and hold the 1 and 4 keys then press and release the Power button Continue to hold the 1 and 4 keys until the IPL screen appears IPL VER X XX WARNING IPL Requires AC Plug in AC Power then reset device Figure 12 15 IPL AC Power Warning Screen 7 Place the terminal into the cradle or connect the Serial Charging Cable to the terminal Caution Do not remove power from the terminal while in IPL mode If the battery fully depletes during OS upgrade serious damage to the terminal can oc Cur 12 28 Configuring the Terminal 8 The Baud Rate Selection screen appears IPL VER X XX IPL Key Sequence gt 115 200 54 60V 38 400 19 00 9600 Auto Baud Press Up Down to select Baud Rate Enter to Continue Figure 12 16 IPL Baud Rate Screen 12 29 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 9 Select a baud rate of 115 200 then press the Enter key or wait till it times out The 10 Select Auto Selec
297. r window to view the status of the main and backup batteries and set power management options Battery To check the main battery and backup battery status 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Power icon Battery tab Ei settings e 4 435 D Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining Backup battery Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power Figure 3 39 Power Window Battery Tab The Battery tab provides general information about battery conditions The amount of useful operating time remaining varies depending on battery type and how you use the terminal 2 Tapok 3 43 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Wireless To turn the PPT 8866 terminal s bluetooth wireless capabilities on and off 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Power icon Wireless tab Ei settings et 4214 35 D Wireless signals off O Wireless signals on Bluetooth Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 3 40 Power Window Wireless Tab 2 Inthe list box select the wireless device check box 3 Select Wireless signals off radio button or Wireless signals on radio button 4 Tapok 3 44 Settings Advanced You can select options for turning off the terminal to conserve battery power To conserve the most power select the option to turn off the device after 3
298. rRATETEATYERMRSTERPWONREYCERSGSSEEESESPETAEESESQGT EIE pees 8 4 RESUME oo La 84 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Off 000 ee eens ae ane 8 5 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On 0 cece ccc ess 86 chal lei ar la en aha aaa i4 Bonding with Discovered Device s 0 ccc eee eee 8 7 Renaming a Bonded Device 0 0 0 0 eens 8 11 Deleting a Bonded Device usu oe ase ess Char CR ICE ORE Eoo D aao dos dc odd Di2 Receiving Incoming Beams aasa O14 AAP PE e Beaming Information eee ee eee eee eee eens 8 17 Sending an Appointment or Task 1 0 0 eee ce eee ees 8 17 Sending a Contact EEEE E AA AA AA ees 8 19 Sending ARA ee ee AA 8 21 Bluetooth Communications Lua ako cadee SORTE RR OCC CR ORC oe deeds barka a Re ya 8 23 LOUD NGI 1 aci acid cd 9o Dole KAG ice SAKE OO E PAA eee eee GG ei eee AA AA EAT AA AKA re eae eee ee o 10 eae ee eee ee ee 8 32 Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point 0 000 ccc ces 8 32 PUN CODEC se qe BAGBAG AA PEB NA PRN LPG 45 PANGA ABAKA WA 8 37 Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port iiis naa ln RE sy RR E LEGAL AE IEEE 8 39 Bluetooth Printing 26225682664 00e MAKAKA GA haaha ad Ehe eee waka hahaba heads BAN Chapter 9 AirBEAM Smart ie AA PG AA AA AUBEAM Package BUNEI ark BA KA E ROCA RG Soe oe APAN KARA eee eee bd JO o d 9 3 AIBEAM Sman ha oe GAL PR eo OE ee ka REE hc Duc NA AirBEAM License AB AG NABANG KABABA HD MAGANA ee L AHAS er
299. radle e Configuring the host computer e Configuring the terminal DHCP Mode 1 DHCP Address Mode When using DHCP mode the cradle acquires its IP address dynamically from the DHCP server There must be a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent on the same subnet as the CRD8800 4000E with IP addresses a gateway IP address at least one DNS address at least one WINS server address and a subnet mask for the unit to be automatically configured The cradle acquires one DHCP address from the DHCP server 6 DHCP Address Mode The 6 DHCP address mode is the cradle s default mode When using this mode the cradle acquires 6 IP addresses dynamically from the DHCP server one for the cradle one for each of the 4 slots and one for the expansion slot In this mode each slot has its own IP address and may be directly accessed by the network On power up the 6 IP addresses are acquired Periodically the lease times are checked and renewed as required If the renewal request is NAKed by the server the cradle 4 14 Communication enters Panic mode and re boots If the cradle receives no response from the server and is unable to re bind it enters Panic mode and re boots Caution In 6 DHCP address mode the cradle must acquire 6 addresses from the DHCP server by requesting addresses with different requestor IDs Some DHCP servers use the MAC address instead and with those cradles the cradle only receives one address and will not operate This s
300. ration in applications Tap the Scan Wedge icon to load A Scan Wedge icon appears in the task tray Ei start t d 2 48 Wednesday July 14 2004 Tap here ka set owner information as No upcoming appointments No unread messages No kasks Figure B 17 Scan Wedge Icon Tap the Scan Wedge icon to display a menu for setup and configuration of the demo Ey Start Wednesday July 14 2004 Tap here ka set owner information gx No upcoming appointments y No unread messages No kasks Config Scan Launch Help About Exit Figure B 18 Scan Wedge Menu To scan bar codes in an application such as Pocket Word 1 Tap Start PPT 8800 Demo Scan Wedge icon B 14 Demo Program 2 Tap Start Programs Word icon 3 Tap New to open a new document 4 Scan a bar code The data appears in the Word document kg Pocket Word en xz 2 50 ok 051111125817 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tab q w e r t y u ilo p CAP a s d f a nh j K 1 shift 7 x c v b n m 4 Cu A tel New Edit View Tools t Ej Figure B 19 Scan Data in Pocket Word Print The Print application illustrates how an application should handle print outputs 1 Tap Start PPT 8800 Demo Printicon The Win32PrintSamp window appears 9lwin32Printsamp 3 4 5 29 3 File Settings Help Select the print function of the File menu to print a sample reciept Use the Settings menu to select printers
301. rd in Contacts or a file in File Explorer To beam information to another device Sending an Appointment or Task 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive an appointment or task 2 Tap Start Today to display the Today screen 89 start Er aft 9 29 Monday December 03 7003 Tap here to set owner information Figure 8 18 Today Screen 3 Onthe Today screen tap either an appointment or a task to beam 8 17 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Tap and hold the appointment or task to send In the pop up menu select Beam Appointment Task r 1 i ef Z929 KB Pai er d 935 KO Dec 08 03 sft WES Ha All Tasks Priority Tap here to add a new task Ba Call John C MEETING 72 Calendar Create Copy Delete Task Beam Task Copy Paste Delete Appointment Beam Appointment New Tools Calendar Appointment Window Task Window Figure 8 19 Appointment Task Windows 5 The terminal begins to search for Bluetooth devices within range 2 Calendar ar aff 4 18 ok Pa Meet with Joe fy Call John To beam select a device Infrared Align ports ef OO02c7 icde4c Tap to send amp Searching To beam select a device Infrared Align ports 3 OO02c7 icde4r Tap to send amp Searching Figure 8 20 Calendar Tasks Windows Beam Note f the terminal is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list
302. re for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide S Can WOUB oaaesteseedsuwedakeds eux B 14 scanner sani aiensacd sedat dudes B 12 B 13 BOB amp aces ERR VES EGER CAE RS 2 35 ke AR e ETSERES 2 35 LED indicators uuusrdc sk RES 2 35 screen cnr 1 21 SDK system requirements 11 3 selecting a drawing 2 31 selecting programs 2 21 selecting text 2 30 selecting writing 2 30 serial charging cable 1 6 1 12 serial communication 4 28 serial cradle lgzssaeexex Rex wh 1 6 1 7 service information Ln xxi setting lico m 3 4 setting date auueseus xix ead rh E des 1 23 setting the device name 3 27 Selling UNG AASA 1 23 setting time zone 1 23 PR PAA AA 3 3 about 000 eee 3 5 3 26 GODS An APAPAP 3 3 backlight 22s RR 3 5 8 29 DU 6 cn uecus been seenen SS 3 3 3 8 certificates 4 5 9 93 s pco ttm 3 6 PEUT eeose raeas oe eek HE dg d ERA 3 3 DAD 2465 ERE ERREUR ERI 3 6 3 40 MOMS e P 3 4 owner information 3 4 DOSE oven se exe deed arx rea 3 4 power eee 3 6 3 43 FON aasicenund ades eer dd 3 6 3 47 remove programs 3 6 ib i Ria x RANG i 3 6 sound and notifications 3 4 Symbol settings 3 6 3 52 signal strength 5 4 5 14 6 4 6 19 Index 6 single s
303. re information Settings Table 3 2 System Tab Applications Continued ae Jo Turns the Spectrum24 wireless radio on or off See Wireless Adapter Control on page 3 61 Available only on PPT 8846 and PPT 8866 configurations Wireless Adapter Control 3 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Buttons In addition to key functions you can assign an application to a key Then you can open a frequently used application by pressing one key Program Buttons To assign an application to a key on the keypad 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Buttons icon Program Buttons tab Ei settings e 46407 Assign your Favorite programs to the program hardware buttons Run ege a Calendar Contacts Mates Record Button assignment Restore Defaults Program Buttons Up Down Control ES E Figure 3 3 Buttons Window Program Buttons Tab 2 Select a key from the Button list Select a key or application from the Button assignment drop down list 4 Tap ok To restore defaults at anytime tap Restore Defaults Defaults are also restored when you hard reset the terminal Table 3 3 lists the default button key assignments Table 3 3 Default Button Assignments Standard 6 key Keypad 15 key Keypad 3 8 Settings Table 3 3 Default Button Assignments Continued Butonitey Detam Bunonkey Dot fe Ee CU TO fe m Up Down Con
304. red Key Kerberos and LEAP encryption algorithms The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security The AP and the terminal are required to use the same encryption algorithm to associate and transmit data If an AP is set to Open System and an adapter is set Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place Similarly if an adapter is set to Open System and an AP is set to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place If an AP is set to 40 bit and a terminal is set to 128 bit the terminal can associate with the AP but no data transmission and reception can take place Select one of the following Encryption options from the Algorithm drop down list Open System no encryption 40 bit Shared Key 128 bit Shared Key Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data packet encryption is needed over the network Selecting Open System provides no security for the data being transmitted over the network Select 40 bit encryption and enter a 10 digit hex encryption key Tap Reset Keys to set the encryption key to the default values Select 128 bit encryption and enter a 26 digit hex encryption key The 128 bit encryption option provides a higher level of security than 40 bit encryption while maintaining an 11 Mbps data rate Tap Reset Keys to set the e
305. revents you from having duplicate copies of a message but it also means that you no longer have access to messages moved to folders created from anywhere except the terminal If you use IMAP4 the folders you create and the e mail messages you move are mirrored on the server Therefore messages are available to you anytime you connect to your mail server whether it is from your terminal or host computer This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to your mail server create new folders or rename delete folders when connected 10 19 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Pocket Word Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on your host computer to give you access to copies of your documents You can create new documents on your terminal or copy documents from your host computer to your terminal Synchronize documents between your host computer and your terminal so that you have the most up to date information in both locations To create a new document in Pocket Word such as a letter meeting minutes or a trip report tap Start Programs Pocket Word New icon A blank document appears Or if you ve selected a template for new documents in the Options dialog box that template appears with appropriate formatting applied You can open only one document at a time when you open a second document you ll be asked to save the first You can save a document in a variety of forma
306. rial create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from Symbol The user agrees to maintain Symbol s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof symbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design Symbol does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Symbol products Symbol Spectrum One and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http
307. rk the digits are replaced with asterisks within the Encryption key fields If the associated AP is using an optional Passkey the active adapter WLAN profile is required to use one as well The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption property window The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire 40 bit 10 character or 128 bit 26 character Hex digit string Tap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 4 to 32 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm Tap OK The AP transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using MD5 algorithms and displays them in the WEP fields These are the new WEP keys for the adapter profile Once displayed in the WEP key fields the adapter profile behaves as if the keys were entered manually TKIP WPA Select this option for the client adapter to use Wireless Protected Access WPA via TKIP Manually enter the pre shared keys in the edit boxes Tap ClearKey to clear all previous keys and enter new key values Tap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 8 to 63 character string 9 Select the P Config tab to configure the following terminal profile network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS Changes made within 6 13 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide the P Config
308. rkshire RG41 5TP United Kingdom 0800 328 2424 Inside UK 44 118 945 7529 Outside UK Australia Symbol Technologies Pty Ltd 432 St Kilda Road Melbourne Victoria 3004 1 800 672 906 Inside Australia 61 3 9866 6044 Outside Australia Denmark Danmark Symbol Technologies AS Dr Neergaardsvej 3 2970 Hersholm 7020 1718 Inside Denmark 45 7020 1718 Outside Denmark xxii Canada Symbol Technologies Canada Inc 2540 Matheson Boulevard East Mississauga Ontario Canada LAW 4Z2 905 629 7226 Asia Pacific Symbol Technologies Asia Inc Singapore Branch 230 Victoria Street 05 07 09 Bugis Junction Office Tower Singapore 188024 Tel 65 6796 9600 Fax 65 6337 6488 Austria Osterreich Symbol Technologies Austria GmbH Prinz Eugen Strasse 70 2 Haus 1040 Vienna Austria 01 5055794 0 Inside Austria 43 1 5055794 0 Outside Austria Europe Mid East Distributor Operations Contact your local distributor or call 44 118 945 7360 Finland Suomi Oy Symbol Technologies Kaupintie 8 A 6 FIN 00440 Helsinki Finland 9 5407 580 Inside Finland 358 9 5407 580 Outside Finland Germany Deutchland Symbol Technologies GmbH Waldstrasse 66 D 63128 Dietzenbach Germany 6074 49020 Inside Germany 49 6074 49020 Outside Germany Latin America Sales Support 2730 University Dr Coral Springs FL 33065 USA 1 800 347 0178 Inside United States 1 954 255 2610 Outside United States 954 340 9454 Fa
309. rmance is automatically chosen based on a real time analysis of network usage The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting and extends the operating time before the battery is recharged The Manual Power Saving Mode allows you to select a performance level suited to intended operation There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance using the most battery power to Acceptable Network Performance using the least battery power A network performance description is displayed for each power range 3 Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the terminal profile Status To view the status of the wireless network connection select Status from the Mobile Companion menu 1 Select the Signaltab to display a real time graph of the signal quality of the terminal to the associated AP Infrastructure Mode only The number of times the terminal has roamed to and from APs the current data rate and the network status are 5 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide displayed Signal quality is an indicator of how clearly the adapter can hear the associated AP Mobile Companion Signal Info IP Status Ping APs Missed Beacons as mn Txmit Retries Signal mm Signal Quality Excellent Roaming Count O AP MAC Address OO 40 F8 42 64 04 Network status In range Transmit Rate 11 Mbps Figure 5 8 Mobile Companion Signal Tab Note Th
310. rminal 12 24 Configuring the Terminal Assigning User Written Applications to Buttons Use RegMerge to modify the registry during a hard reset to assign user written applications to the application buttons These buttons remain assigned after a hard reset Note Although located in the Flash File System we recommend copying user applications to the Windows directory using CopyFile and running them from there See the WinCE Help file on the SMDK for more information Adding Programs Install the appropriate software on your host computer before installing it on your terminal 1 Select Start Settings About icon Version tab Note the information in Processor field Download the program to your host computer or insert the CD or disk that contains the program into your host computer You may see a single xip file exe file a zip file or a Setup exe file Read any installation instructions Read Me files or documentation that comes with the program Many programs provide special installation instructions Connect your terminal to the host computer Double click the executable file on the host computer If the file is an installer the installation wizard begins Follow the directions on the window Once the software is installed on your host computer the installer transfers the software to your terminal If the file is not an installer an error message states that the program is valid but is designed for a
311. rnet Explorer The Pocket Internet Explorer window appears ES Internet Explorer 4 m2 9 35 C file windows default htm Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer Welcome ta Packet Internet Explorer Not online yet Find aut how to get connected and save offline content Figure 4 14 Pocket Internet Explorer Window 21 In the address bar enter the URL for a web site 4 34 Communication Infrared Communication Using Infrared Receive IR you can send and receive information such as contacts appointments and files between two terminals Send Information To send information 1 Open the program in which you created the item you want to send and locate the item in the list For example a contact name in the Contacts application Note Ensure that the receiving terminal is enabled to accept IR beams See Receive Information on page 4 37 2 Align the IR port of your terminal with the IR port of the receiving device so that they are unobstructed and within close range 3 Tap and hold the item to send until the menu appears ES Contacts MET PE e M Contacts v sab cde foh ik mn Jona rst Jav eyz lomith Send Email Beam Contact Delete Contact Figure 4 15 Beaming Contact Information 4 35 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 4 Tap Beam Item on the menu A window displays showing the terminal searching for a device et 46939 To
312. roduct Reference Guide AirBEAM Staging The AirBEAM Smart staging support is intended to speed up and simplify the process of staging custom or updated operating software onto mobile devices directly from manufacturing The staging support is part of the AirBEAM Smart CE Client that is integrated into the terminal The AirBEAM Smart support works by defaulting the AirBEAM Client configuration to a known set of values and launching the AirBEAM Smart package download logic A staging environment including an RF network FTP server and AirBEAM packages must be setup Ideally a staging network and server should be setup to match the default AirBEAM Staging client configuration The AirBEAM Smart staging utility is invoked by tapping Start Programs AirBEAM Staging The AirBEAM Staging support provides several benefits e Many devices can be simultaneously loaded over the RF network e The AirBEAM staging utility provides a simple single dialog user interface that is used to quickly start the software installation process 9 12 Chapter 10 Applications Chapter Contents peti eee ne eer ee ee ee ee ee ee AA DAA KABABA KNA Pid AD NA AQ d pd ee eee 10 3 LOAN a ee Gere eh ed owe BA a Gee ee eee ware eee DANGAN 10 3 Creating PG ee KANG OTT IE OR ETT LT IU TIT 10 4 Lin NG Sumina DOON uo die ger ER EY YE ach rA Eod Ros RO a CE En 10 5 Creating Meeting Requests a 10 5 i co PL J
313. rompt Enter the new Terminal 2 IP address at the prompt l Select C to access the Terminal 3 IP addresses prompt Enter the new Terminal 3 IP address at the prompt m Select D to access the Terminal 4 IP addresses prompt Enter the new Terminal 4 IP address at the prompt 4 Select Q to return to the main Cradle Utilities menu 5 Select F to reset cradle and write values to flash memory Network Address Translation NAPT In both DHCP and Static mode the cradle assigns private IP addresses to each terminal and performs Network Address Translation NAPT on all TCP IP and UDP IP packets as they transmit through the cradle between the outside network and the cradle s private network The terminals are assigned private addresses specified in options A through E in the Public network setting menu 4 20 Communication The cradle modifies one IP address and port number pair inside a TCP IP and UDP IP packet header Those packets going to the outside network have their source address translated to the IP address of the cradle and their source port changed to a unique port number associated with the cradle slot from which it came Conversely packets designated to the cradle s private network have their destination IP address and port number mapped to the equivalent private network IP address and port number The differences in the port numbers distinguish between packets for different slots in the cradle The benefit of both IP address a
314. rosoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Bonding with Discovered Device s Follow these steps to bond with an already discovered Bluetooth device In most cases bonding is for establishing secure communications with a Bluetooth enabled phone This is a more detailed alternative to using the Bluetooth Get Connected Wizard Caution Do not bond with a Motorola Timeport 270C or Nokia 6310 phones Do not use this method to bond with a printer 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices ES Bluetooth Devices 4 m2 4 48 e e X oe Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 22 Bluetooth Devices Window 7 18 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 2 Tap and hold the device icon to bond with In the pop up menu select Bond E Bluetooth Devices 4 f2 4 50 e Properties Delete EPOX oe Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 23 Bonding a Device 3 Select Device Bond The Bluetooth Device Bonding window appears ES Bluetooth Devices 4 4 51 e Bluetooth Device socket Bonding Welcome to the Bluetooth Device Bonding Wizard This Wizard helps you bond Bluetooth devices Bonding is a one time process that lets you automatically create secure connections between your Pocket PC and the remote device Figure 7 24 Bluetooth Bonding Window 4 Tap Next gt 7 19 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Note Ensure that the Bluetooth device you want to bond with is in B
315. rvers with which you connect Your terminal may include a set of preinstalled certificates For information about viewing and deleting certificates see the sections below Personal 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Certificates icon Personal tab Ey settings e 46415 Manage Certificates Use personal certificates to positively identify yourself ko others Figure 3 26 Certificates Window Personal Tab The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date 2 To view more information about a certificate select it from the list box To delete a certificate tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Delete 4 Tapok e 3 33 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Root 1 3 34 Tap Start Settings System tab Certificates icon Root tab Use root certificates to positively identify root certification authorities Thawte Server CA 12 31 20 Thawte Premium Serv 12 31 20 Secure Server Certific 1 7 10 GTE CyberTrust Root 2l23 06 GTE CyberTrust Globa 8 13 18 GlobalSign Root CA 1 28 14 Entrust net Secure 5 5 25 19 Entrust net Certificati Figure 3 27 Certificates Window Root Tab The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date To view more information about a certificate select it from the list box To delete a certificate tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Del
316. ryption algorithm to associate and transmit data If an AP is set to Open System and an adapter is set to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place Similarly if an adapter is set to Open System and an AP is set to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 If an AP is set to 40 bit and an adapter is set to 128 bit the adapter can associate to the access point but no data transmission and reception can take place Table 6 3 Encryption Options Open System Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data packet encryption is needed over the network Selecting this option provides no security for the data being transmitted over the network The window displays only the OK and Cancel buttons WEP Select WEP for the adapter to use the WEP keys for encryption The window displays several radio buttons and edit buttons to configure the WEP keys Select 40 bit or 128 bit key lengths 128 bit is the default WEP keys are manually entered in the edit boxes Only the required number of edit boxes for a key length is displayed 10 Hex digit value for 40 bit keys 26 Hex digit values for 128 bit keys Use the Key radio buttons to configure the four WEP keys The adapter uses the selected key Tap ResetKeys to set the encryption key to the default values Note The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used As a security precaution after setting the key values for the netwo
317. s Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 4 Your terminal tries to connect to the selected AP Connect to BluetoothLANACcess Status Opening Port Figure 7 58 Connecting to LAN 5 If your LAN requires a passkey a screen appears asking for the passkey Enter the passkey then tap ok 6 After a successful connection is made the dialog box indicated Connected Connected to BluetoothLANACcess BluetoathL ANAccess Status Connected Figure 7 59 Connected to LAN 7 You are now ready to access your LAN for Internet and file access Connecting to a Discovered Access Point To communicate with an AP that the terminal discovered but is not a favorite 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Bluetooth LAN Access 2 The terminal tries to connect automatically to the favorite AP Connect to BluetonothL ANAccess Status Opening Port Figure 7 60 Connecting to Favorite LAN 3 A screen appears that allows you to choose which AP to connect to in your Bluetooth Devices folder 7 42 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 4 If your LAN requires a passkey a screen appears asking for the passkey Enter the passkey then tap ok 5 After a successful connection is made the dialog box indicated Connected Connected to BluetoothLANACcess BluetonothL ANAccess Status Connected Figure 7 61 Connected to LAN 6 You are now ready to access your LAN for Internet and file access Connecting to an Undiscovered Access Point To connect to an AP
318. s can ONLY be set to 100MHz ChangeSpeed If the default values have not been changed or you do not want to persist the non default settings then the dword should be set to 00000000 If you want to persist the non default setting the dword should be set to 00000001 When set to 00000001 then after a cold boot a message window will appear with an option to continue with changing the CPU speed or to cancel the process The option to select OK or Cancel can be made after the Microsoft Welcome Screen process is completed Selecting OK will suspend the unit for up to 3 seconds NoCsMsgWindow The No ChangeSpeed Message Window registry is used to prevent the Change Speed message window from appearing after a cold boot The customer application can now take control of invoking the ChangeSpeed application at the appropriate time after the cold boot instead of relying on the end user to make a selection Along with setting the NoCsMsgWindow value to 00000001 you will need to remove the ChangeSpeed Ink command from the ChangeSpeed cpy copy file i e remove or comment out the following line from ChangeSpeed cpy platform ChangeSpeed ink gt windows startup ChangeSpeed nk Then the customer application will need to launch ChangeSpeed exe at the appropriate time 3 59 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Brightness The Brightness tab allows you to change the brightness of the bac
319. s icon Start Meru tab Ei settings et 4 409 5 Checked items appear in the Start menu Others appear in Programs v eh Activesync 1E Calculator Calendar C Ig cerdisp B2File Explorer 165 Games CIG Jawbreaker CFH Solitaire Inbox E Figure 3 8 Menus Window Start Menu Tab 2 Select the programs that you want to appear in the Start menu 3 Tap ok You can create subfolders and shortcuts to appear under Start menu In ActiveSync on the host computer click Explore Double click My Pocket PC double click Windows double click Start Menu and then create the folders and shortcuts that you want 3 14 Settings New Menu To enable the New menu Tap Start Settings Personal tab Menus icon New Menu tab e 46410 C Turn on New button menu Checked items appear in the Mew button Menu Appointment Contact Excel Workbook Message Note Task Word Document Start Menu New Menu Figure 3 9 Menus Window New Menu Tab 1 Select the Turn on the New button menu check box 2 Select the items to appear on the menu An arrow appears next to New in the command bar of certain programs such as Pocket Word Pocket Excel Contacts Calendar and Tasks You can tap this arrow and then tap a new item to create 3 Tapok 3 15 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Owner Information Use the Owner Information window to enter in
320. s radio off 3 61 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 62 Chapter 4 Communication Chapter Contents We eet ee ee ee eee ee a ee ee EENEN KNA LAND ADB pA ee eee ee ee 4 3 Installing Communication Software n anaa aaaea aaaea 4 3 Melino AGE Naa GAGA CLOS IT T 4 3 Seung Ja AA AA AA AA 4 4 KO AKA AKA AA NBA ORR oT 1 TII TRITT 4 8 LOGGED SBTUD ey di s pe det dra eo AA AA AA 4 9 Using the Serial Charging Cable 0 0c rne 4 9 Using the Single Slot Serial Cradles llli 4 11 Using a Four Slot Ethernet Cradle liliis 4 14 Bata ies ceca cca ny ene essen qp Sce o 9 de cer dui ES dod EORR Ee OR I S Ed 4 14 er ee PNE at ee a nana ae ae ee eee es TETTE 4 15 Connecting the Cradle to a Network 2 2 0 ccc eee eee 4 15 Configuring the Cradle for DHCP Address Mode 200000 eee eee 4 16 Configuring the Cradle for Static Mode 2 anaana anaana aaa 4 18 Network Address Translation NAPT 0 000 e eect eee eee eee 4 20 ice tes ei cee cs a ee ee ee ee 711 77 07177 TT 4 21 Configuration of the Host Computer 0 0 0 ee eee 4 22 Configuration of the Terminal anaana ccc ee eens 4 23 Cee do a ene d ee a 9 Ce 04 PAPERS PT AA EET 4 24 Communication LED Indicator llli 4 25 Using the Universal Cable CU secs desse hrs he ER ewe Sones ERA E Aux Re 4 26 Serial Communication eer 4
321. s two minutes for the remote device to connect After successfully connecting to the remote device the screen reports Connected If two minutes passes before you connect tap Wait Again File sharing is enabled until you tap Cancel Or sy Ge I9 7 59 a PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Bluetooth Printing Printing to a Bluetooth printer requires a print enabled application to be installed on the terminal To print to a printer 1 Ensure that the terminal s COM port for printing is enabled See Assigning COM Ports on page 7 12 2 Ensure that a Bluetooth printer has been discovered See Discovering Bluetooth Device s on page 7 15 3 Set the printer as the terminal s default printer See Setting Up A Favorite Device on page 7 24 4 Open a printer application and print 7 60 Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth Contents aga Eai paaa ae ee ee AKIRA ee eee ee ee kUNG ee ee ee ee ee ee 8 3 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On and Off ee ees 8 3 Bluetooth Power States 26644465 Rp i o DEA dedii OR Roos die RR RAK AK KEES DEORE OE RS 8 4 les AP hee die hes esas 8 4 og APAPAP PA AA 8 4 BRIDE ob seo oes boas eee seo ETS AG ANG AD 24 KE 0394 qd 59959 9 8 DE ONG 8 4 ki AAP PAA AA AA AAP 8 4 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Ol wa amma soos LAG KAG eee ee n RI ERA 8 5 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode n ccc eee ees 8 6 Discovering Bluetooth Device s occ cece wake X was Re d Ru KG K
322. sible data loss replace or F recharge your battery according to the recharge your battery according to the gf owner s manual owner s manual To prevent possible data loss replace or JJ recharge your battery according to the ef owner s manual Figure 2 9 Battery Status Dialog Box Note You can also view the battery status using the Power window See Power on page 3 43 for more information 2 16 Connectivity Icon Operating the PPT 8800 The Connectivity icon indicates the communication status of the terminal when it s connecting to the internet or host computer Cannot connect with current connection settings To change your connection settings tap Settings Settings a Symbol stepped up to the plate and completed the install on time more David Myers project manager Coca Cola Bottling Co Figure 2 10 Connectivity Dialog Box 2 17 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Time Icon The Time icon displays the current time in a digital or analog format To change the time format tap and hold the Time icon until a menu appears Select the format you want th et nz 9 40 Hg Analog Clock CG Tuesday June 17 aka f Tap here ko set owner Digital REED THEE ml Z eting MONET ax SE NG Bisa PN E vu Figure 2 11 Time Icon Format Menu To display current date time and appointments 1 Tapthe Time icon to display the Time
323. sks to open the application 10 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Tap New Tap to return to the task list the task is saved automatically Tap to choose from Subject predefined subjects Priority Normal Status Not Completed Starts None Due None Occurs Once Reminder Mone ies No categories Notes is a good place for maps and directions Figure 10 8 Creating a Task 3 Using the input panel enter a description in the Subject field 4 You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field If the input panel is open hide it to see all available fields 5 To assign the task to a category tap Categories and select a category from the list In the task list you can display tasks by category 6 Toadd notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes on page 10 12 7 Tap OK to return to the task list Note 7o create a task with only a subject tap Tools Entry Bar Then tap in the Tap here to add a new task field and enter your task information 10 10 Applications Using the Summary Screen When you tap a task in the task list a summary screen displays To change the task tap Edit Send status report View task details Starts 8 18 2002 Due 8 19 2002 Tap to show and hide additional summary information
324. someone attempts to send you an IR beam from an older terminal you may not be prompted to accept it In this case before the beam is sent from the other terminal tap Receive an infrared beam at the bottom of the Beam window 4 38 Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 Chapter Contents pec ee eee eee ee ee ee ee se AA eee ee eee AD KA eee ee ee 5 3 Re ll se ow eee E god Chi eh AA oe eee eee 5 4 ai a kE MENETETTIIN ENTO ENTENT SETA NAKAT SEES eee AE KG 5 6 a nae AL QN RR Rea eee Raed Roa ERU EO RR EA RAS PANA PR REA AGA 5 13 Se ev PAA IRA ee ae ee a AA PAA 5 19 UT PISTE oodd WAS ERI RAT RU REP PEPEREA Ea SOEs SERT heh ES ee heee ee 5 20 EXEAT pe qi RETAA UESTRE eas eee ek ee MAA Rd pared wiaqd 5 21 ceama Mew Pre aacra di res EE AA 5 21 Deleting a Profile 22 lllllelleeee IIR 5 21 3o gi ls ono 4s eee kee ode ede T TIT OTT TII 5 21 Configuring the Radio Using a Registration File ccc ee ees 5 22 5 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 5 2 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 Introduction Wireless LANs allow PPT 8846 and PPT 8866 terminals to communicate wirelessly and to send captured data real time to a host device Before a terminal can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN your facility must be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the terminal must be properly configured Refer to the documentation that
325. ss data displays for the terminal If Static was selected the values displayed were input manually in the P Config tab on page 5 11 IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 Subnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway The gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination 5 16 o O N QD DNS WINS MAC Address Host Name Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet e mail delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites
326. t 6 21 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide The average mega bits per second signal strength data rate currently in use test statistics and round trip RT times are displayed for each test The associated AP MAC address is also displayed The signal strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real time bar graphs 10 Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the terminal s profile ing Mobile Companion r X42 1 41 known Access Points o s gg OO AD F8 42 62 25 Sg OO A0 Fe42 62 14 22 Signal Info IP Status Ping 4Ps E Figure 6 16 Mobile Companion APs Tab The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its associated status Tapping on the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set Roaming options Selecting the Set Mandatory item prohibits the terminal from associating with a different AP The letter M displays on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option has been selected Selecting Set Roaming allows the terminal to roam to any AP with a better signal These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID A signal strength value of 32 is the highest possible The APs tab only displays when Infrastructure is selected as the terminal operating mode from the Mode tab 11 Ifthe terminalis in Ad Hoc mode se
327. t 11 Press the Enter key IPL Download screen displays IPL VER X XX IPL Key Sequence Windows CE Platform Application Splash Screen IPL Partition Table Auto Select Press Up Down to select partition Press Enter to begin download Figure 12 17 IPL Download Screen 12 On the host computer launch TCM 12 30 Configuring the Terminal 13 Select File Load Terminal The Load Terminal Dialog window appears r z aan Load Terminal Dialog Be 2 HE amp FILE TO LOAD m FilesiSymbol Device CanfigquratiansiPPT 88001 Ovex Imagestplatfarm hex Browse Comm Port Baud Hate Protocol Unavailable ports comz 115200 NONE COMS LOMA Multiple Hex File Download Cancel Figure 12 18 Load Terminal Dialog Window 14 Select the COMM port to be the comm port on the host computer from the Comm Port drop down list 15 Select 115 200 from the Baud Rate drop down list 16 Select None from the Protocol drop down list 17 Click Multiple Hex File Download The Multiple File Transfer window appears Change the directory to the subdirectory where the hex images are located C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages PPT8800 v1 0 Flash Folders Hex Images The specific files that you select depends upon the model number of the terminal you are downloading to 18 Click Open and start the download The terminal indicates it is pre erasing the flash for each file separately and displays a
328. t Up my proxy server E Figure 8 40 Connections Window PPT 8866 Bluetooth 2 Onthe Tasks tab tap Add a new modem connection under My ISP The My Connection window appears 3 Bluetooth 4 5 Tap Next ar aff 12 15 My Connection gt Enter a name For the connection AP via Bluetooth Select a modem BluetoothDUN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h J k T shift z x c v b n m F ct ati ana NA Figure 8 41 My Connection Window In the Enter a name for the connection text box enter a name such as AP via In the Select a modem drop down list select BluetoothDUN gt aff 12 23 My Connections gt Select a bonded Bluetooth phone to use as 4 dialup modem Press Hew to bond with a new Bluetooth Device Figure 8 42 New Dial Up Window 8 33 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 6 Ensure the Bluetooth AP is discoverable Tap New The terminal searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them in the list ES Settings PET PET Select a Bluetooth device Searching complete 0002c07109e4c Figure 8 43 Select Bluetooth Device Window 7 Inthe list select the appropriate Bluetooth AP and then tap Next AF settings a d 2 00 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN gt Enter a Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with 000 07109edc The same PIN must be entered on both
329. t computer setting up the connection between the terminal and the host computer and configuring the terminal Using the Serial Charging Cable 1 Ensure that ActiveSync was installed on the host computer and a partnership was created See Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 4 2 Start ActiveSync on the host computer if it is not running To start select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears 4 Microsoft ActiveSync D E x File View Tools Help 9 S E S Sync Stop Details Explore Options Pocket PC2003 Not connected Information Type Status G Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 7 ActiveSync Not Connected 4 9 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Note Every terminal should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one terminal to the same name See Device ID on page 3 27 for instructions on changing the device name 3 Connect the Serial Charging Cable to your terminal and host computer as shown in Figure 4 8 AC Line Cord To serial port of P host computer 7 Serial Charging Cable Figure 4 8 Connecting the Serial Charging Cable Note The Serial Charging Cable requires a dedicated port It cannot share a port with an internal modem or other device If you are unsure about the location of the serial port on your computer refer to the
330. t computer is copied to your terminal When the copy is complete and all data is synchronized you can disconnect your terminal from your host computer Note You must perform your first ActiveSync operation with a local direct connection To retain partnerships after a hard reset capture partnership registry information in a reg file and save it in the Flash File System See the Windows CE Help File for Symbol Terminals for details For more information about using ActiveSync start ActiveSync on your host computer then see ActiveSync Help Installing eConnect eConnect is a control panel applet you may install on a terminal it automates the launch of a ethernet connection and applications such as ActiveSync or Internet Explorer Note eConnect is needed only when establishing a connection using the the Four Slot Ethernet cradle To install eConnect download it from http devzone symbol com Follow the installation instructions included to install the software on your terminal 4 8 Communication Communication Setup The terminal can communicate with the host computer to exchange data using the following accessories e Serial Charging Cable through a serial connection e Universal Cable Cup through a USB serial connection e Single Slot Serial Cradle through a serial connection e Four Slot Ethernet Cradle through an Ethernet connection For each accessory you need to follow instructions on configuring your hos
331. t http www microsoft com Service Information If you have a problem with your equipment contact the Symbol Support Center for your region See page xxii for contact information Before calling have the model number serial number and several of your bar code symbols at hand Call the Support Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to talk you through your problem If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is symbol readability the Support Center will request samples of your bar codes for analysis at our plant If your problem cannot be solved over the phone you may need to return your equipment for servicing If that is necessary you will be given specific directions Note Symbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used Shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If the original shipping container was not kept contact Symbol to have another sent to you xxi PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Symbol Support Center For service information warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol Support Center in United States Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 1 800 653 5350 United Kingdom Symbol Technologies Symbol Place Winnersh Triangle Be
332. t your distributor or Symbol Technologies Table 13 2 Troubleshooting Bluetooth Connection Problem ceee TO souton Cannot connect to a The services for the devices In the Bluetooth Devices window tap device in my folder have not been discovered the device icon Select Device Properties Tap the Services tab Tap Update 13 13 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 13 2 Troubleshooting Bluetooth Connection continued Problem Cmm Soon When using the Get Connected Wizard to connect to a phone get a screen that says Partial Success The terminal cannot find any Bluetooth devices nearby The terminal keeps powering down to protect memory contents When trying to connect a Bluetooth phone and terminal the phone thinks that am using a different terminal that previously paired with the phone Can t make my Ericsson R520 phone discoverable 13 14 The phone is not in Bondable mode The passkey is incorrect Too far from other Bluetooth devices The Bluetooth device s nearby are not turned on The Bluetooth device s are not in discoverable mode Set the phone to Bondable mode If needed consult your phone s user documentation for help Ensure the same passkey is entered on the phone and the terminal If using a pre assigned passkey for the phone verify that your passkey is accurate Move closer to the other Bl
333. terminal compatible host applications on your host computer ActiveSync replicates data from your terminal so you can view enter and modify any data stored on your terminal with the host application e Synchronize files between your terminal and host computer Your files are automatically converted to the correct format e Back up the data stored on your terminal Synchronization is a one step procedure that ensures your data is always safe and up to date e Copy rather than synchronize files between your terminal and host computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you may synchronize continually while the terminal is connected to the host computer or only when you select the synchronize command 4 3 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide e Select the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized To install ActiveSync on your host computer 1 Download version 3 7 or higher of the software from http www microsoft com Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the ActiveSync software you download 2 Set up a partnership between the terminal and host computer through the ActiveSync connection using a serial connection or Universal Cable Cup USB cable Setting up a Partnership After installation is complete the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps you connect your terminal to yo
334. that the terminal has not discovered 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Bluetooth LAN Access 2 The terminal automatically searches for new Bluetooth devices Bluetooth Device Search EYE Looking For Bluetooth device s _ Time remaining Figure 7 62 Searching for Bluetooth Devices 3 After the search is complete select the AP you wish to connect to 7 43 Ba PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 4 Tap Select If the AP is not listed tap Refresh to search again RET Bluetooth Devices 5 07p Choose the desired lan access device and tap Select To perform the search again tap Refresh Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Save selection for future use Figure 7 63 New Bluetooth Devices Window 5 Aservice discovery phase begins 6 Ifthe LAN requires a Passkey a screen appears asking for the Passkey Enter the passkey then tap ok 7 After a successful connection is made the screen indicates Connected Connected to BluebonthL ANAccess BluetonothLANAccess Status Connected Figure 7 64 Connected to LAN 8 Now you are ready to access your LAN for Internet access files etc Automatic Connection oome Bluetooth enabled phones let you set up automatic connections with devices they have successfully bonded with without requiring you to manually enter a password every time you try to connect To set up automatic connections between your phone and your termina
335. the Single Slot Serial Cradles lille 1 12 Uana Te Sur Sla IM IDE uu ea ro RACER ODE CURE 39 LR ERI ah Ho irl Pu d 1 15 Using the Universal Cable Cup 0 0 0 nr 1 16 CISION opare Baleri ua uade AA PP COR b RR CR CR RC ERE do 1 18 Using the CRD8800 Single Slot Cradle aaa 1 18 Using the CRD8800B Single Slot Cradle aa 1 19 Using me UBC Battery Adapter csc e oc bed ex hoes She ee Sos bse 43 Rc ec E ws ees 1 20 Charge LED A a PAGG ee eee ee eee ee a3 TANG PALAG BIN HR TAE Eee RSS 1 21 SIDE DEBIDA oiu sca ye eee ok ES ene hoes and oun eden eee cces 1 21 Calibraling iie OoOO PAA AA AA we PEER PA AT 1 21 COIN Time and 2 ereer CR Oe ee eA CHOR CU ARCU ode rail KG NGAGE beeen es 1 23 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Checking Battery Status ee eee nee eens 1 24 Hebiscna Ine rt cerrarse skede rire AA 1 25 Magnetic Strip Reader 6 diac es kae xk EAR OCR Goud od ACRI CRLRHACOCR Chae REESE SUD HER TRS AG 1 27 installing the MSR eat dr KE Y E EECIPHEAT REY rsak rar ERENTO E AEE TETTE YES 1 27 PAG HU apo donis AB LABAN one POE GS RAE AREE AK EEUU EUR d EAE 1 28 Ng AA AA PER AE 1 28 Charging rhe Terminals Battery ca KAG KG BA KA busco eR ek ERE Rok oe 1 30 Say paliligo Bal PAPA AA AAP Egon 1 31 Chapter 2 Operating the PPT 8800 lan ge APP AAP 2 3 Using th Power BUON os PG eee S KAKA PERA ee ERA Ee EIDURIXTEIDESV IER ES Ue Ea es
336. the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 are appended as is when building the name for the server package definition file When this feature is disabled a standard file path separator is used to separate the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 when building the name for the server package definition file In addition an apd extension is appended automatically TFTP This check box specifies whether the TFTP protocol is to be used to download files By default the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the FTP protocol WNMS This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uploads a WNMS information file at the end of each version synchronization 9 8 AirBEAM Smart Misc 2 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Misc 1 Misc 2 Misc gt Auto retry Retry Delay In use Test Wait Welcome sga Close Apps eee Auto retry This field is used to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries if there is a failure during the synchronization process If this feature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client displays a popup dialog indicating the attempt of a retry The popup dialog is displayed for the number of seconds specified in the Retry Delay field The valid values for this field are 1 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries ind
337. the size and speeds up the download 5 Click OK and follow the on screen instructions If one of the partitions being built is the Splash Screen partition the Splash Screen Creation Dialog window appears prompting you for both the source Bitmap file as well as the destination HEX file Splash Screen Creation Dialog 4 x Look in a Splash O E E be PPTSSO0PPCSplash BMP aa PPTSS00PPCSplash2 BMP aa PPTSS00PPCSplash3 BMP Files af type Bitmap Files dib bmp Cancel E Figure 12 4 Splash Screen Creation Dialog Window 12 8 Configuring the Terminal 6 Acheck will be performed and if there are no errors the partition hex files are created If the build fails the hex files are not be created and TCM displays an error message Two of the most common reasons for a build failure are e Files defined in the script can not be found This error can occur when the files referenced by the script are no longer stored on the host computer or the folders where they are stored were renamed e The total amount of flash memory space required by the script exceeds the image size To correct this reduce the number of files in the partition or increase the size of the partition See Defining Script Properties on page 12 5 for more information on setting the image size appropriately Sending the Hex File Once the hex file is built it can be downloaded to the terminal 1 Connect the Serial Char
338. ties To view the properties of an already discovered device 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices The Bluetooth Device window appears Ha X oe Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 28 Bluetooth Device Window 2 Select a device Tap the Properties icon or tap Device Properties Alternatively you can tap and hold the stylus on the Bluetooth device you want to view information about In the pop up menu select Properties ES Bluetooth Devices 4 5 01 e Bond Properties Delete Ha X oe Device Yiew Tools E Figure 7 29 Device Properties 1 22 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 3 The Bluetooth Devices Property window appears Device name Tap the buttons En choose a different icon For this device Device address 00 02 07 10 96 34 Device class Major Computer Minor Handheld PEPCA Service class Object Transfer E Figure 7 30 Bluetooth Devices Property Window 4 Use the General and Services tabs to view device properties 5 If needed assign a new device type icon by tapping on the arrow buttons in the General tab You can also use the Device name field to rename the device When done tap ok for the setting to take effect 23 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs Setting Up A Favorite Device To set up default devices in the Bluetooth Devices folder 1 Tap the Bluetooth icon Advanced Features Bluetooth Devices 2 S
339. to send In the pop up menu select Send Via Bluetooth Create Copy Delete Contact Send E mail to Contact Beam Contact New Yiew Tools Figure 7 69 Contact Window 4 If your mobile computer has no devices in the Bluetooth Devices folder then it begins to search for Bluetooth devices nearby Bluetooth Device Search Looking For Bluetooth device s KON Time remaining Figure 7 70 Searching for Bluetooth Devices 7 49 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 5 Select the Bluetooth device you wish to send the contact s to If the desired device is not listed tap Find E Socket OBEX Device Mame Choose the desired device and tap Select IF the desired device is not shown tap Find to search Far one Ehat may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation Figure 7 71 Socket OBEX Window 6 Your terminal processes and sends the contact s Send via Bluetooth MES Processing cantack s aaa Cancel Figure 7 72 Sending Contact Information Sending a File To send a file to another Bluetooth device 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a file 2 Tap the Bluetooth icon Transfer via Bluetooth Send a File 3 If your terminal does not have a device in the Bluetooth Devices Folder it begins to search for Bluetooth devices nearby 4 Select the Bluetooth device you wish to send a file and tap Select
340. traffic areas improves transmission quality by reducing the number of noises in that coverage area e In Infrastructure mode there are two transmission power options e Select Automatic to use the AP power level Automatic is the default mode for terminals operating in Infrastructure mode e Select Power Plus to set the terminal transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP e n Ad Hoc mode there are five transmission power options 5 12 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 e Select Maximum power to set the terminal to the highest transmission power level Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby Additionally use the maximum power level when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area e Select 5096 2596 or 1096 to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum power level e Select Minimum power to set the terminal to the lowest transmission power level Use the minimum power level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity Additionally select minimum power in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is anticipated The Automatic Power Saving Mode switches to Best Network Performance when an AC power supply is detected If a battery is used an appropriate setting between Best Network Performance and Acceptable Network Perfo
341. trol To set the key repeat rate 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Buttons icon Up Down Control tab Ei settings et 4 408 D Customize the way your Up Down control repeats Delay before first repeat Figure 3 4 Buttons Window Up Down Control Tab 3 9 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 2 Adjust the Delay before first repeat slide bar to change the time elapsed before scrolling begins 3 Adjust the Repeat rate slide bar to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the next 4 Tapok 3 10 Settings Input Use the Input window to switch input methods and set input options Input Method To select an input method 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Input Method tab E settings et 4 408 D Input method ei Large keys i Small keys d f G Use gestures For the Following keys and remove them From the keyboart Space H Shift key Backspace ri Enter Input Method Word Completion lOpions IF stylus Eaps become inaccurate align the touch screen Fa Figure 3 5 Input Window Input Method Tab 2 From the Input method drop down list select the input method 3 Make any additional desired changes to the settings 4 Tapok 3 11 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Word Completion To adjust how suggested words pop up in a
342. ts including Word doc Pocket Word psw Rich Text Format rtf and Plain Text txt Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on your terminal Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of or send a file tap and hold a file in the list Then select the appropriate action on the pop up menu Select the type of folder you want displayed in the list Tap to change the sort order of the list 6lank Document 12 31 01 Meeting Notes 12 31 01 E7 Memo 12 31 01 12 31 01 12 31 01 Tap to open a document Create Copy Delete Select All Tap and hold an item to see Send via E mail a pop up menu of actions Beam File Rename Move New Tools Tap to create a new item Figure 10 15 Using Pocket Word 10 20 Applications You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes writing drawing typing and recording displayed on the View menu Tap the Show Hide Toolbar icon on the command bar to show or hide each mode s toolbar To change the zoom magnification tap View Zoom Select the percentage Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of your document If you re opening a Word document created on a host computer tap View Wrap to Window to see the entire document Typing Mode Use the input panel to enter typed text into a document See Entering Information on page 2 23 for more information To format or edit text select th
343. ttery cover 2 Unhook the top of the handstrap from the handstrap connector on the back of the terminal Handstrap connector Handstrap connector Figure 1 28 Handstrap Replacement 1 25 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 3 Slide the flat metal piece of the new handstrap into the handstrap connector on the back of the terminal 4 Slide the flat metal piece on the other end of the handstrap into the handstrap connector on the battery cover 1 26 Getting Started Magnetic Strip Reader The MSR8800 Magnetic Stripe Reader is an essential accessory for the PPT 8800 Series terminal allowing easy data capture with the swipe of a magnetic stripe card The magnetic stripe reader snaps easily on to the bottom of the terminal and can be easily removed when not in use Installing the MSR 1 Ensure that locking tabs are in the open position up 2 Insert the terminal into the MSR 3 Press down on the two locking tabs 4 Pull on the MSR to ensure that it is securely seated on the terminal Locking Tabs Figure 1 29 MSR Installation 1 27 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Removing the MSR 1 2 Lift the two locking tabs Pull the MSR8800 from the terminal
344. uency and phase in this sequence e For the page hop sequence the device address of the paged unit is used as the input vector This results in the use of a subset of 32 frequencies which is specific for that initial state of the connection establishment between the two units A page to different devices would result in a different subset of 32 frequencies So it is ensured that also in hybrid mode the frequency is used equally on average Example of a hopping sequence in inquiry mode 48 50 09 13 52 54 41 45 56 58 11 15 60 62 43 47 00 02 64 68 04 06 17 21 08 10 66 70 12 14 19 23 Example of a hopping sequence in paging mode 08 57 68 70 51 02 42 40 04 61 44 46 63 14 50 48 16 65 52 54 67 18 58 56 20 53 60 62 55 06 66 64 10 Receiver Input Bandwidth and Synchronization in Hybrid Mode The receiver input bandwidth is the same as in the data mode 1 MHz When two Bluetooth devices establish contact for the first time one device sends an inquiry access code and the other device is scanning for this inquiry access code If two devices have been connected previously and want to start a new transmission a similar procedure takes place The only difference is instead of the inquiry access code a special access code derived from the BD ADDRESS of the paged device will be will be sent by the master of this connection Due to the fact that both units have been connected before in the inqu
345. uetooth device s within a range of 10 meters Turn on the Bluetooth device s you wish to find Set the Bluetooth device s to discoverable mode If needed refer to the device s user documentation for help The terminal s battery is low Recharge the battery The Bluetooth radio has been in Discoverable mode for a long time This mode requires a lot of battery power and should be turned off whenever not needed The phone remembers the name and address of the terminal it last paired with via your Bluetooth radio You attempted to bond with the phone and when the phone presented a pairing query you entered No This prevents the phone from being discoverable until it is reset Tap the Bluetooth icon then select My Bluetooth Device Uncheck Discoverable Manually delete the pairing device and name from your phone Refer to your phone s user documentation for instructions Reset the phone by removing its battery Appendix A Block Recognizer Characters Introduction Using the Block Recognizer you can write characters directly on your terminal screen with your stylus These characters are translated into typed text Use Block Recognizer to enter text for example to write a note or to fill in fields in a dialog box Figure A 2 provides examples of how to write characters in lowercase The Block Recognizer input panel is divided into two writing areas Letters written in the left area A 1 Ba PP
346. uetooth On and Off ewe ee Hwee ae AA 7 3 Connecting to a Bluetooth Phone cscs ccc eic ied CR ROI RR n3 REOR RERO UAR RR CR E oa 7 5 Ericsson Nokia 6210 NTT DoCoMo Sony Phones a 7 5 Motorola Timeport 270C Nokia 3650 6310 7650 8910 8910i 7 8 PIO Ondo bA ANG be TO T T TETTE TT 1 QT 7 11 Gongur Me HE QI TITO TIR TL AA AA AA 7 11 POS KE ll MMC P r 7 12 Object Sharing isiaecoliaeseskarreRLeseXxveasduacee x4Re4 RA Edd REA RARE 4048645 7 13 Discovering Bluetooth Device s cuaasuaekcreenuedeek Aree mE RE Ed RE KAHA 7 15 Bonding with Discovered Device s llle 7 18 Vew Device ales dakha NG BAWAL KGG FLAG PARAK ELENA PAREN ERR RR AS 7 22 Setting Up A Favorite Device 0 eee teens 7 24 Change VIEWS ee ee ee ee ee ere 7 24 gp IG pn NR een ed eed AA AA cocoate 7 26 Blusen Commpn OD OPE a u draco ee ee AG BG WA OE Roe Ab eee ee ee 7 27 ra O TOU NOMNO ok ea he ee ep ee Red ORE OEE RSE EEE hee 7 27 Dial Automatically from the Application ccc eee 7 34 PRENO IA ITO oaa e creek qr y ones eben RR EE KG C QU EH deeds 7 35 ActiveSync with a Favorite Computer llle 7 37 ActiveSync with a Discovered Computer 0 0 00 eee eee 7 38 ActiveSync with Undiscovered Computer n naana 0 00 eee eee 7 39 IOC LAN ADOBE AA AA 7 41 Connecting to a Favorite Access Point eee eee 7 41 Connecting to a Discovered Access Point 0
347. uide 6 18 displayed Signal quality is an indicator of how clearly the adapter can hear the associated AP Missed Beacons ee Tmit Retries Signal Signal Quality Excellent Roaming Count 1 AP MAC Address O0 40 F8 42 64 04 Network status In range Transmit Rate 11 Mbps Signal Info IP Status Ping APs E P Figure 6 12 Mobile Companion Signal Tab Note The Signal tab is view only and is not available if the current operating mode is Ad Hoc Missed Beacons Txmit Retries Transmit Retries Displays the amount of beacons uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized missed by the terminal The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons If the LED is Red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the terminal The fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve the signal Signal Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator RSSI of the signal
348. um24 networks APs and networked peers available to the terminal for association The networks are listed by their ESSID To the right of each network is a signal strength icon Networks with a signal strength of Good three green bars out of five or better should be considered for connection Tap a network and tap Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network Once connected the Mode Encryption IP Config and Power tab views display the ESSID security settings network address information and power consumption level set for that network See Finding WLANs on page 5 6 for more information 5 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Table 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions Continued O mega ee Options Displays settings for configuring system sounds AP and terminal association capabilities profile roaming options as well as password protecting the Mobile Companion utility Finding WLANs A completed profile is a set of terminal configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined terminal operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network environments Select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area The Mobile Companion window displays the available WLAN networks Mobile Companion Available
349. un form factor ergonomics for scan intensive applications Magnetic Stripe Reader Snaps on to the terminal to add magstripe capabilities MSR Vehicle Cradle Powers the terminal and charges its standard or larger capacity battery charges a standard or larger capacity spare battery and communicates with other devices such as printers Symbol Mobility Developer s The Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for eVC4 provides all Kit SMDK for Embedded of the tools necessary for creating C and C native applications for Visual C 4 0 Symbol terminals running Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs These tools include class libraries sample applications and associated documentation Symbol Mobility Developer s The Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for NET provides all of Kit SMDK for NET the tools necessary to develop C and VB NET managed applications for Symbol Mobile devices These tools include class libraries sample applications and associated documentation SMDK for NET allows Microsoft NET Compact Framework developers to programmatically access the Symbol value add features of the terminal Device Configuration Used to customize and deploy software for the terminal Package for PPT 8800 1 7 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Getting Started In order to start using the terminal for the first time e install the battery e charge the battery and
350. ur host computer set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your terminal and host computer and customize synchronization settings 1 Ifthe Get Connected window does not appear on the host computer select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync Get Connected ba x Get Connected After installing batteries or plugging in the AC adapter do one of the following Use the serial cable to connect to a COM port on the back of this desktop computer and click Next Use the USB cable to connect to the USB port on the back of this desktop computer ActiveSync will automatically detect the device connection You can also connect pour mobile device using infrared IR For more information click Help Cancel Help Figure 4 1 Get Connected Window 2 Connect the terminal to the host computer See Communication Setup on page 4 9 4 4 Communication 3 Select Next in the Getting Connected window 4 Thehost computer and the terminal attempts to synchronize The New Partnership window appears New Partnership Set Up a Partnership Before you can synchronize information between your mobile device and this computer you must set up a partnership between them Would you like ta set up a partnership Set up a partnership sa that can synchronize Information between my device and this computer C No don t want to synchranize information Set up my device as
351. ure 7 48 Connection Setting Window ActiveSync with a Favorite Computer To ActiveSync with a computer that the terminal discovered and is a favorite 1 Tap Bluetooth icon Bluetooth ActiveSync 2 The terminal automatically tries to connect to the favorite computer 3 The Connect To dialog appears indicating that it is trying to connect to wireless ActiveSync Connect to Wireless ActiveSync Status Connecting to Host Figure 7 49 Connecting to Host 1 37 PPT 8800 with Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 for Pocket PCs 4 After a successful connection is made the dialog indicates Connected Connected to Wireless Active5ync Wireless ActiveSync Status Connected Figure 7 50 Connected to Host 5 Now you are ready to synchronize files ActiveSync with a Discovered Computer To ActiveSync with a computer that the terminal discovered but is not a favorite 1 Tap Bluetooth icon Bluetooth ActiveSync The Bluetooth Devices window appears En Bluetooth Devices Device Name Ss Choose the desired PC and tap Select IF the desired PC is nat shown tap Find to search For ane that may be in range Tap Cancel to abandon this operation E Figure 7 51 Bluetooth Devices Window 2 Choose a computer from the list and tap Select or tap Find to search for another computer 7 38 PPT 8860 Bluetooth 3 The terminal attempts to connect to the selected host computer Connect to Wire
352. uter signal strength See Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 1 or Chapter 6 Spectrum24 Network Configuration V 3 9 2 for more information The Bluetooth icon appears in the task tray and indicates that the Bluetooth radio is on The Bluetooth icon disappears when the radio is off The Bluetooth icon is for display purposes only See Chapter 7 PPT 8860 Bluetooth or Chapter 8 PPT 8866 Bluetooth for more information The ActiveSync icon appears in the task tray and indicates an active connection between the mobile computer and the development PC 2 14 Operating the PPT 8800 Speaker Icon You can adjust the system volume using the Speaker icon in the Navigation bar 1 Tap the Speaker icon The Volume dialog box appears Figure 2 8 Volume Dialog Box 2 Tap and move the slide bar to adjust the volume 3 Select the On or Off radio button to turn the volume on or off Note Use can also adjust the system volume using the Sounds amp Notifications window See Sounds 8 Notifications on page 3 22 for more Information 2 15 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Battery Icon Battery icons display on the Navigation Bar when the main battery or backup battery power falls below a predetermined level A Battery dialog box also appears indicating the status of the main or backup battery E Main ral To prevent possible data loss replace or To prevent pos
353. ve something to do For example if you ve set up an appointment in Calendar a task with a due date in Tasks or an alarm in Clock you ll be notified in any of the following ways e amessage box appears on the screen e asound which you can set is played e the terminal vibrates this is a programmable feature To choose reminder types and sounds for your terminal tap Start Settings Personal tab Sounds amp Notifications icon Select the desired options See Sounds amp Notifications on page 3 22 for more information Entering Information To enter information you may e Use the keypad See Using the Keypad on page 2 5 and Appendix D Keypad Maps for keypad functions e Use the input panel to enter typed text either using the soft keyboard or writing characters e Write directly on the screen e Draw pictures on the screen e Speak into the microphone to record a message e Scan bar code data into data fields Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information from your host computer to your terminal For more information on ActiveSync see Chapter 4 Communication or ActiveSync Help on your host computer Entering Information Using the Input Panel Use the input panel to enter information in any program You can either type using the soft keyboard or write using Block Recognizer Letter Recognizer or Transcriber In any case the characters appear as typed text on the screen 2 23 PPT 8800 wit
354. wer button these actions Any Key Any key on the keypad is pressed wake the terminal up WLAN Not supported See Note Auto Off When the terminal goes into Trigger button is pressed sleep mode by an automatic power off function these Any Key Any key on the keypad is pressed actions wake the terminal up WLAN Not supported See Note Note When the terminal suspends it will not resume based on any type of WLAN activity Power to the radio remains on when the terminal is suspended Upon a resume the reassociation to an access point AP is quicker since the radio drivers do not need to be reloaded Settings Use the Settings tab to control power to the external connector and decode beep volume 3 53 Ba PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon Settings tab ES Symbol Settings MT O ok 53 Symbol Settings 4 2 9 13 ok External 5 volts power External 5 volts power Standard decode bear volume Support For Headset and Microphone Stereo Headset Only sonno Sie cos PD sonno Ste ec KID Figure 3 50 Symbol Settings Window Settings Tab 2 From the External 5 volts power drop down list select the appropriate options to control power to the external connector The settings listed in Table 3 7 can be selected from the External 5 volts power drop down list Table 3 7 External 5 Volts Power Settings Settin
355. ws Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide provides information about the PPT 8800 Series terminal using the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Operating System and its accessories The PPT 8800 Series includes the following variations of the terminal PPT 8800 PPT 8846 PPT 8860 PPT 8866 Performs 1 dimensional scanning and batch communication Memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM Performs 1 dimensional scanning and uses the Symbol Spectrum24 radio to perform 11 MB local area network LAN wireless communication Memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM Performs 1 dimensional scanning with Bluetooth wireless technology to perform personal area network PAN communication Memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM Performs 1 dimensional scanning with Symbol Spectrum24 radio to perform 11 MB local area network LAN wireless communication and Bluetooth wireless technology to perform personal area network PAN communication Memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM Note Some configurations support 128MB RAM XVII a PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows xviii Chapter 1 Getting Started explains the physical buttons and controls on the terminal how to install and charge the batteries replace the handstrap and start your terminal for the first time Chapter 2 Operating the
356. x Netherlands Nederland Symbol Technologies Kerkplein 2 7051 CX Postbus 24 7050 AA Varsseveld Netherlands 315 271700 Inside Netherlands 31 315 271700 Outside Netherlands About This Guide France Symbol Technologies France Centre d Affaire d Antony 3 Rue de la Renaissance 92184 Antony Cedex France 01 40 96 52 21 Inside France 33 1 40 96 52 50 Outside France Italy Italia Symbol Technologies Italia S R L Via Cristoforo Columbo 49 20090 Trezzano S N Navigilo Milano Italy 2 484441 Inside Italy 39 02 484441 Outside Italy Mexico Mexico Symbol Technologies Mexico Ltd Torre Picasso Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88 Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000 Mexico City DF Mexico 5 520 1835 Inside Mexico 52 5 520 1835 Outside Mexico Norway Norge Symbol s registered and mailing address Symbol Technologies Norway Hoybratenveien 35 C N 1055 OSLO Norway Symbol s repair depot and shipping address Symbol Technologies Norway Enebakkveien 123 N 0680 OSLO Norway 47 2232 4375 xxiii PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide South Africa Symbol Technologies Africa Inc Block B2 Rutherford Estate 1 Scott Street Waverly 2090 Johannesburg Republic of South Africa 11 809 5311 Inside South Africa 27 11 809 5311 Outside South Africa Sweden Sverige Letter address Symbol Technologies AB Box 1354 5 171 26 SOLNA Sweden V
357. y IRComm C 3 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Pin Outs Pin 1 Figure C 1 ActiveSync Port COM1 Table C 3 PPT 8800 ActiveSync Port COM1 Pin Outs ext 5 volts a C 4 Appendix D Keypad Maps Introduction This appendix contains the keypad map for the keypad configuration of the terminal Each key is listed in the table with its value depending on the state of the keypad As shown below when the QD key is pressed on the keypad the default state displays the number 1 After pressing the Shift key the press of the 1 key acts as a Clear button VK ASCII Default Code Value State Decimal Decimal In addition to key values VK codes and ASCII values are listed for each key where applicable D 1 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide Keypads uU Y Figure D 1 Standard 6 Key Keypad Table D 1 Standard 6 Key Keypad Functionality Default VK Code ASCII Value State Decimal Decimal a a aan Exam Software T KU Lighten screen GD E screen D 2 Keypad Maps Table D 1 Standard 6 Key Keypad Functionality Continued Default VK Code ASCII Value State Decimal Decimal s EL IL E 34 Lo do dq po p D 3 A PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide GD G2 83 EP EE Qu GH 85 EO ED CY
358. ype e Cancelcloses the Scan screen Files Tap Files on the Symbol Launcher window for a file browser utility InkWiz Example It provides similar Windows Explorer like functionality and allows the user to browse cut copy paste and delete files as well as execute the program ES InkWiz Example ae m2 1 22 e amp C Application amp C ConnMgr GACLOG TXT amp C My Documents amp C Platform amp C profiles amp C Program Files Figure B 4 InkWiz Example Window B 4 Demo Program Ctl Panel Tap Ctl Panel on the Symbol Launcher window to access the Control Panel where you can specify settings for your terminal ES CtlPanel Example 4 2 3 18 e Control Panel System Versions Unique Unit ID Persist Date and Time Touch Calibrate Comm Settings Audio Settings Scanner Settings 524 Settings RE Figure B 5 Control Panel Screen About Tap About on the Control Panel to view the version of the Control Panel ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 3 29 ok CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Version 4 1 9 1 Copyright 1999 7003 Symbol Technologies Figure B 6 About Screen B 5 PPT 8800 with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide System Versions Tap System Versions to view version information for the applications on your terminal ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 3 20 e PocketPC OS Yersion 04 20 OEM Name SYMBOL DEM Yersion

Product Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents